Operating Instructions: D-Lab.1 Family

Operating Instructions
Digital Minilab
d-lab.1 family
Operation
Order number DD+18070032D0
Edition 2005-05-01
Version English, 03003_04
leere Seite
List of Chapters
Edition Chapter
Contents..................................................................2005-05-01 ...................0
Introduction ...........................................................2005-05-01 ...................1
Overview .................................................................2005-05-01 ...................2
Chemicals...............................................................2005-05-01 ...................3
Settings and Configurations ............................2005-05-01 ...................4
Tests..........................................................................2005-05-01 ...................5
Preparing konventional Orders.......................2005-05-01 ...................6
image box workstation:
Preparing digital Orders ....................................2005-05-01 ...................7
Order Handling......................................................2005-05-01 ...................8
Troubleshooting....................................................2005-05-01 ...................9
Maintenance..........................................................2005-05-01 ................10
Technical Data ......................................................2005-05-01 ................11
Environmental Protection and Disposal......2005-05-01 ................12
Operation Interruption .......................................2005-05-01 ................13
List of Abbreviations and Glossary ................2005-05-01 ................14
Index.........................................................................2005-05-01 ................15
Modification History
Version Edition Modifications

03003_00 2004-01-02 Starting Version
03003_01 2004-06-01 Four Machine Versions
New Software Versions:
7.00F (d-lab.1) and 1.2 (image box workstation)
03003_02 2004-12-01 New Software Version: 8.00x (d-lab.1)
03003_03 2004-12-15 New Software Versions:
9.00x (d-lab.1) and 3.0.x (image box workstation)
03003_04 2005-05-01 Twelve Machine Versions
Published in compliance with EN 55022 (valid in EU):
Warning!
The equipment complies with the limits for a Class A device. Operation of the equipment
in residential areas may cause radio interference in which case the user at his own
expense will be requested to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.
© 2005 AgfaPhoto GmbH. All rights reserved.

No part of these instructions may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any form or by
any means without prior written permission by AgfaPhoto GmbH.
AgfaPhoto is used under license of Agfa-Gevaert AG.

d-lab.1 family: Operation Contents
Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Standards and Rules ....................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 CE Symbol........................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Explanations regarding the Operation and Service Manual..........................................................................1-2
1.2.1 Available Documentation ..........................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2 Use of the Operation Manual ...................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.3 Guideline for the User .................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.4 Means of Representation...........................................................................................................................1-5
1.2.4.1 Descriptive and instructive texts.........................................................................................1-5
1.2.4.2 Text Styles and Symbols.........................................................................................................1-5
1.2.4.3 Safety Instructions....................................................................................................................1-6
1.3 Use of the Machines ....................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.1 Purpose .............................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.2 Appropriate Use .............................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.3 Inappropriate Use..........................................................................................................................................1-7
1.4 Legal Situation ...............................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.4.1 Manufacturer Information..........................................................................................................................1-8
1.4.2 Copyright..........................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.5 Warranty and Liability .................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.5.1 Designation of Persons...............................................................................................................................1-9
1.5.2 Owner’s Obligation.......................................................................................................................................1-9
1.5.3 Warranty........................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.5.4 Exclusion of Liability.................................................................................................................................1-10
1.6 Consumables and Spare Parts...............................................................................................................................1-10
1.7 Hotline............................................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.8 Safety Instructions.....................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.8.1 General...........................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.8.2 Laser in the CD Drives of the d-lab.1 and the image box workstation..................................1-11
1.8.3 d-lab.1 family...............................................................................................................................................1-12
1.8.3.1 General.......................................................................................................................................1-12
1.8.3.2 Transport....................................................................................................................................1-12
1.8.3.3 Installation................................................................................................................................1-12
1.8.3.4 Operation...................................................................................................................................1-13
1.8.3.5 Handling Processing Chemicals .......................................................................................1-14
1.8.3.6 Service and Repair Work .....................................................................................................1-15
1.8.3.7 Warnings and Information Labels on the d-lab.1.......................................................1-16
1.8.4 image box workstation ............................................................................................................................1-19
1.8.4.1 Transport....................................................................................................................................1-19
1.8.4.2 Installation................................................................................................................................1-19
1.8.4.3 Instructions of correct connection...................................................................................1-20
1.8.4.4 Operation...................................................................................................................................1-21
1.8.4.5 Power supply unit ..................................................................................................................1-22
1.8.4.6 Service and repair work .......................................................................................................1-22
1.9 Storage ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-23
1.9.1 Chemicals .....................................................................................................................................................1-23
1.9.2 Photographic Paper...................................................................................................................................1-23
1.10 Data Backup .................................................................................................................................................................1-23
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-i

Contents d-lab.1 family: Operation
2 Overview........................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Versions (Illustrations).................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 d-lab.1 with Film Processor ......................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 d-lab.1s .............................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 netlab.1.............................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.4 Overview (Table)............................................................................................................................................2-4
2.2 Complete Machine .......................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Main Components ........................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.2 Components....................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.3 Product Description......................................................................................................................................................2-8
2.4 Image editing .................................................................................................................................................................2-8
2.5 Functional Procedure...................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.5.1 Film Processing (d-lab.1 with Film Processor)...................................................................................2-9
2.5.2 Scanning ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.3 Image Processing ...................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.4 Print Engine ................................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.5.5 Exposure and Paper Transport............................................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.6 Paper Processor.......................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.7 Sorter.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.8 Sorting ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.5.8.1 Version Dependent Sorters................................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.8.2 Splices in paper rolls ............................................................................................................ 2-14
2.5.8.3 Densitometer........................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.6 Operating Controls .................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.6.1 Buttons and Timer Lamp......................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.6.2 Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.6.2.1 Version Dependent Monitors............................................................................................. 2-16
2.6.2.2 Touch Screen Monitor .......................................................................................................... 2-16
2.6.2.3 CRT Monitor with mouse and keyboard ........................................................................ 2-16
2.7 Switching on the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.7.1 Manual Switch-On..................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.7.2 Switch-on, automatic (Timer)................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.7.3 System Start ................................................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.8 Ready for Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.8.1 Operator Login ............................................................................................................................................ 2-19
2.8.2 Start Screen ................................................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.8.3 Functions which cannot be activated................................................................................................ 2-20
2.8.4 Defining the Language and the Country-specific Settings for the User Interface ............ 2-21
2.8.4.1 Creating, changing, deleting users ................................................................................. 2-23
2.8.4.2 Changing the user ................................................................................................................. 2-24
2.9 Switching off the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.9.1 Switching off the Machine (Timer mode) ......................................................................................... 2-25
2.9.1.1 Calling the Timer ................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.9.1.2 Changing the Timer............................................................................................................... 2-26
2.9.2 Switching Off the Machine partially (Sleep Mode)....................................................................... 2-27
2.9.3 Switching Off the Machine (Timer inactive).................................................................................... 2-27
2.10 Screen Structure: d-lab.1 and image box workstation................................................................................. 2-28
2.10.1 Information Area ........................................................................................................................................ 2-29
2.10.2 Buttons (fields activating a function)................................................................................................. 2-30
2.10.3 Pulldown Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.10.4 Popup Windows.......................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.10.4.1 Info, query and warning Popup......................................................................................... 2-31
2.10.4.2 Error Popup............................................................................................................................... 2-32
0-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.10.5 Input Screen.................................................................................................................................................2-33

2.10.6 Numeric Keypad.........................................................................................................................................2-34
2.10.7 Reorder Keyboard.......................................................................................................................................2-35
2.10.8 Menu Bar.......................................................................................................................................................2-36
2.11 Menu Overview ...........................................................................................................................................................2-37
2.11.1 Print Modes..................................................................................................................................................2-37
2.11.2 Settings..........................................................................................................................................................2-38
2.11.2.1 Product configurations / Loading and saving the settings....................................2-38
2.11.2.2 Machine settings....................................................................................................................2-39
2.11.3 Tests................................................................................................................................................................2-40
2.11.4 End of Work..................................................................................................................................................2-40
2.11.5 Status Information / Help ......................................................................................................................2-41
2.11.6 Other Menus ................................................................................................................................................2-42
2.12 Info...................................................................................................................................................................................2-43
2.12.1 Calling up Info Film Processor..............................................................................................................2-44
2.12.2 Calling up Info Scanner...........................................................................................................................2-44
2.12.3 Calling up Info Printer..............................................................................................................................2-45
2.12.4 Calling up Info Paper Processor ...........................................................................................................2-46
2.12.5 Calling up Version Info ............................................................................................................................2-46
2.12.6 Calling up Error List...................................................................................................................................2-47
2.13 Help .................................................................................................................................................................................2-49
2.13.1 Help Function for the Active Screen...................................................................................................2-49
2.13.2 Navigation in the Help menu................................................................................................................2-49
2.13.3 Navigation in the error help function.................................................................................................2-50
3 Chemicals..........................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Order Numbers (ABC Codes) for d-lab.1 Chemicals and Replenisher........................................................3-1
3.2 Safety Regulations for the Handling of Chemicals...........................................................................................3-2
3.3 Opening / Closing the Tank Section Cover.........................................................................................................3-3
3.3.1 Film Processor................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3.2 Paper Processor .............................................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 Preparing the Machine Tanks...................................................................................................................................3-5
3.5 Mixing AgfaPhoto Chemicals in the Machine Tanks.......................................................................................3-6
3.6 Inserting Chemical Filters..........................................................................................................................................3-7
3.6.1 Film Processor................................................................................................................................................3-7
3.6.2 Paper Processor .............................................................................................................................................3-7
3.7 Replenisher Mixing with the Easy Film Box and Easy Paper Box ...............................................................3-8
3.7.1 Replenisher tanks and docking station in the Film Processor.....................................................3-8
3.7.2 Replenisher tanks, water tank and docking station in the Paper Processor ..........................3-8
3.7.3 Filling the water tank (Machines with Docking)...............................................................................3-9
3.7.4 Film Processor: inserting a new Filmbox .............................................................................................3-9
3.7.5 Paper Processor: inserting a new Paperbox.....................................................................................3-10
3.8 Replenisher Mixing for Machines with Open Chemicals (Paper Processor) ........................................3-11
3.8.1 Usage open confectioned chemicals .................................................................................................3-11
3.8.2 Using box chemicals.................................................................................................................................3-11
3.8.2.1 Mixing Instructions................................................................................................................3-11
3.8.2.2 Parameter..................................................................................................................................3-11
3.8.3 Using the MSC/d-lab.3 Replenishers.................................................................................................3-12
3.8.3.1 Mixing Instructions for starter oc.....................................................................................3-12
3.9 Other Operations to be performed prior to Production Start .....................................................................3-13
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-iii

4 Settings and Configurations ............................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Administrator Actions..................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Required Settings .........................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Creating Order Configurations .................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.3 Saving Settings and Configurations ......................................................................................................4-3
4.1.4 Order of the Settings ...................................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.5 Measuring Units ............................................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.6 Explanations of the Machine Settings Screen...................................................................................4-4
4.2 User interface and User...............................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.1 User Interface: Entering country-specific Settings...........................................................................4-6
4.2.2 User Manager: Entering user-specific Settings .................................................................................4-8
4.2.2.1 User – Edit the list....................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.2.2 Editing user settings ................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.2.3 Assigning user rights ............................................................................................................ 4-10
4.3 Paper Configurations ................................................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.3.1 Standard Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.2 Coding the Paper Magazines ................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.3 Defining Paper Surfaces.......................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.3.3.1 Paper surfaces – Edit the list ............................................................................................ 4-14
4.3.3.2 Paper surfaces: Defining the paper magazine coding ............................................. 4-14
4.3.4 Defining Paper Widths............................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.4.1 Paper widths – Edit the list................................................................................................ 4-15
4.3.4.2 Paper widths: Defining the paper magazine coding................................................. 4-16
4.3.5 Defining the Paper Configuration........................................................................................................ 4-17
4.3.5.1 Paper configuration – Edit the list .................................................................................. 4-17
4.3.5.2 Paper configuration: Checking the paper magazine coding ................................. 4-17
4.3.5.3 Setting the paper Offsets .................................................................................................... 4-18
4.4 Chemistry...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.4.1 Film Processor Settings (d-lab.1 with Film Processor) ................................................................ 4-21
4.4.1.1 Film Processor: Setting the replenishment rates....................................................... 4-21
4.4.1.2 Film Processor: Setting the temperatures / Calibrating the temperature
sensors ....................................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.4.1.3 Film Processor: Calibrating the water pumps ............................................................. 4-24
4.4.2 Paper Processor Settings ........................................................................................................................ 4-25
4.4.2.1 Paper Processor: Setting the replenishment rates.................................................... 4-25
4.4.2.2 Paper Processor: Setting the temperatures / Calibrating the temperature
sensors ....................................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.4.2.3 Paper Processor: Calibrating the Water Pumps.......................................................... 4-28
4.5 Machine......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.5.1 Timer............................................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.5.1.1 Defining the ON/OFF Times and the Standard Users............................................... 4-29
4.5.1.2 Calendar: Defining Off-Days .............................................................................................. 4-31
4.5.2 Importing Indexprint Layouts / Combiprint Layouts.................................................................... 4-32
4.5.2.1 Searching files......................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.5.2.2 Settings for the IPLayout Software.................................................................................. 4-34
4.5.2.3 Overview of the AGFA standard Indexprint layouts .................................................. 4-35
4.5.3 Printer Settings........................................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.5.4 Scanner Settings (not for netlab.1) ..................................................................................................... 4-37
4.6 Production Balance ................................................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.6.1 General Information.................................................................................................................................. 4-38
4.6.2 Calling up the Production Balance..................................................................................................... 4-39
4.6.3 Selecting Color Negative or Digital.................................................................................................... 4-39
4.6.3.1 Overview: Identical and different parameters for color negative and
Digital......................................................................................................................................... 4-40
0-iv 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.4 Identical Parameters for Color Negatives and Digital .................................................................4-41

4.6.4.1 Correction Intensity (for Color negative and Digital) ...............................................4-41
4.6.4.2 Sharpness – Edges (for Color negatives and Digital) ...............................................4-42
4.6.4.3 Saturation (for Color negatives and Digital) ................................................................4-43
4.6.4.4 Sharpness – Grain (for Color negatives and Digital).................................................4-43
4.6.4.5 Gradation (for Color negatives and Digital)..................................................................4-44
4.6.4.6 Surface contrast (for Color negative and Digital).......................................................4-44
4.6.4.7 Detail Contrast (for Color negatives and Digital).......................................................4-45
4.6.4.8 Red-eyes correction (for color negatives and digital)...............................................4-45
4.6.4.9 Portrait logic (for color negative and digital) ..............................................................4-46
4.6.4.10 Brightness: Lights, Medium Tones, Shadows...............................................................4-47
4.6.5 Different Parameters for Color Negatives and Digital .................................................................4-47
4.6.6 Digital: Entry of Corrections...................................................................................................................4-48
4.6.6.1 Color/density corrections (digital)...................................................................................4-48
4.6.6.2 Image enhancement (Digital)............................................................................................4-49
4.6.7 Color Negative: Entry of Corrections ..................................................................................................4-51
4.6.7.1 Image enhancement (Color Negative) ...........................................................................4-51
4.6.7.2 Learning TFS (Color Negative) ...........................................................................................4-53
4.6.7.3 Panorama Identification (Color Negative) ....................................................................4-54
4.6.8 Color/Density Logic (Color Negative) ................................................................................................4-55
4.6.8.1 TFS Color....................................................................................................................................4-55
4.6.8.2 TFS Density...............................................................................................................................4-58
4.6.9 Selector Logic (Color Negative)............................................................................................................4-59
4.6.9.1 TFS Selector..............................................................................................................................4-60
4.6.9.2 Color/Density Corrections..................................................................................................4-61
4.7 Network Orders, Settings ........................................................................................................................................4-63
4.8 Software.........................................................................................................................................................................4-65
4.8.1 Ordering optional software components ..........................................................................................4-65
4.8.2 Updating the main software / Enabling software components ...............................................4-66
4.9 Date / Time ..................................................................................................................................................................4-68
4.10 Other Settings..............................................................................................................................................................4-69
4.11 Product Configurations ............................................................................................................................................4-70
4.11.1 Notes about the Creation, Modification and Deletion of Configurations.............................4-71
4.12 Print Sizes .....................................................................................................................................................................4-73
4.12.1 Standard Settings.......................................................................................................................................4-73
4.12.2 Print Sizes – Edit the List .......................................................................................................................4-74
4.12.2.1 Editing print size for film mask 135FF ...........................................................................4-75
4.12.2.2 Editing the print size for film mask IX240 ...................................................................4-76
4.12.2.3 Editing the print size for the slide film mask ..............................................................4-78
4.12.2.4 Editing the print size for the Digital film mask ..........................................................4-79
4.12.2.5 Reproduction............................................................................................................................4-81
4.12.3 Selecting a Color........................................................................................................................................4-83
4.12.4 Defining a new Color................................................................................................................................4-83
4.13 Correction Configurations .......................................................................................................................................4-84
4.13.1 Correction Configurations– Edit the list ...........................................................................................4-84
4.13.2 Editing a Correction Configuration......................................................................................................4-85
4.13.2.1 Luminance contrast and luminance density for slides ............................................4-87
4.14 Back Print Configuration .........................................................................................................................................4-88
4.14.1 Standard Settings.......................................................................................................................................4-88
4.14.2 Back Print Configuration – Edit the List ...........................................................................................4-88
4.14.3 Editing a Back Print Configuration......................................................................................................4-90
4.14.3.1 Parameters for the back print (film mask-dependent) .............................................4-90
4.14.3.2 IX240 film coding ..................................................................................................................4-92
4.14.3.3 IX240 back print.....................................................................................................................4-92
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-v

4.15 Front Print Configurations....................................................................................................................................... 4-93

4.15.1 Front Print Configurations – Edit the List......................................................................................... 4-93
4.15.2 Editing the Front Print Configuration................................................................................................. 4-94
4.16 Indexprint Configurations ....................................................................................................................................... 4-95
4.16.1 Indexprint Configurations – Edit the List ......................................................................................... 4-95
4.16.1.1 Editing the Indexprint configuration............................................................................... 4-96
4.16.2 Standard Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 4-97
4.17 Combiprint Configurations ..................................................................................................................................... 4-98
4.17.1 Combiprint Configurations – Edit the List ....................................................................................... 4-98
4.17.1.1 Editing the Combiprint configuration............................................................................. 4-99
4.18 Easy Configurations.................................................................................................................................................4-101
4.18.1 Allowing / refusing the Handling of Network Orders in the Easy Mode ............................4-101
4.18.2 Allocating Configurations for the Easy Mode ...............................................................................4-102
4.19 Autosave Configurations .......................................................................................................................................4-103
4.19.1 Standard Settings ....................................................................................................................................4-103
4.19.2 Autosave Configurations– Edit the List...........................................................................................4-104
4.19.3 Editing Autosave Configuration..........................................................................................................4-104
4.20 Order Configurations...............................................................................................................................................4-106
4.20.1 Standard Settings ....................................................................................................................................4-107
4.20.2 Order Configurations – Edit the List.................................................................................................4-108
4.20.3 Editing the Order Configuration .........................................................................................................4-109
4.20.3.1 Selecting a configuration type........................................................................................4-109
4.20.3.2 Selecting sub-configurations...........................................................................................4-110
4.21 Saving Settings and Configurations..................................................................................................................4-112
4.22 Loading Settings and Configurations ...............................................................................................................4-113
5 Tests ................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Test Prints: MBL (Master Balance) and PBL (Paper Balance) .......................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Conditions for Executing an MBL and PBL..........................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Calibrating the Machine after First Operation or after New Software Installation..............5-3
5.1.2.1 Printing a PBL for the master paper...................................................................................5-3
5.1.2.2 Printing an MBL.........................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.2.3 Printing a PBL for all other papers .....................................................................................5-4
5.1.2.4 Copying paper data ..................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.2.5 Gradient Correction..................................................................................................................5-6
5.1.2.6 Save Settings..............................................................................................................................5-7
5.1.2.7 Setting the production balance...........................................................................................5-7
5.1.3 Daily Calibration with the MBL ...............................................................................................................5-8
5.1.4 Special Cases .................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.1.4.1 Calibrating paper (PBL) without MBL (exception).........................................................5-9
5.1.4.2 Non master paper: Calibrating for new paper or emulsion changes for
a paper ..........................................................................................................................................5-9
5.1.4.3 Complete New Calibration ....................................................................................................5-9
5.2 Scanner Calibration (Pico) ...................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.2.1 Pico: Procedure........................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.2.2 Pico: Automatic .......................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.3 Pico: Manual................................................................................................................................................ 5-11
6 Preparing conventional Orders ........................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Preparing Films for Processing (d-lab.1 with Film Processor) ......................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Processable Film Sizes in the Film Processor....................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Film 135 ...........................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.3 Film size 120 (roll film) ..............................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.4 Film size 110 (Pocket) ................................................................................................................................6-2
0-vi 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

6.1.5 Film Splicing Station ...................................................................................................................................6-3

6.1.6 Splicing the Film to the Leader Card and attaching the Order Number ..................................6-4
6.1.7 Film IX240.......................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.8 Putting the Film in the Processing Magazine....................................................................................6-7
6.2 Preparing Paper Magazines.......................................................................................................................................6-8
6.2.1 Inserting Paper in the Magazine..........................................................................................................6-10
6.2.2 Coding the Paper Magazines.................................................................................................................6-11
6.2.3 Changing the paper magazine..............................................................................................................6-12
6.2.4 Changing the Film Mask .........................................................................................................................6-13
6.3 Film IX240 ....................................................................................................................................................................6-14
6.3.1 Film IX240, Handling ...............................................................................................................................6-14
6.3.2 Film Cassette IX240 .................................................................................................................................6-14
7 image box workstation.......................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Switch on..........................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Preparing the image box for usage of the workstation Software................................................................7-1
7.2.1 Installation CD Version 3.0.4....................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.2 Installation CD Version 3.1.0....................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.3 Installation CD Version 6...........................................................................................................................7-3
7.3 Actions of the Administrator.....................................................................................................................................7-6
7.3.1 Entering the settings. ..................................................................................................................................7-6
7.3.2 Defining Order Configurations .................................................................................................................7-6
7.3.3 Saving Settings and Configurations.......................................................................................................7-7
7.3.4 Sequence of the Settings...........................................................................................................................7-7
7.4 Keyboard Displays.........................................................................................................................................................7-8
7.4.1 Alphanumeric Keyboard .............................................................................................................................7-8
7.4.2 Numeric Keypad............................................................................................................................................7-9
7.5 Menu Overview ...........................................................................................................................................................7-10
7.5.1 Print Modes..................................................................................................................................................7-10
7.5.2 Settings..........................................................................................................................................................7-11
7.5.2.1 Product Configurations / Loading and Saving the Settings ..................................7-11
7.5.2.2 Machine Settings ...................................................................................................................7-12
7.5.3 Tests................................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.5.4 Shutdown......................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.5.5 Status Information / Help ......................................................................................................................7-13
7.5.6 Further Menus .............................................................................................................................................7-14
7.6 Settings and Configurations...................................................................................................................................7-15
7.7 Machine Settings .......................................................................................................................................................7-16
7.7.1 User Level: Change User / Change Password.................................................................................7-17
7.7.2 User Interface: Entering Country Specific Settings.......................................................................7-18
7.7.3 Licenses .........................................................................................................................................................7-19
7.7.3.1 Ordering Optional Software Components.....................................................................7-19
7.7.3.2 Activating Main Software and Software Components .............................................7-20
7.7.4 Importing Layouts......................................................................................................................................7-21
7.7.4.1 Importing Indexprint Layouts ............................................................................................7-21
7.7.4.2 Importing Combiprint / Passport Print Layouts .........................................................7-22
7.7.5 Software Update.........................................................................................................................................7-23
7.7.6 Defining the Label Print ..........................................................................................................................7-24
7.7.6.1 Customer Specific Logo for the Label.............................................................................7-25
7.7.7 Activating DPOF .........................................................................................................................................7-25
7.7.8 Network Orders, Settings ........................................................................................................................7-26
7.7.9 Date / Time..................................................................................................................................................7-28
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-vii

7.8 Other Settings ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-29

7.8.1 image box Control Center (ICC) ........................................................................................................... 7-31
7.9 Product Configurations ............................................................................................................................................ 7-32
7.9.1 Instructions for Creating, Changing, and Deleting Configurations......................................... 7-33
7.10 Configurations ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-35
7.10.1 Defining the Paper Surfaces .................................................................................................................. 7-35
7.10.1.1 Paper Surfaces – Editing the List..................................................................................... 7-35
7.10.1.2 Defining Paper Surfaces ...................................................................................................... 7-35
7.10.2 Defining the Paper Widths..................................................................................................................... 7-36
7.10.3 Front Print Configurations ...................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.10.3.1 Front Print Configurations – Editing the List............................................................... 7-37
7.10.3.2 Defining Front Print Configurations................................................................................ 7-37
7.10.3.3 Selecting a Color.................................................................................................................... 7-38
7.10.3.4 Defining a New Color ........................................................................................................... 7-38
7.10.4 Back Print Configurations....................................................................................................................... 7-39
7.10.4.1 Back Print Configurations – Editing the List ............................................................... 7-39
7.10.4.2 Defining Back Print Configurations................................................................................. 7-39
7.10.4.3 Parameters for the Back Print ........................................................................................... 7-40
7.10.5 Correction Configurations....................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.10.5.1 Correction Configurations – Editing the List............................................................... 7-41
7.10.5.2 Defining the correction configuration............................................................................ 7-42
7.10.5.3 Red-eyes correction .............................................................................................................. 7-43
7.10.5.4 Portrait logic ............................................................................................................................ 7-43
7.10.6 Autosave Configurations......................................................................................................................... 7-44
7.10.6.1 Autosave Configurations – Editing the List ................................................................. 7-44
7.10.6.2 Defining Autosave Configurations................................................................................... 7-44
7.10.7 Global Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 7-46
7.10.8 Paper Configurations................................................................................................................................ 7-48
7.10.8.1 Paper Configurations – Editing the List ........................................................................ 7-48
7.10.8.2 Defining Paper Configurations.......................................................................................... 7-48
7.10.9 Indexprint Configurations....................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.9.1 Indexprint Configurations – Editing the List ............................................................... 7-49
7.10.9.2 Defining Indexprint Configurations................................................................................. 7-50
7.10.10 Combiprint Configurations..................................................................................................................... 7-51
7.10.10.1 Combiprint Configurations – Editing the List ............................................................. 7-51
7.10.10.2 Defining Combiprint Configurations............................................................................... 7-52
7.10.11 Product Configurations............................................................................................................................ 7-54
7.10.11.1 Product Configurations – Editing the List .................................................................... 7-54
7.10.11.2 Selecting the Configuration Type .................................................................................... 7-55
7.10.11.3 Defining Product Configurations...................................................................................... 7-56
7.11 Saving Settings and Configurations.................................................................................................................... 7-60
7.12 Load Settings and Configurations........................................................................................................................ 7-61
7.12.1 Delete Backup............................................................................................................................................. 7-62
7.13 Operation....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-63
7.13.1 Preparing Print Orders.............................................................................................................................. 7-63
7.13.1.1 Input and Output Formats for Image Files ................................................................... 7-63
7.13.2 Order Handling – Overview ................................................................................................................... 7-65
7.13.2.1 Simple Standard Orders for Prints of Digital Images................................................ 7-65
7.13.2.2 Orders of Digital Images Requiring Configuration Changes or Preview
Function..................................................................................................................................... 7-65
7.13.2.3 Orders of Prints to be Scanned ......................................................................................... 7-65
7.13.2.4 Local Orders to Burn CDs.................................................................................................... 7-65
7.13.2.5 Orders Digitized on the d-lab.1 for CD Burning.......................................................... 7-65
7.13.2.6 Print Modes.............................................................................................................................. 7-66
0-viii 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13.3 Easy Mode.....................................................................................................................................................7-67

7.13.3.1 Show configuration ...............................................................................................................7-69
7.13.3.2 Order in d-workflow...............................................................................................................7-69
7.13.4 Network: CD Burning................................................................................................................................7-70
7.13.4.1 CD Burning – without Preview .........................................................................................7-70
7.13.4.2 CD Burning – with Preview................................................................................................7-71
7.13.5 Standard ........................................................................................................................................................7-72
7.13.5.1 New Orders: Standard: Loading Image Files from Storage Media .......................7-72
7.13.5.2 Saved Orders ............................................................................................................................7-74
7.13.5.3 Waiting Orders ........................................................................................................................7-75
7.13.5.4 Changing Configurations.....................................................................................................7-76
7.13.5.5 Changing corrections............................................................................................................7-77
7.13.5.6 Starting an Order Setup .......................................................................................................7-78
7.14 Standard: Preview ......................................................................................................................................................7-79
7.14.1 Standard: Image Editing..........................................................................................................................7-80
7.14.1.1 Standard: Image Editing Color / Density Corrections..............................................7-81
7.14.1.2 Standard: Image Editing, Crop...........................................................................................7-82
7.14.1.3 Standard: Image Editing, Image Improvement ...........................................................7-83
7.14.1.4 Brightness: Lights, Medium Tones, Shadows...............................................................7-84
7.14.2 Standard: Special .......................................................................................................................................7-85
7.14.2.1 Standard: Special, Text.........................................................................................................7-86
7.14.2.2 Standard: Special, Format Text .........................................................................................7-86
7.14.2.3 Standard: Special, Border ....................................................................................................7-87
7.14.3 Standard: Scan Image ..............................................................................................................................7-88
7.14.3.1 Modifying a Scanned Image ..............................................................................................7-89
7.15 Deleting Network Orders.........................................................................................................................................7-90
7.16 Test ..................................................................................................................................................................................7-92
7.16.1 Calling up the Test Screen .....................................................................................................................7-92
7.16.2 Starting the Tests.......................................................................................................................................7-92
7.17 Finishing ........................................................................................................................................................................7-93
7.17.1 Changing to kiosk Software...................................................................................................................7-93
7.17.2 Start Computer Based Training (CBT).................................................................................................7-94
7.17.3 Activating the image box Control Center (ICC) ..............................................................................7-95
7.17.4 Finish / Shutdown .....................................................................................................................................7-96
7.18 Information Area.........................................................................................................................................................7-97
7.19 Status Information .....................................................................................................................................................7-97
7.19.1 Calling up the Order Info ........................................................................................................................7-98
7.19.2 Calling up the Version Info ....................................................................................................................7-99
7.20 Help .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-100
7.20.1 Help Function for the Active Screen................................................................................................ 7-100
7.20.2 Navigation in the Help Window ........................................................................................................ 7-100
7.21 Trigger a New Start (Stop Button)..................................................................................................................... 7-101
7.22 Popup Windows ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-102
7.22.1 Info, Query, and Warning Popup ....................................................................................................... 7-102
7.22.2 Error Popup................................................................................................................................................ 7-103
7.23 Setting Brightness and Contrast........................................................................................................................ 7-104
7.24 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-105
7.24.1 Software Problems ................................................................................................................................. 7-105
7.24.1.1 New Start................................................................................................................................ 7-105
7.24.1.2 New Installation of the Software for the image box workstation..................... 7-105
7.24.1.3 Selecting the Application ................................................................................................ 7-106
7.24.1.4 Restoring the Settings....................................................................................................... 7-106
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-ix

8 Production on the d-lab.1 .................................................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Prerequisites ...................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Order Handling – Overview.......................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2.1 Version Dependent Order Handling.......................................................................................................8-1
8.2.2 Film Processing only: All processable Film Sizes.............................................................................8-1
8.2.3 Film Processing and Printing in the Easy Mode: Film Size 135 .................................................8-2
8.2.4 Film Processing and Printing in the Standard Mode: Film Size 135.........................................8-2
8.2.5 Film Processing and Printing: Film Sizes 110 and IX240.............................................................8-2
8.2.6 Reorders ...........................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.6.1 Films with extended DX code ..............................................................................................8-3
8.2.6.2 Films without extended DX code or single negatives ................................................8-4
8.2.6.3 Slide prints ..................................................................................................................................8-5
8.2.6.4 Network orders...........................................................................................................................8-5
8.2.6.5 File prints .....................................................................................................................................8-6
8.2.6.6 Burning CD ..................................................................................................................................8-6
8.3 Print Modes .....................................................................................................................................................................8-7
8.3.1 Print Mode and Negative Mask...............................................................................................................8-8
8.3.2 Paper Display .................................................................................................................................................8-8
8.4 Order Number (automatic / manual).....................................................................................................................8-9
8.4.1 Order Number, automatic..........................................................................................................................8-9
8.4.2 Order Number, manual ...............................................................................................................................8-9
8.5 Notes regarding the Modification / Change of Configurations................................................................ 8-10
8.5.1 Selecting an Order Configuration........................................................................................................ 8-10
8.5.2 Modifying the Order Configuration ..................................................................................................... 8-11
8.6 Easy ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-13
8.6.1 Simple Standard Orders from digital Images for Prints / Indexprints................................... 8-13
8.6.2 Film Processing and Printing in the Easy Mode (Film sizes 135 and IX240) ..................... 8-13
8.6.2.1 Selecting a product ............................................................................................................... 8-14
8.6.2.2 Status displays in the Easy dialog ................................................................................... 8-15
8.6.3 Printing in the Easy Mode (Film sizes 135 and IX240)............................................................... 8-16
8.6.3.1 Selecting a product ............................................................................................................... 8-16
8.7 Order Selectionin the Standard Mode................................................................................................................ 8-17
8.7.1 Order Selection: Network Orders ......................................................................................................... 8-18
8.7.2 Order Selection: Order Handling continued .................................................................................... 8-18
8.7.3 Order Selection: Overview...................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.7.4 Setting the Order Selection ................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.8 Standard......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.8.1 Film Processing .......................................................................................................................................... 8-23
8.8.1.1 Film Sizes processable in the Film Processor ............................................................. 8-23
8.8.1.2 Film Feed and Film Exit ....................................................................................................... 8-23
8.8.1.3 Changing to the Feeder Input ........................................................................................... 8-24
8.8.1.4 Order Tracing ........................................................................................................................... 8-24
8.8.2 Film Processing with Printing............................................................................................................... 8-25
8.8.2.1 Automatic Film Transfer ...................................................................................................... 8-25
8.8.2.2 Film put into the Film Feeder by Hand.......................................................................... 8-25
8.8.2.3 Putting the Film Magazines in the Film Processor................................................... 8-26
8.8.3 Film Processing without Printing (d-lab.1 with Film Processor).............................................. 8-28
8.8.4 Printing without Film Processing ........................................................................................................ 8-29
8.8.5 Reprints from saved Orders.................................................................................................................... 8-30
0-x 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.8.6
Network Orders...........................................................................................................................................8-31
8.8.6.1 Fetching Network Orders.....................................................................................................8-31
8.8.6.2 Tracing Network Orders .......................................................................................................8-31
8.8.6.3 Deleting Network Orders.....................................................................................................8-32
8.9 Reorders (not netlab.1).............................................................................................................................................8-34
8.9.1 Entering Reorder Lists ..............................................................................................................................8-36
8.10 Manual Positioning (not netlab.1) .......................................................................................................................8-37
8.11 Slide Print (not netlab.1) .........................................................................................................................................8-40
8.11.1 Inserting the Slide Mask .........................................................................................................................8-41
8.12 Slide Film, Option (not netlab.1) ..........................................................................................................................8-43
8.13 File Print (Option) .......................................................................................................................................................8-45
8.14 CD Burning on the d-lab.1 / netlab.1.................................................................................................................8-48
8.15 Preview...........................................................................................................................................................................8-49
8.15.1 Preview with 12 Images..........................................................................................................................8-50
8.15.2 Color/Density Corrections and Image Enhancement in the Preview....................................8-51
8.15.3 Color/Density Corrections......................................................................................................................8-52
8.15.4 Image Enhancement.................................................................................................................................8-53
8.15.5 Image Editing ..............................................................................................................................................8-55
8.15.5.1 Image editing, functions .....................................................................................................8-55
8.15.5.2 Image editing, color/density corrections and image enhancement..................8-56
8.15.5.3 Image editing, defining a crop..........................................................................................8-57
8.15.5.4 Image editing, colored border ...........................................................................................8-58
8.15.5.5 Selecting a color.....................................................................................................................8-58
8.15.5.6 Defining a new color.............................................................................................................8-59
8.16 Finishing an Order......................................................................................................................................................8-59
8.17 Daily Maintenance Jobs before Shutdown .......................................................................................................8-59
8.18 Production Statistics.................................................................................................................................................8-60
8.18.1 Total Statistics and Detail Statistics...................................................................................................8-60
8.18.2 Clickrate (Option).......................................................................................................................................8-62
8.18.2.1 Recorded data..........................................................................................................................8-62
8.18.2.2 Type of saving..........................................................................................................................8-62
8.18.2.3 Export of data...........................................................................................................................8-62
8.18.2.4 Data pickup ..............................................................................................................................8-63
8.18.3 Installing and/or Uninstalling the Clickrate Software ................................................................8-63
8.18.3.1 Deactivating the print modes............................................................................................8-63
8.18.3.2 Additional tools provided by AgfaPhoto........................................................................8-63
9 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Avoiding Handling Problems ....................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Switching off the Machine ........................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.2 Reset..................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.2 Error Messages ...............................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.3 Problems during Film Transport in the Film Processor...................................................................................9-3
9.3.1 Manual Film Transport after a Power Failure .....................................................................................9-3
9.3.2 Emergency-cut Button of the Film Processors ..................................................................................9-3
9.4 Problems during Scanning.........................................................................................................................................9-4
9.4.1 Stopping the Film Drive .............................................................................................................................9-4
9.5 Machine does not react ..............................................................................................................................................9-6
9.5.1 Triggering a Software Reset (Stop Button on Screen).....................................................................9-6
9.5.2 Triggering a System Reset (ON Button)................................................................................................9-7
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-xi

9.6 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.6.1 Procedure in Case of known Error Causes...........................................................................................9-7
9.6.2 Procedure in case of unsolved Errors ....................................................................................................9-8
9.6.3 Procedure for Paper Processor Errors ....................................................................................................9-9
9.6.4 Procedure for Printer Transport Errors...................................................................................................9-9
9.6.5 Procedure for other Error Situations ......................................................................................................9-9
9.7 Help Function for Error Messages ........................................................................................................................ 9-10
9.8 Removing a Film Jam ............................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.8.1 Film Jam During Operation.................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.8.2 Special Case: Film Jam reported during Machine Startup......................................................... 9-11
9.9 Removing a Paper Jam ............................................................................................................................................ 9-12
9.9.1 Paper Jam during Operation.................................................................................................................. 9-12
9.9.2 Special Case: Paper Jam indicated during Machine Startup..................................................... 9-12
9.9.3 Paper Jam in the Paper Transport........................................................................................................ 9-13
9.9.3.1 General Notes.......................................................................................................................... 9-13
9.9.3.2 Removing a Paper Jam at the Paper Magazines........................................................ 9-13
9.9.3.3 Removing a Paper Jam on the Exposure Table........................................................... 9-14
9.9.3.4 Removing a Paper Jam in the Cutter ............................................................................. 9-14
9.9.4 Removing a Paper Jam in the Lane Distributor LD ....................................................................... 9-16
9.10 Removing a Paper Jam in the Paper Processor .............................................................................................. 9-17
9.10.1 Paper Jam in the Wet Section .............................................................................................................. 9-17
9.10.2 Removing a Paper Jam in the Dryer................................................................................................... 9-18
9.10.3 Removing a Paper Jam in the Paper Outlet .................................................................................... 9-18
9.11 Errors during Production.......................................................................................................................................... 9-19
10 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Purpose .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Safety Instructions..................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.3 d-lab.1 Versions .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.4 Maintenance Jobs and Maintenance Intervals............................................................................................... 10-2
10.4.1 Maintenance to be performed by the Customer: d-lab.1 ........................................................... 10-2
10.4.2 Customer Maintenance: Image box workstation........................................................................... 10-3
10.4.3 Maintenance to be performed by the Engineer ............................................................................. 10-3
10.5 Checklist Maintenance Jobs: Engineer.............................................................................................................. 10-4
10.5.1 General Machine........................................................................................................................................ 10-4
10.5.2 Paper Magazine Compartment left and right ................................................................................. 10-4
10.5.3 Film Processor (FP).................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.5.4 Scanner (SC)................................................................................................................................................. 10-5
10.5.5 Paper Transport (PA) ................................................................................................................................. 10-5
10.5.6 Paper Processor (PP)................................................................................................................................. 10-6
10.6 Daily Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.6.1 Cleaning the Leader Cards (d-lab.1 with Film Processor)........................................................... 10-7
10.6.2 Cleaning the APS Film Mask................................................................................................................. 10-7
10.6.3 Cleaning the Drive Rollers in the Film Mask .................................................................................. 10-9
10.6.4 Cleaning the Film Brushes...................................................................................................................10-10
10.6.5 Cleaning the Film Brush for Films IX240 .......................................................................................10-10
10.6.6 Checking the Quality of Chemicals ..................................................................................................10-11
10.6.6.1 Film Processor: Checking the Process .........................................................................10-11
10.6.6.2 Paper Processor: Checking the Process.......................................................................10-12
10.6.7 Before Shutdown......................................................................................................................................10-13
10.6.7.1 Rinsing the Rack Rollers in the Film Processor........................................................10-13
10.6.7.2 Rinsing the Rack Rollers in the Paper Processor.....................................................10-13
0-xii 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.7 Weekly Maintenance............................................................................................................................................. 10-14

10.7.1 Checking the Solution Levels before starting to work ............................................................. 10-14
10.7.1.1 Evaporation Compensation in the Film Processor.................................................. 10-14
10.7.1.2 Paper Processor – important Advice ........................................................................... 10-15
10.7.1.3 Evaporation Compensation in the Paper Processor ............................................... 10-15
10.7.2 Cleaning the Chemical filters ............................................................................................................ 10-16
10.7.2.1 Film Processor ...................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.7.2.2 Paper Processor.................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.7.3 Cleaning the Squeegee Unit in the Film Processor................................................................... 10-17
10.7.4 Film Mask: Removing the Dust ......................................................................................................... 10-17
10.7.5 Checking the Lens and removing the Dust when required..................................................... 10-18
10.7.6 Cleaning the Film Take-up .................................................................................................................. 10-19
10.7.7 Cleaning the Film Chute ...................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.7.8 Removing Paper Dust and Deposits in the Lane Distributor.................................................. 10-20
10.7.9 Cleaning the Paper Guide, the Tank Crossovers, and the Squeegee Unit in the
Paper Processor ....................................................................................................................................... 10-21
10.7.9.1 Paper guide............................................................................................................................ 10-21
10.7.9.2 Removing the Tank Crossovers...................................................................................... 10-22
10.7.9.3 Cleaning the Squeegee Units......................................................................................... 10-22
10.7.10 Cleaning the Densitometer Calibration Plate and the Guide Plates in the Paper
Outlet Unit................................................................................................................................................. 10-23
10.7.11 Cleaning the Dryer Rack ...................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.7.11.1 Cleaning the Sorter ............................................................................................................ 10-26
10.8 Monthly Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.8.1 Cleaning / Replacing the Air Filters................................................................................................ 10-27
10.8.1.1 Film Processor Dryer .......................................................................................................... 10-27
10.8.1.2 Printer (fan box) ................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.8.1.3 Paper Processor.................................................................................................................... 10-28
10.8.2 Replacing Chemical Filters ................................................................................................................. 10-28
10.8.2.1 Replacing the Chemical Filters in the Film Processor .......................................... 10-29
10.8.2.2 Replacing the Chemical Filters in the Paper Processor ....................................... 10-29
10.8.3 Cleaning the Processing Racks ......................................................................................................... 10-30
10.8.3.1 Cleaning the Processing Racks in the Film Processor .......................................... 10-30
10.8.3.2 Cleaning the Processing Racks in the Paper Processor ....................................... 10-31
10.8.4 Cleaning the Exposure Table .............................................................................................................. 10-32
10.9 Maintenance when required ............................................................................................................................... 10-33
10.9.1 Back Printer, Changing the Ink Ribbon .......................................................................................... 10-33
10.9.2 Emptying the Effluent Tanks............................................................................................................... 10-34
10.9.2.1 Film Processor ...................................................................................................................... 10-34
10.9.2.2 Paper Processor.................................................................................................................... 10-35
10.9.3 Cleaning the image box workstation on the outside ................................................................ 10-35
10.10 Consumables for Customer Maintenance...................................................................................................... 10-36
10.11 Cleaning Material.................................................................................................................................................... 10-36
11 Technical Data .................................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Versions..........................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Weight: Machine packed / unpacked................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Dimensions...................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2.1 Machine packed / unpacked.............................................................................................11-2
11.1.2.2 d-lab.1 Components..............................................................................................................11-3
11.1.2.3 Dimensions image box.........................................................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Space requirement for Operation and Service: d-lab.1 / image box......................................11-4
11.1.4 Illustrations / Machine Dimensions...................................................................................................11-5
11.1.5 Version dependent data ..........................................................................................................................11-8
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-xiii

11.2 Complete System....................................................................................................................................................... 11-9

11.3 Film Processor ...........................................................................................................................................................11-10
11.4 Scanner (d-lab.1 with Film Processor / d-lab.1s).........................................................................................11-11
11.5 Digital Input on the Machine or via Network ...............................................................................................11-11
11.6 Digital Input via image box (d-lab.1 allrounder 2 / d-lab.1 plus)..........................................................11-12
11.7 Exposure Unit.............................................................................................................................................................11-12
11.8 Printing ........................................................................................................................................................................11-13
11.9 Paper Transport.........................................................................................................................................................11-13
11.10 Paper Processor ........................................................................................................................................................11-14
11.11 Optional Accessories ..............................................................................................................................................11-16
11.11.1 d-lab.1 starter.........................................................................................................................................11-16
11.11.2 d-lab.1 allrounder 1 .............................................................................................................................11-17
11.11.3 d-lab.1 allrounder 2 .............................................................................................................................11-18
11.11.4 d-lab.1 plus .............................................................................................................................................11-19
11.11.5 d-lab.1s starter oc.................................................................................................................................11-20
11.11.6 d-lab.1s starter.......................................................................................................................................11-21
11.11.7 d-lab.1s basic 1 .....................................................................................................................................11-22
11.11.8 d-lab.1s basic 2 .....................................................................................................................................11-23
11.11.9 d-lab.1s plus ...........................................................................................................................................11-24
11.11.10 netlab.1 starter oc................................................................................................................................11-25
11.11.11 netlab.1 allrounder ..............................................................................................................................11-26
11.11.12 netlab.1 plus...........................................................................................................................................11-27
11.11.13 Accessory Packages: Standard and Optional Accessories ....................................................11-28
11.12 Consumables .............................................................................................................................................................11-30
11.12.1 AGFAPHOTO Type 12 Paper..............................................................................................................11-30
11.12.2 AGFAPHOTO Type AP Paper..............................................................................................................11-31
11.12.3 AGFAPHOTO Sensatis Plus Paper ...................................................................................................11-32
11.12.4 Chemicals, Chemical filters, Control strips ................................................................................11-33
11.12.5 Other .........................................................................................................................................................11-33
11.13 Operating and Service Instructions...................................................................................................................11-34
11.14 Operating Conditions..............................................................................................................................................11-34
11.15 RFI Suppression ........................................................................................................................................................11-34
11.16 Storage and Transport ............................................................................................................................................11-34
12 Environmental Protection and Disposal ............................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Handling of Chemicals............................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1 Legal Regulations...................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Disposal......................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2.1 Exhausted Processing Solutions....................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2.2 Liquid Residues....................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.2.3 Chemical Containers ............................................................................................................ 12-2
12.2 Disposal of the Machine.......................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.3 Energy Saving Hints .................................................................................................................................................. 12-2
13 Operation Interruption ..................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 Maximum Two Weeks .............................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2 More Than Two Weeks............................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.3 Resuming the Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.3.1 Within Two Weeks .................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.3.2 After More than Two Weeks .................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.4 Decommissioning the Machine............................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.5 Deinstalling a Machine............................................................................................................................................ 13-3
14 List of Abbreviations and Glossary .................................................................................... 14-1
15 Index............................................................................................................................... 15-1
■
0-xiv 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1.1 Standards and Rules

The machines of the d-lab.1 family comply with the requirements of the standards and
rules listed below:
98/37/EG:
Machine Directives
73/23/EWG:
Directive for Low Voltage
89/336/EWG:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (according to modifications 91/ 263/EEC and 2/31/EEC).
EN 60950:
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
EN 60825-1:
Safety of Laser Equipment
EN 55022:
Information Technology Equipment – Radio interference – Limits and Methods of
Measurements
EN 55024:
Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Standard - Limits and Methods of
Measurements
EN 61000-6-2:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Basic Standard
Immunity Standard for Industrial Areas (IEC 61000-6-2:1999, modified)
EN 61000-3-2:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limit Values
Limit Values for Harmonic Emissions (IEC 61000-3-2:2000, modified)
EN 61000-3-3:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limit Values
Limit values for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low voltage
supply networks for equipment with a current ≤ 16 A per conductor, which are not subject
to any special connection conditions
(IEC 61000-3-3:1994 + A1:2001).
1.1.2 CE Symbol
The CE symbol describes the conformity of the machine with the requirements of the
EG Directives 89/336/EWG and 73/23/EWG (see Ö Standards and rules).
If other devices are to be connected to the digital minilab, these devices, too, must meet
the requirements of the relevant EG directives.
The machine is a Class A equipment A (EN 55022). This equipment may cause radio
disturbances in residential areas. In this case the user may be required to initiate
respective measures to eliminate such disturbances and pay for these measures.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-1

Introduction d-lab.1 family: Operation
1.2 Explanations regarding the Operation and Service Manual
1.2.1 Available Documentation

Available documentation see Ö Table. Explanation con. the column Available
languages:
D = German
E = English
F = French
I = Italian
S = Spanish
M = Multilingual
The customer receives the Preinstallation Instructions when he orders the machine.
The Operation folder includes two CDs with the available documentation (with the
exception of the circuit diagrams). The Operation Manual – Installation and Operation – is
attached to the machine. More instructions can be ordered from AgfaPhoto.
The Operation Manual must be kept with the machine so that it is accessible for all users.
Operation manual Owner Operator Engineer Available languages

Installation x E D = German
E = English
Operation x DEFIS F = French
I = Italian
Condensed operation x Without text S = Spanish
J = Japanese
Service manual Owner Operator Engineer Available languages Explanation

Repair x E M = Multilingual
Spare Parts List x x M (= DEF)
Circuit Diagrams x E
Preinstallation x DEFIS
The Preinstallation Service Manual is handed out to the customer when he orders the
machine.
The manuals Installation, Operation and Condensed Operation are attached to the
machine. Both manuals must be stored near the machine and must be available to every
operator.
The folder Operation includes two CDs:
One of the CD holds the complete operation manual except the circuit diagrams (file
format pdf); the other one contains a CBT program (Computer Based Training) that should
help the opera to practice the order handling on the d-lab.1 and the image box
workstation.
The customer can order other parts of the operation and service manual from AgfaPhoto.
1-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.2.2 Use of the Operation Manual

The Operation Manual is useful for safe and appropriate working on the machine and with
the machine. Perfect and safe operation of the product requires careful observation of the
Operation Manual and the contained safety instructions. Therefore it must always be
complete and in good condition for easy reading.
All persons working on the machine and with the machine must
– Have read and understood the Operation Manual before they switch on the machine
for the first time.
– Have the Operation Manual at hand when they work on the machine.
– Observe all information and instructions of the Operation Manual.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-3

1.2.3 Guideline for the User

Manual Information
Preinstallation The document assists the customer in the selection of the machines and the preparation of the
place of operation.
Installation This document describes the transport to the installation site, as well as the installation and
implementation of the machine.
Operation Enclosure: Declaration of Conformity
The declaration of conformity is the first sheet in the Operation folder.
The operation manual includes all important information to ensure correct operation by a
trained operator:
Chapter Chapter
0 General table of contents
1 Explanations of the Operation Manual, legal notes, safety instructions, transport and
storage.
2 Presentation of the assembly groups, functions and controls of the machine as well
as the Online Help and Info function.
3 Description of the mixing process for chemicals.
4 Description step by step of the settings to be performed before the production can
be started:
– Adjusting the machine to the lab requirements (machine setup)
– Preparing the machine for the order handling (configurations)
5 Description of the tests ensuring production quality.
6 Description step by step of the preparation of conventional orders
7 Description step by step of the preparation of digital orders on the image box
workstation
8 Description step by step of the handling of orders on the d-lab.1
9 Description of problems the customer can solve himself.
10 Description of the required maintenance jobs on the machine
11 Technical specifications
12 Description of measures for environmental protection and the disposal of the
machine
13 Description of measures for decommissioning the machine
14 Explanation of the abbreviations and special terms used in these instructions
15 Index
Online Help A Help text can be called up on the d-lab.1 and on the image box workstation for every screen
that is currently displayed. The Help function will be explained in chapter 2 of this manual.
1-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.2.4 Means of Representation
1.2.4.1 Descriptive and instructive texts

For visual distinction, the two different types of texts always appear in separate columns:
– Descriptive texts:
Large column on the left (e.g. this text)
– Instructive texts:
Small column on the right (see Ö following example)
Illustrations or screen displays appear on the left side of the text, if any.
– Illustration or This symbol identifies an action to be carried

out.
– Screen display or
This symbol is used unless an action
– free
requires other subordinate operations.
1.2.4.2 Text Styles and Symbols

The following text passages are emphasized by bold print / italic print in this manual:
– Screen designations
Example: Pressing OK will validate the displayed text and close the input screen.
– Button designations
Example: Press Reorder to process reorders
– Reference to sections of the chapter or to other chapters
Example: See also the sections Ö Menu Overview and Screen Structure in chapter 2.
CAUTION!
This symbol identifies Ö Safety instructions.
Note:
This emphasis identifies important information and hints for more efficient work on the
machine.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-5

1.2.4.3 Safety Instructions

The words Caution and Warning in the documentation and on the machine labels indicate
the following risks:
CAUTION!
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation that may cause minor/less severe
injuries to persons or damage to property.
WARNING!
Indicates a possible danger emanating from a product which, in case of non-
observance, may result in severe injuries to persons or even death.
1-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.3 Use of the Machines

1.3.1 Purpose
d-lab.1 family:
– The d-lab.1 versions with Film Processor have been designed exclusively for the
processing of color negative films, and printing of negatives, slides, and digital images
on photographic paper, as well as for saving image files on external media (4 versions).
The d-lab1 allrounder 2 and d-lab.1 plus use the image box workstation for inputs
(preparation of orders) and outputs of digital image files on external media.
– The d-lab.1s versions have been designed exclusively for the printing of negatives,
slides, and digital images on photographic paper, as well as for saving image files on
external media (5 versions).
– The netlab.1 versions have been designed exclusively for the printing of digital
images on photographic paper, as well as saving image files on external media
(3 versions).
image box workstation:
The image box workstation is used to prepare orders for the d-lab.1 allrounder 2 and the
d-lab.1 plus, to burn digital images on CD or transmit them to another output unit for
editing. For this purpose, the input and output units must be defined in the image box
software prior to the operation.
1.3.2 Appropriate Use

d-lab.1 family / image box workstation
The product corresponds to the state of the art and is operationally reliable. The product
may cause danger if it is misused or not used for its intended purpose.
Only strict adherence to all instructions and specifications of this Operation manual
assures the intended use of the machine.
Unauthorized conversions and modifications of the product are not permitted for safety
reasons.
The machine must only be operated with the recommended consumables and under the
specified operating conditions (see Ö Technical Specifications).
CAUTION!
Every other use of the machine may cause damage to the machine and beyond
this injuries to persons and damage to property !
1.3.3 Inappropriate Use

Inappropriate use (misuse) will be:
– Any application not corresponding to the above appropriate use or use outside the
specifications
– Non-observance of the instructions in the manuals
– Non-observance of the safety instructions
– Operation of the machine in a non-operative condition
(regarding function and/or safety)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-7

1.4 Legal Situation

The operation of the machines is ruled by the appropriate regulations for the place of
installation in force in the country concerned.
This Operation Manual includes an EU Conformity Declaration (CE) about the applying
harmonized standards. The conformity declaration is the 1st page in the Operation folder.
CAUTION!
The following safety regulations, warnings and instructions on machine labels
must be observed by all means.
The non-observance may be dangerous for persons and cause damage to the
equipment and the buildings.
Note:
The manufacturer and the service will not assume any responsibilities for accidents and
damage resulting from inappropriate operation.
1.4.1 Manufacturer Information

AgfaPhoto GmbH
Postfach 900151
D- 81536 München, Germany
1.4.2 Copyright
Copies of photographs, negatives and other pictures must not be made without the
permission of the author. Under normal conditions, the Copyright is the property of the
photographer. The person who orders the copy is not always the author of the material.
1-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.5 Warranty and Liability
1.5.1 Designation of Persons

Any natural or legal person using the machine or giving order to use the machine is
called Owner.
The Operator is a person put in charge by the user to operate the machine:
– The operator has been trained to operate the machine, knows the contents of the
present operation manual and has been instructed of the tasks to be performed.
– The operator has been informed about possible risks and dangers that may result in
case of inappropriate handling.
– The operator has been informed about the necessary safety devices, protective
measures and operating conditions.
The Service technicians authorized by AgfaPhoto are responsible for all jobs on and with
the machine the operator is not allowed to do.
1.5.2 Owner’s Obligation

The warranty and availability promises only hold under the following conditions:
– The machines were made and tested conform to the standards and prescriptions listed
in the section Applied standards and prescriptions and left the factory in a technically
perfect and safe condition. In order to keep up this condition and allow safe operation,
the owner must observe the instructions and warning remarks comprised in the
operation manual. The laboratory and the operators must ensure that all required
safety devices are available in the near vicinity of the machine.
– The machines must only be operated by persons having received and intensive and
proven training by AgfaPhoto.
– Suitable power supply, chemistry and other consumables must be kept ready for the
operation of the machine.
– All instructions published by AgfaPhoto regarding the operation and maintenance of
the machines must be observed.
– Only original parts from AgfaPhoto must be used. The use of other wearing parts and
spare parts will immediately terminate all warranty, availability and guarantee claims.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-9

1.5.3 Warranty
Guaranty regulations are up to the countries. For information refer to the sales contract or
the warranty certificate.
1.5.4 Exclusion of Liability

The operation of the machines is ruled by the appropriate regulations for the place of
installation in force in the country concerned.
Basically, the general conditions of sale and delivery of the AgfaPhoto Company apply.
The owner will receive these conditions the latest at the time of the conclusion of a
contract.
All information, data, and notes in this Operation Manual are current as of the date of
printing. All rights reserved to change technical specifications as a result of further
developments on the machine. Therefore claims for modifications or additions on
delivered equipment based on the data, illustrations, and descriptions herein will not be
accepted.
AgfaPhoto has tested the contents of this Operation Manual for conformity with the
described hardware and software. As deviations cannot be excluded, AgfaPhoto will not
guarantee complete conformity. Necessary corrections will be made in follow-up editions.
AgfaPhoto will not be liable for personal injuries and property damage caused by mistakes
or omissions of the information provided in this manual.
AgfaPhoto will not be liable for damages and malfunctions caused by the following
actions:
– Non-observance of the operation manual
– Non-observance of safety and maintenance instructions
– Operating errors
– Inappropriate working on and with the machine
– Use of non-original wearing parts, spare parts and accessories as well as the use of
non-original consumables
– Unauthorized conversions and modification on the machine by the owner or the
owner’s staff
1.6 Consumables and Spare Parts

Consumables and spare parts are available from the sales organization in charge for the
country in which the machine is operated. A list of addresses can be called up in the
Internet: http://www.agfa.com
1.7 Hotline
The customer will get the Hotline number for the country in which he wants to operate
the machine from the AgfaPhoto service engineer upon the installation.
1-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.8 Safety Instructions
1.8.1 General
This manual contains all required information required to operate the machine safely and
correctly. The safety precautions have to be observed by all persons working on and with
the d-lab1. and the image box.
Apart from this, all regulations and prescriptions for the prevention of accidents
applicable at the place of operation must be observed.
1.8.2 Laser in the CD Drives of the d-lab.1 and the image box workstation
CAUTION!
The machine is equipped with a laser system and has been classified as Laser
product of class 1.
The housing must never be opened to avoid direct contact with the laser beam.
Be sure to read the operation manual

carefully and store it as reference in a safe
place so that correct operation of this model
is ensured.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-11

1.8.3 d-lab.1 family
1.8.3.1 General
CAUTION!
Warnings and instructions on machine labels must be strictly observed.
CAUTION!
Safety Devices
Never change the electrical circuit.
Do not circumvent or disable the integrated safety devices.
Do not modify preset values of safety components.
Replace fuses only by the same type of fuse: value, switch-off characteristics.
1.8.3.2 Transport
CAUTION!
The machine must only be transported by an authorized forwarder.
1.8.3.3 Installation
CAUTION!
Only a service engineer authorized by AgfaPhoto is entitled to install the
machine.
Install all lines and cables in such a way that nobody will step on them or trip.
Only accessories are allowed to be installed, which meet the safety requirements
and regulations, and are in compliance with electromagnetic compatibility and
the respective AgfaPhoto specifications. Information about the accessories
released for the machine can be obtained from the Service.
All data cables, signal cables, process and control cables, which connect the
machine with other machines must be correctly shielded and connected.
1-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1
1.8.3.4 Operation
CAUTION!
Only the operator and the service technician are allowed to operate the machine.
The operating instructions should be read carefully before the work is started.
Persons under the influence of alcohol, drugs, or certain medication (e.g.

psychopharmacological medication) are not allowed to operate the machine.
In emergencies immediately switch off the machine on the main switch; see Ö
position of the main switch in Chapter 2 Switching on the machine.
Never run the machine without covers / panels. Persons who open or remove
covers expose themselves to dangerous voltages or run other risks.
For the cleaning of the machine follow the instructions in Chapter 10. Only use
the recommended cleaning substances and devices.
Do not cover or block the venting openings of the machine: This may lead to
overheating of single components.
No objects or liquids should get into the machine through the venting openings:
This may cause fire, electric shock, or a short circuit. Therefore never place objects
or containers with liquid on or aside the machine.
Provide for sufficient cooling air and fresh air at the operating site.
Do not block the operation and maintenance areas by other equipment or objects.
Avoid excessive formation of dust as this may damage the components inside.
Keep consumables and containers for food and drinks separate.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-13

1.8.3.5 Handling Processing Chemicals
CAUTION!
In the work environment of the machine slightly poisonous, irritating, and caustic
substances may occur. The Owner (employer)
– has to elaborate operation instructions for the handling of dangerous substances
– provides for the instruction of his staff at least once a year
– ensures sufficient aeration: The air in industrial workrooms should be exchanged
at least eight to ten times per hour.
All photographic developers contain substances which may irritate the skin, the
mucous membrane and the eyes, and which may cause allergic skin reactions
affecting very sensitive persons. For this reason, avoid long or repeated skin
contact, especially with developer solutions.
For all jobs where photographic processing solutions may splash, e.g. preparing
and filling in chemical solutions, cleaning processing racks etc:
– Wear protective gloves and change them every day.
– Rinse all solutions that get on your skin immediately with plenty of fresh water.
– Wear protection goggles: If in spite of this, splashes do get into your eyes, wash
them immediately with plenty of water, pulling apart the eyelids. Consult an
ophthalmologist!
Store chemicals and processing solutions in a safe place.
Collect leaking chemicals immediately and dispose of these chemicals. The above
regulations must be observed.
Mind chemical residues in the boxes (Easy paper box (Easy film box / Easy paper
box).
1-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.8.3.6 Service and Repair Work
CAUTION!
Only the Service is entitled to repair the machine. All areas which can only be
opened by means of tools are considered service areas. Illegal opening of a
service areas and inappropriate repairs may result in serious risks for the
operators.
Observe country-specific safety regulations
Maker sure to switch off the machine prior to service / repair work
The machine contains components using high voltage as well as sensitive

components. For this reason, the following work must only be performed by
authorized service technicians:
Repairs on electrical components, maintenance work / removal of parts and
covers not described in the operation folder.
Use original AgfaPhoto spare parts: only these parts have been tested regarding
their suitability and safety.
When replacing electronic components: observe the data given in the circuit and
wiring diagrams.
At the end of all service / maintenance jobs: check the general function of the
machine as well as the correct condition of the safety devices.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-15

1.8.3.7 Warnings and Information Labels on the d-lab.1

Make sure the labels are attached and are clearly visible.
1 2 3 4
STOP
3003_074
1-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

No. Label Meaning

1 Fire hazard if fuses other than specified by AgfaPhoto are used (see Ö
Technical Specifications).
2 Risk of injuries by electric shock with open covers.
3 Risk of injuries by rotating parts (getting caught, bruising).

Keep the door closed when the machine is on. If the door must be
opened make sure not to touch any components.
4 Risk of injuries by sharp blades (cutting wounds).

Do not reach into the cutting unit during operation. Do not touch the
cutting blades either when the machine is off.
5 Name plate with CE certification

The CE certification means that the machine is in compliance with all
applying EG Rules.
The given voltage, fuse and frequency values for single-phase and three-
phase connections are listed.
d-lab.1 starter 8070/040

d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050
d-lab.1 plus 8070/109
161
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-17

d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230

d-lab.1s starter 8070/240
d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300
d-lab.1s plus 8070/310
162
netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130

netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150
netlab.1 plus 8070/160
163
6 This label identified the main switch or main breaker.
7 This label advises the user to read the installation instructions before
connecting the machine to the power supply.
Installation errors may lead to injuries (risk of electric shock) or machine
damage when the machine is connected to the mains.
1-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.8.4 image box workstation
1.8.4.1 Transport
Move the unit only very rarely and never while it is switched on.
Use only the original box and packing material for the transport and the dispatch.
1.8.4.2 Installation
CAUTION!
Be sure to install the unit on a stable surface, otherwise it may fall down and
cause injuries.
Do not install the unit in the near vicinity of TV sets or radios. The magnetic fields
generated by the power supply unit may cause interferences with the television or
radio reception.
Leave the unit alone for at least 3 hours before setting it into operation. This is to
prevent condensation from building up on sensitive parts and damaging the unit.
Ambient conditions:
The admissible room temperature ranges between +10 °C and +35 °C.
The admissible humidity of air is below 70%.
Deviations and sudden fluctuations may cause malfunctions.
Damage and unreliable operation of the unit may result if it is installed in rooms
exposed to high formation of dust, bright sunlight and static electricity.
The image box should not be connected to circuits subject to considerable

fluctuations: possible loss of data.
Make sure when connecting the image box to peripherals that the connection
cables are not stressed.
Two build-in fans provide for the optimum operating temperature inside the unit.
To keep them functional, do not misadjust, cover or bond the venting slits at the
back of the housing, otherwise the heat accumulating inside may destroy the
integrated components.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-19

1.8.4.3 Instructions of correct connection

Power supply
– The unit is suited for the connection to AC 100–240 V / 1–1,5 A / 50 or 60 Hz.
– Connect the attached power cable to the power outlet on the image box and to a
230VAC/110VAC socket outlet (observe national prerequisites). As for the current
consumption, please observe the data of the rated current on the name plate at the
back of the image box.
– Operate the unit exclusively on shockproof socket outlets.
– Only use the attached power cables (valid for the EU except GB and USA/Canada).
– The connection to the power supply is ensured by plugging in the power plug.
Install the unit near a socket outlet.
– Disconnect the power plug to cut the image box from the power supply.
Wiring
– Install the cables in such a way that no one can step on them or stumble over them.
– Do not put objects on the cables as they may get damaged.
– When using extension cables, make sure that they meet the national requirements.
1-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.8.4.4 Operation
WARNING!
It is prohibited to open the image box.
The installation of additional components is reserved to service technicians
trained by AgfaPhoto.
High voltage
Some of the units carry high voltage. The system must be disconnected from the
mains for cleaning and maintenance jobs.
Risk of electric shocks.
Place of operation
Do not use the unit in locations with a high relative humidity of air, excessive
formation of dust or oily steam/vapor.
Risk of fire or electric shocks.
Abnormal conditions
If smoke or odors develop, switch off the power supply immediately, disconnect the
power plug and call the AgfaPhoto Service.
Foreign bodies / liquids

Never insert foreign material into plugs, slits or other openings. Never put drinks
or other liquids on or directly aside the unit.
Should foreign bodies or liquids get into the unit, switch off the power at once,
disconnect the power plug and call the AgfaPhoto Service.
Drops or other damage

If the unit is dropped or damaged, switch off the power at once, disconnect the
power plug and call the AgfaPhoto Service.
Disassembly
Never disassemble or modify the unit. Consult the AgfaPhoto Service for Hardware
extensions.
Notes:
Make backup copies!

The contents of the memory may get deleted or modified by operating errors or repairs
of the unit.
Observe the magnetic force!

Do not put cash cards, credit cards and other magnetic cards on the unit. The magnetic
fields produced by the power supply of the unit may destroy such magnetic cards.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-21

1.8.4.5 Power supply unit
WARNING!
Operate the unit only with the prescribed mains voltage.
Do not damage, modify, bend very much, distort or pull the power cable. Do not put any
objects on it and protect it from excessive heat (the isolation may melt). Risk of fire and
electric shocks.
Damaged power cables should be replaced by the AgfaPhoto Service.
CAUTION!
Cut the unit off the mains if it is not used for a long period of time.
At least once a year:

Disconnect the plug from the mains socket and remove the dust around the pins of the
plug.
Note:
The unit is suited and has been tested for a power supply ranging between 100V-240V
at 50Hz and 60Hz. For this reason, manual setting is not necessary.
1.8.4.6 Service and repair work
Note:
The complete unit is replaced.
1-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.9 Storage
1.9.1 Chemicals
Chemicals should be stored and prepared according to the manufacturer’s information
and advice.
1.9.2 Photographic Paper

Note:
All color papers must always be stored in a cool and dry place.
– The best storage temperature is between +2 ºC and +10 ºC.

Storage at 20 ºC over several days is possible without any problems.
Storage temperatures above 30 ºC should be avoided because they will cause visible
changes after only a few days.
– Opened packages have to be stored at a relative humidity of 50-60%.
1.10 Data Backup

Make backup copies of the settings on the d-lab.1 and the image box workstation at
regular intervals.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-23

1-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Overview
2 Overview 2
The d-lab.1 is offered in twelve different versions:
– d-lab.1 machines with Film Processor can process input from digital media and film
material; color negative films can be developed (4 versions).
– d-lab.1s machines can process input from digital media and film material; (5 versions).
– netlab.1 machines can process input from digital media (3 versions).
Note:
The digital input and the CD burning are performed one the d-lab.1 allrounder 2 and
the d-lab.1 plus via the image box using the AgfaPhoto programs workstation or kiosk.
Both functions are also available on the d-lab.1 and the netlab.1, provided the machine
is retrofitted for this (options 5-port drive and Software licenses).
2.1 Versions (Illustrations)

2.1.1 d-lab.1 with Film Processor
d-lab.1 starter d-lab.1 allrounder 1

Type 8070/040 Type 8070/050
d-lab.1 allrounder 2 d-lab.1 plus

Type 8070/100 Type 8070/109
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-1

Overview d-lab.1 family: Operation
2.1.2 d-lab.1s
d-lab.1s starter d-lab.1s starter oc

Type 8070/230 Type 8070/240
d-lab.1s basic 1 d-lab.1s basic 2

Type 8070/300 Type 8070/200
d-lab.1s plus
Type 8070/310
2-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.1.3 netlab.1
2
netlab.1 starter oc netlab.1 allrounder

Type 8070/130 Type 8070/150
netlab.1 plus
Type 8070/160
Note:
All illustrations in this manual show the d-lab.1 allrounder. Additional illustrations for
the versions d-lab.1s or netlab.1 are usually not necessary and will be shown only in
exceptional cases.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-3

2.1.4 Overview (Table)
Digital Input on
APS Film mask

Film Processor
No. of Paper
and Feeder
Magazines
Chemicals
image box
APS Zoom
Easy Box
Version Type
Monitor
(IX240)
d-lab.1
d-lab.1 starter 8070/040 yes 1 TS-LCD no yes yes yes no
d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050 yes 2 TS-LCD no yes yes yes yes
d-lab.1 allrounder 2 8070/100 yes 2 TS-LCD yes no yes yes yes
d-lab.1 plus 8070/109 yes 2 TS-LCD yes no yes yes yes
d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230 no 1 CRT/LCD * no yes no no no
d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 no 1 CRT/LCD * no yes yes yes no
d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 no 1 CRT/LCD * no yes yes yes no
d-lab.1s basic 2 8070/200 no 2 CRT/LCD * no yes yes yes no
d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 no 2 CRT/LCD * no yes yes yes yes
netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130 no 1 CRT/LCD * no yes no no no
netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150 no 2 CRT/LCD * no yes yes no no
netlab.1 plus 8070/160 no 2 CRT/LCD * no yes yes no no
* optional
2-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.2 Complete Machine

2
2.2.1 Main Components
3003_001
Allocation of main components to the different versions:
1-5 d-lab.1 with Film Processor
2-5 d-lab.1s
3-5 netlab.1
see Ö Table on the following page
Main components: :
1. The Film Processor (FP) for the development of films. After the development films
135 are automatically further processed; others, such as e.g. IX240 (APS) must be
manually inserted for printing.
2. Scanner (SC) to digitize negatives and slides and determine corrections and exposure
values.
3. Computer system (CS) for the control of the complete program and for the
generation of the print data. The monitor for the operation of the machine is also
connected to the Main Computer.
4. Printer (PA) to prepare and transport the paper format to be exposed and to expose
negatives, slides or digital images on paper.
5. Paper Processor (PP) with a connected sorter and a deposit tray for the prints.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-5

Main Components
d-lab.1 with Film Processor d-lab.1s netlab.1
Example: d-lab.1 allrounder 1 Example: d-lab.1s starter Example: netlab1 allrounder
d-lab.1 starter d-lab.1s starter oc netlab.1 starter oc

d-lab.1 allrounder 1 and 2 d-lab.1s starter netlab.1 allrounder
d-lab.1 plus d-lab.1s basic 1 and 2 netlab.1 plus
d-lab.1s plus
all main components without Film Processor without Film Processor
without Scanner
Note:
Position and type of computer system (CS) depend on the version.
Computer System
one unit on the Printer two units, one above the other, two units, side by side,
in the cabinet left of the Printer above the second paper magazine,
in the cabinet left of the Printer
d-lab.1 with Film Processor versions with cabinet for the CS versions with cabinet for the CS and
left-hand paper magazine
Example: d-lab.1 allrounder 1 Example: d-lab.1s starter Example: netlab1 allrounder
d-lab.1 starter d-lab.1s starter oc and starter netlab.1 allrounder

d-lab.1 allrounder 1 and 2 d-lab.1s plus netlab.1 plus
d-lab.1 plus netlab.1 starter oc
previous production: new production new production:

d-lab.1s basic 1 and 2 d-lab.1s basic 1 d-lab.1s basic 2
2-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.2.2 Components
2
3003_002
1 Scanner (only d-lab.1 with Film Processor and d-lab.1s) 4 Printer

1.1 Film feeder – film feeding to the print area 4.1 Paper magazine RHS
1.2 Film Scanner 4.2 Lane distributor with back printer
1.3 Negative mask 4.3 Exposure table
1.4 Take up – film take-up after scanning 4.4 Film collecting box
1.5 Print engine (exposure system)
5 Film Processor (only d-lab.1 with Film Processor)
2 Computer system (see Ö previous page) 5.1 Paper magazine LHS
2.1 CD drive 5.2 Drain cocks for the Film Processor processing tanks
2.2 ON button, Timer lamp and STOP button (Reset) 5.3 Drain cocks for the effluent tanks
2.3 Touch Screen 5.4 Replenisher tanks
5.5 Emergency cut button and crank handle position
3 Paper Processor 5.6 Docking station
3.1 Built-in densitometer 5.7 Bleach bath aeration (BL agitation)
3.2 Order sorter 5.8 Film feed shafts A (top) and B (bottom)
3.3 Processing tanks with pumps and filters 5.9 Dryer
3.4 Docking station 5.10 Processing tanks with pumps and filters
3.5 Main switch with ground fault interrupter (GFI switch) 5.11 Leader cutter
3.6 Dryer
3.7 Replenisher tanks
3.8 Water tank
3.9 Drain cocks for the Paper Processor processing tanks
3.10 Drain cocks for the effluent tanks
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-7

2.3 Product Description

The machine offers film processing (only d-lab.1) as well as simple and fast printing of
negatives, slides (only d-lab.1 and d-lab.1s) and digital images (all versions).
Image data from digital sources are entered via the integrated 6-in-1 card reader (with
the exception of the d-lab.1 allrounder 2 and d-lab.1 plus) or via network:
– from the AGFA front-end equipment (e.g. image box, Pixtasy)
– from a separate workstation (e.g. image box in case of d-lab.1 allrounder 2
and d-lab.1 plus)
It is the customer’s responsibility to provide for a network and/or workstation and to have
it connected.
2.4 Image editing

The machine offers a great variety of image editing options, e.g.:
− Color / density corrections
− Cropping (central / decentral)
− Image enhancement, e.g. detail contrast, sharpness, saturation
These modifications are calculated in the image processors. The image in the display is
refreshed at once.
2-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.5 Functional Procedure

2
− Film processing (versions d-lab.1)
− Film scanning or entering digital images (versions d-lab.1 and d-lab.1s:
On the d-lab.1 allrounder 2 and d-lab.1 plus the images are entered from digital
sources (CDs, camera cards etc.) on the AgfaPhoto image box workstation.
− Image editing, if any
− Paper cutting and paper transport
− Printing
− Lane distribution
− Processing
− Deposit of prints in the sorter
2.5.1 Film Processing (d-lab.1 with Film Processor)

Film Processor:
Standard processing is automatic once a film 135 has been inserted, without the need for
operator actions: Film processing, printing, print stacking in the sorter.
In the newer versions only the upper loading unit

can be used for the film processing boxes.
3003_111
Optionally (only ex-factory) two loading units for
film boxes are available on the Film Processor.
3003_015
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-9

2.5.2 Scanning
Note:
In the versions with Film Processor the 135 type films must not be inserted manually
in the feeder if the films are developed and printed. They are sent directly to the
scanner by the Film Processor after film processing – without any operator action.
After the desired order configuration has been selected, the film is inserted in the film
feeder for printing. While the film is transported through the negative mask and into the
film takeup, the prescanner determines the exposure data for each negative of the film
(Prescan).
After the Main Computer has calculated the correction data, the negatives are digitized
(exposure): The film is pulled out of the film takeup and the negatives are positioned one
by one in the negative mask and exposed. Four color separations of each negative are
exposed on the CCD by means of the LED illumination:
Mainscan 2.460 x 1.640 Pixel
Slide printing is analog, the slides being inserted in the slide carrier.
3003_004
1 LED exposure
2 Mirror box
3 Film drive
4 Negative mask
5 Lens
6 CCD area
2-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.5.3 Image Processing

2
The image processor (1) processes the digitized image data with the Prescan data, the
entered corrections and the image manipulations, converts it into an exposable image
and sends it to the printer.
3003_003
2.5.4 Print Engine
3003_075
1 Print engine
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-11

2.5.5 Exposure and Paper Transport

The cut paper (1) is transported to the exposure table (2), is exposed and then transported
on to the lane distributor (3). There the back print (4) is applied. The lane distributor
guides the prints into the Paper Processor, either on one or on two tracks depending on
the print size / machine version.
3003_008
2.5.6 Paper Processor

The exposed paper runs through the processing solutions (1) – developer (CD),
bleachfix (BX), stabilizer (SB) – and then through the dryer (2).
3003_009
2-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.5.7 Sorter
2
2.5.8 Sorting
After drying the prints are transported into the sorter (1).
– Orders < 40 exp. / small sizes:

The prints are stacked in the sorter according
to orders.
– Orders < 40 exp. / small sizes:
If an order has more than 40 prints the sorter
(1) moves on to the next bucket without order
end.
– Splices in paper rolls (see Ö 2.5.8.2 Splices in
paper rolls)
They are cut separately and the respective
pieces of paper are deposited in the print
stack.
– Large sizes (sorter with large print deposit):
Prints larger than 152 mm (6 inch) with
3003_010 respect to the paper transport direction in the
1 Sorter Paper Processor are deposited on the large
2 Large print deposit print deposit (2).
2.5.8.1 Version Dependent Sorters

Sorter
single print tray (single tray) 6-inch Sorter with large print tray 8-inch Sorter with 10 bins
(belt tray)
Example: d-lab.1s starter Example: netlab1 allrounder

Example: d-lab.1 allrounder 1
d-lab.1 starter d-lab.1 allrounder 1 and 2 d-lab.1s plus

d-lab.1s starter oc d-lab.1s basic 1 and 2 netlab.1 allrounder
d-lab.1s starter netlab.1 plus
netlab.1 starter oc
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-13

2.5.8.2 Splices in paper rolls

For technical reasons some of the paper rolls come with splices. The maximum number of
splices corresponds to the ISO 1009 Standard, independent of the paper type or surface.
Roll length Splice(s)

87,5 m 1
110 m 2
175 m 2
242 m 3
To compensate for the paper loss due to the splices, 30 cm of paper are added per splice.
In AgfaPhoto paper rolls the splices are marked by oblong holes that trigger the required
number of blank transport steps in the Printer.
2.5.8.3 Densitometer
The built-in densitometer above the dryer is used to automatically measure the test
prints.
3003_011
2-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.6 Operating Controls

2
2.6.1 Buttons and Timer Lamp

Positions of the keys / Timer Lamp
3003_007 3003_112
d-lab.1 with Film Processor: All other versions:

1 ON button (switch-on and system Reset) 1 ON button (switch-on and system Reset)
2 Timer lamp 2 Timer lamp
3 STOP button (film stop)
The machine has two buttons and a lamp:

− ON button (1):
If the machine is shut down by End of work / Shutdown, it remains in Timer mode
until the next automatic startup (see Ö 2.7.2 Switch-on, automatic (Timer)
If the machine has to be switched on in-between press the ON button. The machine
will then start up.
Apart from this, a reset can be triggered by pressing the ON button.
− Timer lamp (2):
The lamp lights up if the machine is in Timer mode after Shutdown.
− STOP button (3):
For an emergency stop in case of a (suspected) film jam. The film is stopped during the
scanning. See also Ö Reset in chapter 9 Error description.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-15

2.6.2 Monitor
The machine is operated with menu support via monitor (15 inch screen). All functions are
activated via buttons on the screen. Also refer to the sections:
Ö 2.11 Screen Structure: d-lab.1 and image box workstation
Ö 2.10.2 Buttons (fields activating a function)
Ö 2.11 Menu Overview
2.6.2.1 Version Dependent Monitors

Monitor
Standard: Standard: no monitor
TFS LCD Touch Screen Monitor, flat screen Optional: TFS LCD Touch Screen Monitor or
CRT Monitor with mouse and keyboard
3003_005 3003_113
d-lab.1 with Film Processor all other versions
2.6.2.2 Touch Screen Monitor

All functions are activated by pressing the touch-
sensitive buttons on the screen.
2.6.2.3 CRT Monitor with mouse and keyboard

All functions are activated by mouse click on the
buttons displayed on the screen.
Note:
These instructions usually leave out the words "press" or "mouse-click". The
descriptions (left-hand column) and instructions (right-hand column, next to the screen
display) only mention the respective buttons.
2-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.7 Switching on the Machine

2
Prerequisites for machine switch-on:
– Main switch not switched off before, see Ö 2.9 Switching off the Machine
– Supply voltage not interrupted by anything else (fuses, power failure, ...)
The prerequisites are different for the first setting into operation, see the booklet Ö
Installation.
There are 2 alternatives to switch on the machine:

− Automatically via the integrated Timer - normal procedure
− Manually by pressing the ON button
2.7.1 Manual Switch-On
CAUTION
Do not use the main breaker to switch off
the machine! If possible, always switch
off with the Timer, i.e. via the function
End of work – Shutdown.
Check that the main breaker (1) is switched

on (up)
Push the ON button
3003_006
1 Main breaker
2 GFI switch
Note:
The GFI switch (ground fault interrupter below the main breaker) always remains on.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-17

2.7.2 Switch-on, automatic (Timer)

To start the machine automatically via the Timer, the following prerequisites must be
met:
Prerequisites:
Start times for the work days and off-days defined in the Machine settings (Startup
settings and Edit calendar). To set the workdays and the start times see Ö Startup:
Defining the Start Time / Standard User, chapter 4.
Machine switched off with the End of work function. Also see Ö 2.9 Switching off the
Machine in this chapter.
Main breaker and GFI switch not switched off.
2.7.3 System Start

After manual or automatic switch-on the solutions and the dryer are heated up.
Displays during this phase:
1. Progress of the startup / heating up in per cent
2. Error messages, if any
The machine is ready to operate after the solutions and the dryer have reached the
nominal temperatures.
Warm-up phase
Thermometers are displayed for the individual
solutions and dryer of Film Processor (only d-lab.1
with Film Processor) and Paper Processor.
– Colors of the thermometers:

– red: nominal temperature not yet reached
– green: nominal temperature reached
– Temperature info next to the thermometer:

– left: actual temperature
– right: nominal temperature
The machine can be put in operation

although the warm-up phase has not been
completed, simply by pressing Ignore.
400 The Start screen is displayed.
2-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.8 Ready for Operation

2
2.8.1 Operator Login

There are two possibilities for user login. This is defined in the settings. See Ö Timer:
Start times / Define standard user in chapter 4.
1. Automatic
The Start screen appears immediately after warm-up if the 1st user is logged in
automatically (password check deselected). It also appears after a new user has logged
in.
2. Manual
After warm-up the Login appears. In this screen the user name and the password must
be entered. The user name is preset already if the operator has been defined as 1st user
with password check. The Start screen appears after the password and, if required, the
user name have been entered.
2.8.2 Start Screen

After user login the menu bar with the 5 main menus is displayed at the bottom of the
screen (see Ö illustration on the following page).
The main menu bar is almost always displayed and accessible. But if a popup window is
active (e.g. error message) or the Help screen has been opened, the main menu buttons
cannot be accessed and may be hidden.
− Print modes offers all functions for image editing and printing (see Ö Order handling,
chapter 8).
− Settings is used to set machine-specific, country-specific and user-specific parameters
and create order configurations (see Ö Settings, chapter 4).
− Tests allow testing of the machine prior to the production start and during the
production (see Ö Tests, chapter 5). This menu also provides access to the service
functions (see Ö folder Service instructions / Repair).
− Via End of work the machine can be shut down completely or partly (sleep mode) and
the user can be changed (see Ö 2.9 Switching off the Machine and 2.8.4.2 Changing
the user.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-19

2.8.3 Functions which cannot be activated

Functions which cannot be activated appear in gray. The following reasons are possible:
− The logged-in user is not entitled to use these functions.
See also Ö User manager and User rights, chapter 4.
− The optional software is not installed.
− The respective machine function is generally not available for this machine, e.g. all
functions concerning the Film Processor on d-lab.1s basic.
Finished film processing and print orders have not yet been exited completely from the
machine. If there are open orders, configurations etc. cannot be deleted.
2-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.8.4 Defining the Language and the Country-specific Settings for the User Interface
2
At the first start of the machine, the Administrator should always define the user interface
first because this will facilitate all other settings.
– Language:
Available languages: German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Japanese, Chinese,
Korean.
See Ö Note below.
– Keyboard assignment:
The selection has an impact on the representation of the input screen on the Touch
Screen.
– Country-specific settings:
When the administrator selects the desired language, all country-specific settings (e.g.
measuring system, temperature unit, date and time format) of this screen are
automatically preset to the usual standards: The administrator can change the
presetting by selecting a different setting in the respective pull-down menu.
Note:
Languages are defined on the d-lab.1 by means of users. As the settings for the user
interface only serve to facilitate the creation of new users, a language change has no
effect.
If the texts do not appear in the desired language, the Administrator must change the
language of the user used to log on: Service or Administrator. These two users exist
already and cannot be deleted.
See also Ö 2.8.4.1 Creating, changing, deleting users.
Call up in the Start screen:

Settings
Machine settings
m2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-21

User interface:
Another screen is opened (see Next screen).
005
Select Language
Select Keyboard assignment for the input
screen on the touch screen
Save
038
All other country-specific settings which can be entered in this screen are described in
detail in another section: see Ö User interface: Country-specific settings in chapter 4.
2-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.8.4.1 Creating, changing, deleting users

2
The language of the user interface of the d-lab is connected to the user. There are two
methods to specify the desired language: either this language is connected to an existing
user, or a new user is created with this language.
Note:
The respective user must log on again so that the user interface is shown in the desired
language.
Two users are preset and cannot be deleted:

1. Administrator with user rights for all functions, except Service
2. Service with unlimited user rights: all functions + Service functions
Any number of users can be logged on. The user name has 20 characters at max. Special
characters are not allowed: „ / \ [ ] : ; | = + * ? < >

Settings
Machine settings
User manager
Edit the list:
Creating a new user:
Touch New (see Next screen)
Changing the settings of a user:
Mark the name in the list and touch
Modify (see Next screen)
Mark users not needed in the list and
Delete them
305
Changing the password of a user:
Enter the Old password
Enter the New password (4 digits) and
Repeat
Entering a password for a new user:
Enter the New password (4 digits) and
Repeat
Language, Keyboard, Buzzer when
touched:
The settings selected under User interface
are displayed. These general presettings can
be adjusted individually for each single user.
Activating or deactivating user rights:
see also Ö Allocating user rights in
chapter 4
036
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-23

2.8.4.2 Changing the user

If a user was assigned to a different language, all texts in the display appear immediately
in this language after he has logged on (change of user): see Ö User manager: User and
user rights in chapter 4.

End of work
Change user
m4
Touch Log-off
Select the name of the next user
Enter Password: 4 digits required
Touch Log-on:
The texts in the display appear immediately
in the language connected to the current
user.
072
2-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.9 Switching off the Machine

2
CAUTION!
Do not switch off the machine via the main breaker (1) but always via the Timer. If
necessary operate the main breaker only after the program has shut down the
machine.
If the machine was switched off via the main breaker, wait at least one minute
before you switch on again. Otherwise the hard disk of the computer system may
get damaged.
Prerequisites:
Prior to switching off the machine, make sure that it can be calibrated at the next
automatic startup:
– Insert the correct paper
– Insert the negative mask (not applying to netlab.1)
2.9.1 Switching off the Machine (Timer mode)

If the machine should switch on automatically on workdays, the timer must be activated.
Required settings are explained in chapter 4: See Ö Timer: start times / Define standard
user (Timer) and Ö Calendar: Defining off days.

End of work
Shutdown
m4
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-25

2.9.1.1 Calling the Timer

The displayed Start information can be changed for the next start if required. Permanent
changes are only possible in the Machine settings.
Maintenance jobs that may have to be performed are listed under Maintenance -
Information.

End of work
Shutdown
Automatic start:
Changing the settings, if required:
User
If necessary, select the user for the next
switch-on
Change Timer
If necessary, touch and change the start
date and time and the Timer settings in
the next screen, see Ö 2.8.4.1
Perform the maintenance jobs, see also Ö
Daily maintenance/ prior to shutdown,
chapter 10
Click on OK to switch the machine off
041
Reply to all checks, if any:
In case of unprocessed orders, answer the
question whether or not they should be
saved. Orders that are not saved are lost.
The machine is shut down and switched off.
2.9.1.2 Changing the Timer

End of work
Shutdown
Change Timer
Change settings if necessary:
Change the Date for the next automatic
switch-on
Change the Time for the next automatic
switch-on
Timer on/off
Activating or deactivating the Timer
Touch OK:
The Shutdown screen reappears.
050
2-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.9.2 Switching Off the Machine partially (Sleep Mode)

2
Special operating status:
It is possible to switch off parts of the general system so that only the Main Computer is
running, e.g. for statistical checks via network or remote control, before the machine is
switched off completely (statistical functions will be available in a later Software version):
− Film Processor (only d-lab.1 allrounder), Printer and Paper Processor OFF
− Main Computer ON
Activate the Sleep mode for the desired weekdays and enter the switch-off time of the
Main Computer.
Once the Sleep mode has been activated, the switch-off time of the Main Computer is
indicated. See also Ö Machine settings in chapter 4.
2.9.3 Switching Off the Machine (Timer inactive)

In case of longer off-times or for (maintenance) work requiring a machine switch-off
(e.g. replacement of chemicals), shut down the machine as described below and then
switch off the main breaker.
Switching off the main breaker without shutting down the machine first may:
1. Cause problems with the Main Computer; the operating system may have to be
reinstalled. It is recommended on principle to shut down the computer system in a
controlled way.
2. Cause paper jams if not all prints have left the Paper Processor.

End of work
Shutdown
Check the Timer setting and change it if
necessary:
OFF is displayed on the right side of the
automatic start:
Timer deactivated
The date and the time are shown below
the automatic start:
Timer activated
If necessary, touch Change Timer and
deactivate the Timer in the next
screen see Ö 2.9.1.2 Changing the
Timer ):
Timer ON/OFF and close the screen
m4 with OK. The switch-off screen is
displayed.
Shut down the machine with OK
Push the main breaker
Note:
If the machine was switched off via the main breaker, wait at least one minute before
you switch on again. Otherwise electronic components of the machine may get
damaged.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-27

2.10 Screen Structure: d-lab.1 and image box workstation

2
1
3
3003_158
The fields on the screen which activate a function are referred to as buttons in this
documentation.
The screen is divided into different areas:

1 Information area with
2 Fixed buttons and
3 Status line
4 Active screen with

5 changing buttons, and
pop-up a window, if available (not shown in the above example)
6 Menu bar with 4 main menus
The areas 1, 2, 3, and 6 are always displayed. However, the menu bar (6) cannot always be
used; it is disabled in the presence of certain errors until the error is removed.
Only one screen is active at a time; it is not possible to open several windows at the same
time.
Note:
The button exists only on d-lab.1 / netlab.1, not on the image box workstation.
2-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.10.1 Information Area

2
Buttons :
The buttons in the information area are always accessible. Info and Help screens can be
reached at any time.
Status information, e.g. solution temperatures
Context-related Help function for all screens and error messages
If the machine does not react any more to operator entries, this key may be used
to trigger a software reset. The whole machine is stopped (order interrupted and
all major assemblies are reset).
The status line is left of the above-mentioned buttons. It:

1. Information, warnings, requests
2. Error messages
All error messages are saved.
They can be called up via and Error list.
The displays in the status line require different actions:

− The operator can continue working without confirmation / action.
− An error must be removed so that the work can be continued.
− Some messages can be ignored several times until the machine forces the operator to
act.
See also:
– Ö 2.12 Info and 2.13 Help
− Ö Troubleshooting in chapter 9
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-29

2.10.2 Buttons (fields activating a function)

Only one screen is active at a time; it is not possible to open several windows at the same
time.
The buttons in the current screen change with the scope of functions of the menu
concerned.
The operator touches the buttons to initiate the desired action, e.g.:
− To call up a submenu from the main menu bar
− To open the pull-down menu and make a selection
− To start, interrupt or stop an action
− To select the desired configurations, images; texts etc. in displayed selection windows
− To enter texts via the keyboard shown on the screen
All screens and associated buttons are explained in detail in this manual.
Apart from this, a detailed explanation can be called up for every screen.
The Online Help can be called up with .
2.10.3 Pulldown Menu

When the operator touches a button that allows a selection, a pull-down menu opens.
Arrow keys for scrolling only appear if there are more entries than the display can show.
Example:
After touching the indicated negative mask, a pull-down menu appears with all negative
masks that can be selected.
Select the desired entry in the pull-down

menu
ok
pulldown
2-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.10.4 Popup Windows

2
Popup windows are opened on the active screen if a confirmation or an action is
required of the operator:
− Reset popup
Appears when a reset must be executed to remove an error.
− Error popup
Appears in case of wrong operator entries, consistency errors and system errors. These
errors have to be removed at once to continue working.
− Warning popup
When there is a risk of data loss.
− Info popup
Operator prompting; checks when changing to a different screen, indication of still
running processes
– Question popup
Is opened when the operator has to take a decision.
2.10.4.1 Info, query and warning Popup

The texts and buttons of the Popups vary in accordance with the circumstances.
Therefore, an example to illustrate.
Touch the desired button:

The Popup is closed.
066_2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-31

2.10.4.2 Error Popup

The Popup is opened automatically when an operating error occurs.
The texts and buttons of the Popups vary in accordance with the circumstances.
Therefore, an example to illustrate.
Touch the button:

The error Popup is closed.
054
2-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.10.5 Input Screen

2
Wherever the entry of text, numbers or special characters is required, the input screen
will open showing the following elements:
− The image of a keyboard:
Language-specific characters are shown in accordance with the selected keyboard
allocation. For the selection of the keyboard allocation see Ö User-specific settings in
chapter 4.
– Display area and button:
Typed characters appear in the blue field above the image of the keyboard. If it is text
that could be shown in a Pulldown menu, a corresponding preview appears in addition.
This way the user can check right away how much of the entered text will be visible
later on and the text can be shortened, if necessary.
Enter the text by touching the buttons

Confirm the input with OK:
Return to the previous menu
047
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-33

2.10.6 Numeric Keypad

When numbers have to be entered, the numeric keypad is faded in.
Enter the respective number on the

displayed numeric keyboard
Confirm with OK
600
2-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.10.7 Reorder Keyboard

2
The reorder keyboard shown on the screen can be used to enter reorder lists.
Key functions, see Ö Table on the next page.
011
For fast handling of reorders and corrections (YMCD), it is recommended to use the
optional reorder keyboard: Type 8070/700, ABC-Code 5KXZN.
For the explanation of the key functions see Ö Table on the next page.
3003_032
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-35

Keys Functions Quantity

YMCD Color/density corrections: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Density 4
ACT DCT SHP Corrections: Area contrast (ACT), detail contrast (DCT), sharpness (SHP) 3
, SAT Comma as separator of frame numbers 1
Correction: Saturation (SAT) 1
0 to 9 Entry of digit numbers 10
– 1. Minus sign for the entry of negative corrections 1
2. Hyphen for the entry of frame numbers
A X Letters for the DX code 2
Í Î Column-wise navigation in the reorder list 2
Ï Ð 1. Line-wise navigation in the reorder list 2
2. Line-wise scrolling in the configuration pull-up
OK Closing the input of a reorder list 1
Pulldown menu during configuration: 1
Accept selection and close the pulldown menu
DEL 1. Deletes a position in the negative number field, e.g. 1A-3A, 13A 1
2. Deletes all digits in the field PpF (Prints per Frame), e.g. 10
The delete key is inactive in the configuration and correction field. Wrong entries
in the correction field are corrected by reentry; if no correction is desired, 0 must
be typed in.
2.10.8 Menu Bar

Four menus can be called up directly via the menu bar at the bottom of the screen:
− Print modes
− Settings
− Test
− End of work
With two exceptions they are always accessible:

1. Popup window is open
2. Help screen is open
For the structure of the menus see Ö Menu Overview on the following pages.
2-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.11 Menu Overview

2
2.11.1 Print Modes
3003_083
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-37

2.11.2 Settings
2.11.2.1 Product configurations / Loading and saving the settings
3003_084
2-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.11.2.2 Machine settings

2
3003_085
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-39

2.11.3 Tests
3003_087
2.11.4 End of Work
3003_088
2-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.11.5 Status Information / Help

2
3003_089
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-41

2.11.6 Other Menus

These screens are accessible at any time. They are displayed under the following
conditions:
1. When text inputs are necessary, e.g. user names, back print text, by touching the
respective field
2. When numbers have to be entered (order number, password), by touching the

respective field
3. When fatal errors occur which must be removed so that the operator can continue to
work
4. When the operator has to make a decision
3003_090
2-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.12 Info
2
Call up in any screen with in the info area. The screen Status information opens.
− Film Processor (only d-lab.1 with Film Processor)
Scanner (not netlab.1)
Printer
Paper Processor
In case of a problem the respective assembly on the screen is shown in red, and in the
following screen the faulty component is marked.
− Order Info, Version Info, Error list
The following screens are called up via buttons with the respective names.
Call up information:
Press the button on the respective
assembly shown on the screen.
Press one of the buttons on the right of
the screen:
Version info see Ö 2.12.5
Error list see Ö 2.12.6
Total statistics / Detail statistics
see Ö chapter 8
Locate the error site:

Press the button on the assembly marked in
red: The defective component is shown in
red in the next screen.
052 Close the screen with Back
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-43

2.12.1 Calling up Info Film Processor

− Graphic representation of the film drive in the Film Processor with the number of films
in the individual stations.
− Nominal / actual temperatures of the solutions and the dryer.
− In case of an error the corresponding component is shown in red.
Close the screen with Back
064
2.12.2 Calling up Info Scanner

− Graphic representation of the Scanner
317
2-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.12.3 Calling up Info Printer

2
− Graphic representation of the paper transport in the Printer along with the number of
prints in the individual stations
− Information about the paper inserted in the paper magazine:
Paper width, paper surface, residual length
067
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-45

2.12.4 Calling up Info Paper Processor

− Graphic representation of the Paper Processor, also showing the number of prints
currently running through.
− Display of the order numbers of the orders in the Paper Processor.
− Time remaining until the last print is exited.
− Nominal / actual temperatures of the solutions and the dryer
065
2.12.5 Calling up Version Info

− Current versions of the installed Software and Firmware
− License ID of the machine: it must be indicated on orders for optional Software
components because it is used to generate the license key.
063
2-46 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.12.6 Calling up Error List

2
All error messages displayed on the machine are saved internally. They can be called up
via and the Error list. .
The list shows the error messages along with the date and time of occurrence. The entries
can be filtered (component filter, time filter, type filter) to show only specific error
messages. The error statistics can be called up with the button Show overview.
Press to call up the error help function for an error message. The error list offers
possible causes and hints for remedies.
See also Ö Troubleshooting in Chapter 9.
Filter the error list:

Component filter:
Activate the desired component(s)
Time filter:
Activate Show all, or
Deactivate Show all and press Change
time period:
The next screen opens, (see Ö following
figure).
Type filter see Ö following page
062
Change time period:
Start: enter date / time
End: enter date / time
Save:
The Error list screen is shown again.
Entries outside the entered time period
are now removed.
114
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-47

Press Type filter and select the respective

option:
The error list is updated accordingly.
062_2
If the help function should be called up for
an error message, select the respective
message and press .
Delete a message in the list:
Select the message and press Clear
selection.
The function can be reversed with Show
removed ones.
Call up the error statistics:
Press Show overview.
Close the screen with Back.
062_3
2-48 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.13 Help
2
2.13.1 Help Function for the Active Screen

Call up in any screen with in the info area. In case of operations that require a lot of
computing time, the Help window cannot be displayed immediately. A popup windows
opens offering the buttons Wait or Cancel.
The Help window displays texts about how to proceed and if necessary, a description of
the individual functions of the screen in which was touched. See below Ö
2.13.2 Navigation in the Help.
Other buttons are offered on the right side of the Help window:
− Help Index
Opens a screen in which the titles of all screens are listed in alphabetical order. By
touching the title the corresponding Help text opens.
− Error Help index
Opens a screen in which all error messages are listed in alphabetical order. By
touching the message the corresponding Help text opens.
− Operation manual
Access to the operating instructions (not implemented in all software versions)
− Close goes back to the screen in which was touched.
2.13.2 Navigation in the Help menu

Return to the beginning of the text Ï.
If necessary call up the Help Index (Help for
the screen) or the Error Help Index (Help
for error messages) and select the
respective subject.
Exit the Help function with Close
051
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 2-49

2.13.3 Navigation in the error help function

Scroll to the respective error message.
Call up help for the error message:
Press the blue code number in the right
hand column.
Press Back to go back
Exit the help function with Close.
051_2
2-50 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Chemicals
3 Chemicals
1. Chemicals for the machine tanks:
3
Film Processor Paper Processor
CD (Color Developer) CD (Color Developer)
BL (BLeach)
BX (Bleachfix)
FX (Fixer)
SB (Stabilizer) SB (Stabilizer)
The chemicals for the processing tanks are delivered as concentrates which are diluted
with water and are mixed directly in the machine tanks. New mixing is required, if
– the machine has been out of operation for several weeks
– one of the solutions is contaminated.
2. Replenisher chemicals for the replenishment of chemicals in the machine tanks.

The machine indicates if the replenishers are used up and new boxes must be inserted.
– Machines with Docking indicate if the replenishers are used up and new boxes
must be inserted.
– Machines with open chemicals (oc) also issue a message. The concerned tank
must be filled manually.
3.1 Order Numbers (ABC Codes) for d-lab.1 Chemicals and Replenisher
Chemicals for the Film Processor Order no.
d-lab.1 Easy film box:
F1: 4 x 400 films 5G9Y6
F2: 2 x 200 films 5KW6V
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Film Tank Kit 5K1TN
Chemicals for the Paper Processor Order no.

Easy paper Box for 110 m2 5KPGL
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Paper Tank Kit 5G1RS
Chemicals for the Paper Processor (open chemicals) Order no.

CD Replenisher 5MEPC
BX Replenisher 5MERG
SB Replenisher 5FFVD
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 3-1

Chemicals d-lab.1 family: Operation
3.2 Safety Regulations for the Handling of Chemicals

CAUTION!
In the work environment of the machine slightly poisonous, irritating and caustic
substances may occur. The user (employer)
– has to elaborate operation instructions for the handling of dangerous
substances
– provides for the instruction of his staff at least once a year
– ensures sufficient aeration: The air in industrial workrooms
should be exchanged at least eight to ten times per hour.
All photographic developers contain substances, which may irritate the skin, the
mucous membrane and the eyes, and which may cause allergic skin reactions
affecting very sensitive persons. For this reason, avoid long or repeated skin
contact, especially with developer solutions.
For all jobs where photographic processing solutions may splash, e.g. preparing
and filling in chemical solutions, cleaning processing racks etc.:
– Wear protective gloves and change them every day, if possible; rinse
all solutions that get on your skin immediately with plenty of fresh water
– Wear protection goggles: If in spite of this, splashes do get into your
eyes, wash them immediately with plenty of water, pulling apart the eyelids.
Consult an oculist!
Store chemicals and processing solutions in a safe place.
Observe the regulations for environmental protection.
Leaking chemicals must be immediately collected and disposed of. The above
regulations must be observed.
Mind chemical residues in the boxes.
3-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

3.3 Opening / Closing the Tank Section Cover

Note:
The covers must only be opened if there is no film or paper in the tank section.
3
3003_034
3.3.1 Film Processor

Open the tank section cover:
Push the red button (1)
Lift the dryer holding it by the handle (2)
and fold it up
Close the cover:
Fold the dryer back down
3009_023
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 3-3

CAUTION!
Risk of injury if the wet section cover is
unlocked unintentionally or without
paying attention, and then drops back
down.
The tank section cover must only be
opened when required by the work
situation!
When opening the cover make sure it
engages in the open position.
Opening the cover:

Open the cover manually until it engages. It
3009_011
will only engage in vertical position.
Closing the cover:
Hold on to the cover with one hand while
unlocking it (press PUSH HERE) and then
close it.
3-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

3.4 Preparing the Machine Tanks

WARNING!
Risk of short circuit or electric shock.
3
When working with liquids: switch off the machine (main switch OFF) !
To make sure that no chemistry splashes on the machine, fasten the plastic covers from
the accessory pack on the machine.
Remove any chemical splashes immediately with a wet cloth, especially from varnished
surfaces.
Note:
The replenisher tanks must be filled with water until the lower filling level sensors are
covered. This is necessary:
– to avoid the request to mount an Easy Box (machines with docking) or
to repress the message that the tanks are empty (machines without docking) and
– to fill the hoses with water.
Opening the tank section covers; see Ö

3.3 Opening / Closing the Tank Section
Cover
Film Processor cover (1)
Paper Processor cover (2)
Fill the replenisher tanks of the Film
Processor (3) and Paper Processor (4) with
water until the lower filling level sensors are
covered
Rinse the circulation system (5) and remove
possible chemical residues:
Fill the machine tanks (6) with warm
water
Switch on the machine and run it for
3003_014 approx. 10 minutes
Shut down the machine and switch it off
(main breaker)
Open the drain valves (7) and drain the
cleaning water completely
Empty the replenisher tanks (se Note at
the bottom of the page)
Close the drain valves tightly
Check the hose positioning:
No leaks, kinks or squeezing.
There are no air bubbles allowed in the hose
system. Otherwise the calibration of the self-
learning pump system would be wrong.
Note for machines with Docking:

The replenisher boxes must be mounted and the water tank must be topped up so that
the automatic replenishment can function upon the next switch-on.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 3-5

3.5 Mixing AgfaPhoto Chemicals in the Machine Tanks

A water temperature of approx. 30°C is recommended for the preparation of the individual
tank fillings.
The d-lab.1 chemicals are mixed directly in the machine tanks.
If the chemicals are mixed outside the machine (not recommended), the mixing tanks
must be thoroughly cleaned with hot water after each mixing cycle, i.e. between different
solutions.
To prevent contamination of the chemicals against the transport direction, the tanks have
to be filled in the following order:
SB Ö FX Ö BL Ö CD (Film Processor)
SB Ö BX Ö CD (Paper Processor)
Remove the rack of the respective tank

Fill in water: approx. ½ of the specified
amount
Fill in the specified components
Stir well always after a component is added!
Put the rack back
Fill the machine tanks with water up to the
overflow
3003_017
Mixing Instructions
Product designation / Water One part Part A Part B Part C Tank volume
solution
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Film CD 10,0 l — 750 ml 250 ml 500 ml 11,5 l
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Film BL 1,0 l 2,8 l — — — 3,8 l
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Film FX 2 x 1,5 l 2x 1,5 l — — — 2 x 3,1 l
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Film SB 3 x 2,0 l 3 x 125 ml — — — 3 x 2,1 l
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Paper CD 8,0 l — 500 ml 250 ml 750 ml 9,5 l
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Paper BX 6,5 l — 2l 1l — 9,5 l
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Paper SB 4 x 5,0 l 4 x 500 ml — — — 4 x 5,5 l
3-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

3.6 Inserting Chemical Filters

Take the chemical filters out of the
accessory pack
Plug the white filters on the black holders: 3
3009_024 Short filters on short holders
Long filters on long holders
3.6.1 Film Processor

Put the chemical filters in the appropriate
tanks corresponding to the colored stickers
Note:
It may be necessary to turn the filter rods a
little so that the filters sit correctly.
3009_013

Put the chemical filters in the appropriate
tanks corresponding to the colored stickers.
Note:
It may be necessary to turn the filter rods a
little so that the filters sit correctly.
3009_025
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 3-7

3.7 Replenisher Mixing with the Easy Film Box and Easy Paper Box
CAUTION!
Do not open the screw caps on the easy boxes!
The easy boxes are put in the docking station up side down. The chemistry can
flow out if the caps are open.
The boxes are opened by the d-lab.1 during the docking procedure.
3.7.1 Replenisher tanks and docking station in the Film Processor
CAUTION!
Anti-oxidation plates must be present in
the CD replenisher tank of the Film
Processor. These small plastic plates
(CL+P4-6203) are filled in ex factory and
should cover the complete developer
surface.
Check that the plates exist in the CD

replenisher tank and fill up, if required
3003_018
1 Docking station
2 Replenisher tanks
3.7.2 Replenisher tanks, water tank and docking station in the Paper Processor
CAUTION!
When you open the cover of the CD
replenisher tank, make sure that the
rubber cover is tightly connected again to
avoid oxidation of the CD replenisher.
The CD replenisher tank of the Paper

Processor already includes a floater to
avoid oxidation. Therefore the anti-
oxidation plates must not be filled into
this tank.
3003_019
1 Docking station
2 Replenisher tanks
3 Water tank for Film Processor and Paper Processor
3-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

3.7.3 Filling the water tank (Machines with Docking)

Note:
The water tank consists of 2 interconnected tanks holding 24 liters in all. They are
filled through the opening in the upper tank. 3
Fill the water tank (1) until the upper one of

the two float sensors is activated or the
overflow indicator sticks out of the tank; see
Ö 3.7.2 Replenisher tanks, water tank and
docking station in the Paper Processor
According to the message open the docking
station of the Film or Paper Processor:
see Ö 3.7.4 Film Processor:
see Ö 3.7.5 Paper Processor: inserting a
new Paperbox
3009_014
3.7.4 Film Processor: inserting a new Filmbox

Note:
F1 has double reach and is therefore only used for every other docking process.
Reach for 135-24Exp.:

F1 400 films
F2 200 films
Open the docking station and remove the

empty box.
Insert a new box in the docking station with
the sticker facing up.
Close the docking station:
The machine will start automatically to mix
the replenishers (LED lights).
3003_033
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 3-9

3.7.5 Paper Processor: inserting a new Paperbox

Open the docking station and remove the
empty box.
Insert a new box in the docking station with
the sticker facing up.
Close the docking station:
The machine will start automatically to mix
the replenishers (LED lights).
3003_020
An active mixing process is indicated when the LED next to the docking station lights
permanently. During this procedure the door is locked mechanically.
The replenishers are mixed automatically by the integrated electrically driven mixers
(Paper Processor) resp. the circulation pumps (Film Processor).
One preparation is sufficient for 100 m2 of color negative paper (1 m2 of paper
corresponds to approx. 65 prints, size 10x15).
There should always be a box in the docking station (to reduce oxidation). There are two
alternatives:
1. Once the LED turned off the box may be removed and replaced by a full one.
2. Alternatively the empty box may remain in the machine until the user gets a message
to insert a new box.
3-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

3.8 Replenisher Mixing for Machines with Open Chemicals (Paper Processor)
3.8.1 Usage open confectioned chemicals

3
Chemicals Mixing Instructions Order No.
CD-R Color developer add to the CD 4 liters of water 5MEPC
replenishing tank + 1 bottle CD concentrate (= 1 liter)
BX-R Bleachfix add to the BX 4.5 liters of water 5MERG
replenishing tank + 1 bottle BX concentrate, part A (= 1,93 liters)
+ 1 bottle BX concentrate, part B (= 1 liter)
SB_R Stabilizer add to the SB 4.9 liters of water 5FFVD
replenishing tank + 100 ml SB concentrate
3.8.2 Using box chemicals

As replenisher the following chemicals have to be used:
easy paper box 110
ABC code 5KPGL
3.8.2.1 Mixing Instructions

Chemicals Mixing Instructions Order No.
CD-R Color developer add to the CD 4 liters of water
replenishing tank + 1 bottle CD concentrate (= 1 liter)
BX-R Bleachfix add to the BX 4.5 liters of water
replenishing tank + 1 bottle BX concentrate, part A (= 1,93 liters) 5KPGL
+ 1 bottle BX concentrate, part B (= 1 liter)
SB_R Stabilizer add to the SB 4.9 liters of water
replenishing tank + 100 ml SB concentrate
3.8.2.2 Parameter
Bath Temperature Replenishment rate
CD 40 °C ± 0,3 °C 50 ml/m2
BX 38 °C ± 2 °C 68 ml/m2
SB 37 °C ± 3 °C 200 ml/m2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 3-11

3.8.3 Using the MSC/d-lab.3 Replenishers

The MSC200/300/d-lab.3 and MSC100-300 replenishers can be ordered seperateley.
Each replenisher tank carries a label with an individual color marking.
Volume of the replenisher tanks: 4.5 liters for CD uand SB; 7.5 liters for BX.
3.8.3.1 Mixing Instructions for starter oc

– Only the MSC 200/300/d-lab.3 replenishers for BX and SB can be prepared directly
in the replenisher tanks of the machine. The concentrate must be measured as
indicated in the table, then water has to be added.
– The MSC 200/300/d-lab.3 replenisher for CD cannot be prepared directly in the
replenisher tank of the machine. 10 liters of CD have to be prepared outside the
machine. 4.5 liters will be filled into the CD replenisher tank, the rest (5,5 liters) of the
replenisher can be stored in a container. Nitrogen has to be sprayed into the container,
then the container should be closed quickly, otherwise the nitrogen will evaporate.
Amount in ml
Product denomination Concentrate Water Regplenisher Order No.
Paper-CD (1 part) 1,800 8,200 10,000 5JZVE
Paper-BX Repl. part A 1,500 5,250 7,500 5JZWG
Paper-BX Repl. part B 750
Paper-SB Repl. 110 4.390 4,500 5FFVD
Water:
Recommended water temperature:
approx. 30 °C
Use the attached 5 l jug to measure the
indicated amounts
Fill the amount of water (see table) in
the respective replenisher tank (see
preparation label)
Replenisher concentrates:
Use a measuring cylinder with ml
scaling
Fill the amount of concentrate (see
table) in the respective replenisher tank
(see preparation label)
Note:
The replenishers are mixed automatically by
the built-in electrically driven mixing stick.
3-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

3.9 Other Operations to be performed prior to Production Start

1. Setting the default values
See Ö the sections Setting the replenishment rates, Setting the temperatures and
Calibrate the pumps in chapter 4 Settings 3
2. Calibrating the machine;
see Ö Tests in chapter 5
3. Adjusting the machine to the operators‘ needs (e.g. language) and to the production
requirements (e.g. order configurations);
see Ö Settings in chapter 4
4. Check the quality of the solutions in Film and Paper Processor

see Ö Process check in chapter 10
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 3-13

3-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Settings and Configurations
4 Settings and Configurations

The purpose of the settings is to prepare the machine for production.
Machine settings
1. Definition of the paper configurations (paper widths and paper surfaces) used in
production. 4
2. Basic setting of the chemistry in use.
3. Basic settings of the machine, e.g. language for the user interface, settings for
automatic machine switch-on, settings for the Scanner and the Printer, settings for
receiving / sending network orders, software updates.
Usually the administrator defines these settings when the machine is put into
operation.
Product configurations
Here the configurations for corrections, back print, Indexprints etc. are defined. These
configurations can be combined to various order configurations. The operator then only
has to select a suitable order configuration for the order.
Saving settings / Loading settings

Machine settings and configurations are saved (CD or hard disk). Saved machine settings
and/or configurations can be loaded as desired.
Call up in the Start screen

Settings
m2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-1

Settings and Configurations d-lab.1 family: Operation
4.1 Administrator Actions

Before the production can be started, certain settings must be entered and various
preliminary jobs must be done.
These activities can only be performed by the user who has the appropriate user rights.
This is the Administrator.
The settings and the creation of order configurations are the subject of this chapter.
Preliminary jobs required for the production are described in a different chapter see
Preparing conventional orders, chapter 6.
4.1.1 Required Settings

Settings Call up with the following buttons
Country-specific settings Settings
Machine settings
User interface
Creating operators with password, language, user rights Settings
Machine settings
User manager
Settings for the automatic switch-on via the Timer, e.g. start Settings
times, 1st user, calendar with off-days and staff vacations Machine settings
Timer
Paper: Settings
Coding paper magazines, entering switch positions for paper Machine settings
surfaces and paper widths on the machine and combining Paper surfaces
them to paper configurations. Paper widths
Paper configurations
Chemistry: Settings
Settings for the processing of films (FP; only d-lab.1 with Film Machine settings
Processor) and paper (PP). FP replenishment / PP replenishment
FP temperature / PP temperature
FP pumps / PP pumps
Machine: Settings
Settings for the automatic switch-on via the Timer, import of Machine settings
Indexprint layouts, settings for the Printer and the Scanner, Timer
Production Balance, communication with other machines, Indexprint Layout
(network orders), system date /time. Combiprint Layout
Printer
Scanner
Production Balance
Digital orders
Date/time
Other settings
4-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.1.2 Creating Order Configurations

Creating sub-configurations Settings
Print sizes
Autosave
Indexprint
Combiprint
Correction 4
Back print
Front print
Easy
Combining sub-configurations to form order configurations Settings
Order
4.1.3 Saving Settings and Configurations

Making a Backup copy of the settings and configurations Settings
Save settings
4.1.4 Order of the Settings

The settings are entered by the administrator. It must be observed that some settings are
a prerequisite for other settings:
Define first Then define

Machine settings Machine settings
User interface User manager
Paper surface, paper width, paper configuration Print sizes
Product configurations (all sub-configurations): Product configurations
Print size Order
Autosave
Index print
Combiprint
Corrections
Back print
Front print
Easy
4.1.5 Measuring Units

Unit Europe USA Example
Volume Liter Liter Replenishment rates
Length: small units mm Inch Paper width
large units m feet Paper length
Surface dimensions m2 sqft Reach of chemicals
Temperature Celsius Fahrenheit PP temperature
Weight kg lbs Machine
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-3

4.1.6 Explanations of the Machine Settings Screen

Settings
Machine settings
005
The settings are split up into Paper, Chemistry and Machine. This division has an effect
on the Load settings function: The settings under Paper are saved and loaded together
with the configurations.
Paper
Basic setting of the photographic paper in use:
– Paper surfaces and Paper widths
Set the switches acc. to the paper magazine coding for the surface (5-6) and the paper
width (1-4).
– Paper configurations
Surfaces and paper widths are combined to form paper configurations. They correspond
to the switch positions on the paper magazines.
Chemistry
Basic setting of the chemistry in use:
(FP: only d-lab.1 with Film Processor):
– FP and PP Replenishment
Replenishment rates for normal, increased and maximum replenishment
– FP and PP Temperature
Nominal temperatures for solutions and the dryer as well as sensor calibration
– FP and PP Pumps
Calibration of the pumps (replenisher and water)
4-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Machine
Basic setting of the machine:
– User interface for the country-specific settings
– User manager to create users with name, password and access rights
– Timer settings for the automatic switch-on/switch-off, definition of workdays with
start times as well as off-days and staff vacations
– Combiprint Layout for the import of predefined or customized layouts for 4
Combiprints, Greeting cards and passport
– Indexprint Layout for the import of predefined or customized layouts for Indexprints
– Printer, e.g. settings for MBL / PBL
– Scanner, e.g. Scan window, slide window, scratch correction
– Production Balance: Intensity, sharpness - edges, saturation, sharpness - Grain,
surface contrast (ACT), detail contrast (DCT), gradation, color / density corrections
– Network orders: Settings to receive and send remote orders and network orders
– Install Software: Update of machine software; installation of optional software
components, e.g. Indexprint
– Date/time to set the system date and time
– Other settings like e.g. Lab name and Lab ID for the back print, settings for the
automatic end of order (depending on the film length) and the allocation of order
numbers (automatic or manual)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-5

4.2 User interface and User
4.2.1 User Interface: Entering country-specific Settings

It is recommended to define the User interface first because this will facilitate all other
settings:
– Language:
Available languages: German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Japanese, Chinese.
See Note below.
– Keyboard assignment:
The selection has an impact on the display of the input screen on the touch screen.
– Country-specific settings:
When the administrator selects the respective language, all country specific settings
(e.g. measure system, temperature, date and time format) in this screen are
automatically filled with the usual standards: The administrator can change the preset
values by selecting other settings in the respective pull-down menu.
Date format / time format:

Date and time appear in the indicated format in the Timer settings and in the back
print.
If a 24 hours format is selected for the Time format, the buttons for the selection of
a.m. (morning) and p.m. (afternoon) are unnecessary and cannot be used.
Note:
Languages are defined on the d-lab.1/netlab.1 by means of users. As the settings for
the user interface only serve to facilitate the creation of new users, a language change
has no effect.
If the texts do not appear in the desired language, the Administrator must change the
language of the user used to log on: Service or Administrator. These two users exist
already and cannot be deleted.
See also 4.2.2 User Manager: Entering user-specific Settings.
4-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


Settings
Machine settings
User interface
Select Language
Keyboard:
Select the keyboard assignment for the 4
input screen on the touch screen
Buzzer when touched:
Activate / deactivate the acoustic signal
confirming the activation of a button
System
Temperature
Decimal sign
Num. separator
Time and date format and separator
038 Change presetting if required
a.m. / p.m. (morning / afternoon):
If a 12 hour format has been selected for the
Time format, select the respective code
here.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-7

4.2.2 User Manager: Entering user-specific Settings

Prerequisite:
The settings under User interface should have been defined already because they
facilitate the entry of the user-specific settings.
Tow users are preset and cannot be deleted:

1. Administrator with user rights for all functions except Service
2. Service with unlimited rights: all functions + Service functions
Any number of users can be created.
4.2.2.1 User – Edit the list

Settings
Machine settings
User manager
Edit the list:
Creating a new user:
Touch New (see Explanation of the
next screen on the next page)
Edit existing user settings:
Mark the user and Edit (see
Explanation of the next screen on the
next page)
Mark a user not needed any more in the
list and Delete
305
4-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.2.2.2 Editing user settings

Language, Keyboard, Buzzer when touched:
The settings selected under User interface are displayed. These general presettings can
be adjusted individually for each single user.
Note:
The language of the user interface of the d-lab is connected to the user. There are two
methods to define the desired language: Either this language is allocated to an existing 4
user, or a new user is created for this language. The respective user must have logged
on so that the user interface appears in the desired language.
If a user has been assigned to another language, all texts appear immediately in this
language after he has logged on (change of user). To change the user (logoff of one
operator and logon of another operator) see Changing the user in chapter 2.
Password:
The password consists of 4 digits.
Note:
If a user forgets the password, this user must be deleted and created again as new user.
User:
Touch Save or Save as to open the keyboard screen for the entry of the user name. The
name has 20 characters at max. The following special characters are not allowed:
„ / \ [ ] : ; | = + * ? < >
If the same operator starts the work every workday, this operator can be defined as
standard user: see 4.5.1 Timer

Settings
Machine settings
User manager
New or Modify
Change the password of a user:
Enter Old password
Enter New password and Repeat
Enter the password for a new user:
Enter New password and Repeat
If required change the presettings for
Language, Keyboard and Buzzer
Activate or deactivate the user rights:
see 4.2.2.3 Assigning user rights
036
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-9

4.2.2.3 Assigning user rights

The administrator can combine the user rights of every user in an individual user profile:
Menus Rights Description

Print modes Standard mode / Easy First orders
Reorder Reorders
File print Digital orders
Network orders Orders from the image box or a Workstation
Preview Standard, Reorder, File print and network orders
Slide print and manual positioning always work with a preview
Slide print / Slide film First order and reorder from positives slides (frames / strips)
Manual positioning Print mode for negatives that cannot be handled in the Autoprint or
Reorder mode:
– Single negatives
– Film strips without visible frame lines (spaces between the
negatives), e.g. night exposures
– Films without extended DX code
Settings Machine settings Production-specific settings:
– Paper (paper widths and surfaces)
– Chemistry (replenishment)
– Automation (e.g. of tests: MBL, Pico)
– Production Balance etc.
Configurations a) Create subordinate configurations
– Paper sizes
– Autosave
– Indexprint
– Combiprint
– Corrections
– Front print
– Back print
– Easy (for print mode Easy)
b) Sub-configurations combined to order configurations
Test Pico Scanner calibration (manual pixel correction)
Test MBL and PBL to calibrate the chemistry and the paper
– Control strips for the quality control of the chemistry of the Film
and Paper Processor
– Access to Remote functions
4-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.3 Paper Configurations

A paper configuration always consists of a paper width and a paper surface. The cut length
of the paper is managed independent of the paper configuration in the menu Print size.
Switches for a paper magazine change:

Switches 1-4 paper width
Switches 5-6 surface
4
The switch positions are defined under Settings > Machine settings > Paper surfaces
and Paper widths. They cannot be edited here.
Each switch combination of the magazine switches may only be used once!
4.3.1 Standard Settings

The following list indicates the configurations that exist in the machine when it is
delivered.
Paper surface
Name Switch 5 Switch 6
glossy o x
matte o o
Other 1 x o
Other 2 x x
Paper width
Name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4
82 o x o x
89 o x o o
95 x o o o
102 o o o x
120 o o x o
127 o x x o
152 o x x x
165 x o o x
178 x o x o
203 x x o o
Paper configuration
Name
89 glossy
102 glossy
127 glossy
152 glossy
203 glossy
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-11

4.3.2 Coding the Paper Magazines

The paper magazine is coded for the paper width (1-4) and the surface (5-6) in use.
Meaning of the coding:
Switch closed (corresponds to ⌧ in the menu)
■ Switch open (corresponds to in the menu)
PATTERN 1 2 3 4 5 6
PAPER SIZE
3.25 Inch (82 mm) *
3.50 Inch (89 mm)
3.75 Inch (95 mm)
4.00 Inch (102 mm)
4.50 Inch (114 mm) *
4.75 Inch (120 mm) GLOSSY
5.00 Inch (127 mm) MATTE
6.00 Inch (152 mm) CUSTOM1
7.00 Inch (178 mm)
8.00 Inch (203 mm)
8.25 Inch (210 mm)
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
* see Paper width 114 on the next page

The table shows the AgfaPhoto standard. If required, a different allocation of the switches
to paper widths and surfaces can be defined.
Once the magazine is put in, the machine automatically recognizes the paper width and
the paper surface, and offers the corresponding print sizes in the print menus for
selection.
4-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Paper width 114:

– The paper widths 82 mm and 114 mm have the same coding.
– If only paper width 114 mm is used, paper width 82 mm must be deleted.
– If both paper widths are used, one of the two paper widths must get a free coding (see
Table on the previous page).
4
Paper width 82 mm is not used:
Change the 82 code to 114 mm:
In configurations with width 82 delete
the width:
Settings
Machine settings
Paper width
Mark paper width 82 in the list and
Delete
Under New save the old magazine code
82 as code 114 and create
configurations with paper width 114
mm
Both paper widths 82 mm and 114 mm are

used:
Under New select a free code and save
it as code 114
Create configurations with paper width
114 mm
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-13

4.3.3 Defining Paper Surfaces

The paper surfaces used in the lab are defined here.
The total number of surfaces which can be processed in the machine without conversion
is 4.
Presetting see Table under 4.3.2 Coding the Paper Magazines
Notes:
It is checked under Save and Save as whether the current setting of the magazine
switches exists already.
Delete: An error message comes up if one tries to delete a surface that is used in a
configuration.
4.3.3.1 Paper surfaces – Edit the list

Settings
Machine settings
Paper surfaces
Edit the list:
Create a new surface:
next screen 4.3.3.2)
Edit the existing surface:
Mark the surface and Modify (see
Explanation of the next screen 4.3.3.2)
Mark a surface not needed any more in
the list and Delete
Mark a surface, touch Rename and
enter a new name
308
4.3.3.2 Paper surfaces: Defining the paper magazine coding

Settings
Machine settings
Paper surfaces
New or Modify
Select PfDF surface:
List with the 12 standard PfDF surfaces
(important for network orders), e.g. Glossy,
Fine grain, Silk
Activate Switches
The switches 5 and 6 define the name of the
paper surface
020
4-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.3.4 Defining Paper Widths

Here the paper widths used in the machine are defined.
The total number of paper widths which can be processed in the machine without
conversion is 15.
Presetting see Table under 4.3.2 Coding the Paper Magazines
Admissible range
82 - 210 mm (integral values) 4
3,25 - 8,25 inch (two positions behind the comma)
Notes:
It is checked under Save and Save as whether the current setting of the magazine
switches exists already.
Delete: An error message comes up if one tries to delete a paper width that is used in
a configuration.
4.3.4.1 Paper widths – Edit the list

Settings
Machine settings
Paper widths
Edit the list:
Create a new paper width:
Edit the existing paper width:
Mark the paper width and Modify (see
next page)
Mark a paper width not needed any
more in the list and Delete
306
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-15

4.3.4.2 Paper widths: Defining the paper magazine coding

Settings
Machine settings
Paper widths
New or Modify
Activate Switch
Switch 1 to Switch 4 define the paper
width
090
4-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.3.5 Defining the Paper Configuration

Here the paper widths and paper surfaces defined already are combined to form paper
configurations. Each configuration corresponds to a certain unique combination of switch
positions on the paper magazines.
Each paper in use, i.e. each paper configuration, must be calibrated (see PBL test in
chapter 5).
4
4.3.5.1 Paper configuration – Edit the list

Settings
Machine settings
Paper configuration
Edit the list:
Create a new paper configuration:
next screen 4.3.5.2)
Edit the existing paper configuration:
Mark the configuration and Modify
(see Explanation of the next screen
4.3.5.2)
Mark a paper configuration not needed
any more in the list and Delete
Mark a paper configuration, touch
Rename and enter a new name
307
4.3.5.2 Paper configuration: Checking the paper magazine coding

The position of the paper magazine switches is displayed. It cannot be edited in this
screen.

Settings
Machine settings
Paper configuration
New or Modify
Select Paper width and Surface:
The corresponding position (on/off) of the
paper magazine switches is displayed.
088
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-17

4.3.5.3 Setting the paper Offsets

The Offsets are used to center the image projected on the paper on the exposure table in
horizontal and vertical direction.
A minor deviation is usually no problem because the image is projected overlapping on
the paper (3% is standard).
WB prints: If the image is not projected in the middle of the paper, the borders are of
different widths. This may be corrected by the Offset settings.
X-Offset / Y-Offset for large and small sizes:

The following must be observed on the d-lab.1 for the formats:
1. Small size means
Paper width not larger than 152 mm and cut length not larger than 203 mm
2. Large size means
Paper width larger than 152 mm and/or cut length larger than 203 mm
Example:
For print size 15x20 of paper width 152 mm, 1 is applicable.
Note:
The back print on the prints helps reproduce the position of the paper on the exposure
table. The back print begins on the front edge of the paper advance. It is important to
note whether or not the paper was turned in the lane distributor.
See also X/Y-Offset setting direction on the next page and Table on the next
page but one.

Settings
Machine settings
Paper configuration
New or Modify
Offsets
Enter the X-Offset and/or the Y-Offset for
large and small sizes:
Setting range: -200 to +200
Signifying:
1 mm = 15 pixels for small size (Zoom 0)
1 mm = 10 pixels for large size (Zoom 1)
109
4-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

X/Y-Offset setting direction

The following figure shows the setting direction:
3003_104
1 Image center
2 Transport direction Paper Processor
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-19

Rotation
Mind the rotation when defining the required Offsets!
The following figure illustrates the correlation between the paper position on the
exposure table and the position of the prints in the Sorter because the effects of the
Offsets will only be visible on the processed print.
Paper on the exposure table behind the lane distributor in the Sorter
deposit at the bottom deposit at the top
Paper width (small sizes) (large sizes)
3003_103
4-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.4 Chemistry
4.4.1 Film Processor Settings (d-lab.1 with Film Processor)
4.4.1.1 Film Processor: Setting the replenishment rates

The replenishment is throughput-dependent, i.e. in accordance with the number of films
processed daily. In order to keep the production stable, more chemicals and water must 4
be replenished when the throughput is low as is the case for a higher throughput. Here, a
difference is made between normal, increased and high replenishment.
This means that the normal replenishment rates are increased by the preset factor for the
increased or the maximum replenishment. The software calculates every day the average
throughput of the last 5 days and sets the appropriate replenishment automatically. The
increased replenishment is automatically activated for a throughput of less than 0,8 m2,
for a throughput of less than 0,5 m2, the maximum replenishment is activated. The values
indicated for the throughput are preset standard values. They can be altered if required.
Upon first machine startup or after the machine has not been used for several days, an
initial value must be set: Touch Activate normal repl. The system switches
automatically to the throughput-dependent replenishment after five days of operation.
CAUTION!
The preset standard values are precisely adjusted to AgfaPhoto chemicals.
Therefore we recommend changing the set values only if the preset standard
values do not produce optimum results.
Reset the values to standard, if required.
Note:
The replenishment rates for the individual solutions CD (Developer), BL (Bleachbath),
FX (Fixing bath) and SB (Stabilizer) cannot be changed separately. If one of the
replenishment rates is changed, the values of the other three solutions are changed in
proportion.
Throughput-dependent replenishment:
Throughput Replenishment, Replenishment in case the throughput
in case the throughput drops rises
(initial value = 1,0) (initial value = < 0,5)
normal: as of 1,0 m2 / day 1,0 1,0 Normal replenishment
Normal replenishment
between 0,8 and 1,0 m2 / day 1,0 0,8 Increased
Increased: < 0,8 m2 / day < 0,8 < 0,8 replenishment
Increased replenishment
between 0,5 and 0,8 m2 / day 0,8 0,5
Max. replenishment
Maximum: < 0,5 m2 / Tag < 0,5 Max. replenishment < 0,5
Explanation:
The replenishment the machine selects depends on whether or not the throughput rises
or drops during the observation period.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-21

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
FP replenishment
Changing the throughput-dependent
replenishment:
Touch the button of the parameter that
should be changed and enter the new value.
Upon first machine startup or after the
machine has not been used for several days:
Touch Activate normal Repl.
The system switches automatically to the
throughput-dependent replenishment after
five days of operation.
To reset all settings to standard:
Touch Reset to standard.
310 After all desired settings have been
performed:
Exit the screen with OK.
Replenishment rates
Replenishment rates
Solution Normal replenishment Increased replenishment Max. replenishment
CD Developer 567 ml/m2
BL Bleach 126 ml/m2
Factor 1,3 = 130% Factor 1,7 = 170%
FX Fixer 828 ml/m2
SB Stabilizer 504 ml/m2
+ Water 559 ml/m2 726 ml/m2 950 ml/m2
Replenishment rates / no. of films

Note:
The indicated square meters correspond to the indicated number of films.
Replenishment No. of films (135-24)

Normal replenishment from 1,0 m2 25
Increased replenishment for < 0,8 m2 21
Maximum replenishment for < 0,5 m2 13
4-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.4.1.2 Film Processor: Setting the temperatures / Calibrating the temperature sensors
Rated temperatures for the solutions and the dryer:
CD 37,8 °C
BL (FX) 38 °C ± 3 °C
SB 38 °C ± 3 °C
Dryer 60 °C
4
Note:
The fixing bath of the Film Processor is heated by the BL bath by means of a heat
exchanger, for this reason, no setting is required for this bath.
Reset altered values:

Touch Reset reference and Reset calibration to restore the standard values of the data
base.

Settings
Machine settings
FP temperature
Set the reference temperatures for the
solutions and the dryer
Calibrate the temperature sensors:
Touch Readjust CD:
The numeric keypad opens. The
temperature of the selected solution is
indicated in the first line of the input
field.
Remove the chemical filter, insert a
calibrated thermometer in the filter
holder and measure the current
temperature of the solution.
312 Enter the measured temperature value
via the numeric keypad and press OK:
The sensor will be calibrated.
Calibrate the temperature sensors for BL
and SB as described for CD
If necessary Reset reference or Reset
calibration
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-23

4.4.1.3 Film Processor: Calibrating the water pumps

Note:
It is not possible to modify the individual replenishment rates. The rates for CD
(developer), BL (bleachbath), FX (Fixing bath) and SB (stabilizer) can only be increased
or reduced together at the same ratio. If one of the replenishment rates is changed, the
values of the other solutions are changed in proportion.
CAUTION!
The preset standard values are precisely adjusted to AgfaPhoto chemicals and
AgfaPhoto paper. Therefore we recommend not to change the preset values.
Modified values should be Reset to standard, if required.
The values should only be modified if you notice during operation that the preset
values do not produce the best possible results.

Settings
Machine settings
FP pumps
Enter the water supply rate for CD-W, BL-W,
FX-W or SB-W
Use a cylinder and hang in the hose elbow.
The pumping starts immediately when
Activate xx-W pump is touched.
Activate xx-W pump
The pump button is only activated for the
pump for which a calibration volume was
entered.
When Readjust xx-W pump is touched, a
numeric keypad for the entry of the
measured volume is opened.
315
Enter the value and OK:
The pump is calibrated.
4-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.4.2 Paper Processor Settings
4.4.2.1 Paper Processor: Setting the replenishment rates

The replenishment is throughput-dependent, i.e. in accordance with the number of films
processed daily. In order to keep the production stable, more chemicals and water must
be replenished when the throughput is low as is the case for a higher throughput. Here, a
difference is made between normal, increased and high replenishment. 4
This means that the normal replenishment rates are increased by the entered factor for
the increased or the maximum replenishment. The software calculates every day the
average throughput of the last 5 days and sets the appropriate replenishment
automatically. The increased replenishment is automatically activated for a throughput of
less than 7,0 m2, for a throughput of less than 4,0 m2, the maximum replenishment is
activated. The values indicated for the throughput are preset standard values. They can be
altered if required.
Upon first machine startup or after the machine has not been used for several days, an
initial value must be set: Touch Activate normal Repl. The system switches
automatically to the throughput-dependent replenishment after five days of operation.
CAUTION!
AgfaPhoto paper. We therefore recommend changing the preset values only if the
preset values do not produce optimum results.
Reset the values to standard, if required.
Note:
The replenishment rates for the individual solutions CD (Developer), BX (Bleachfixing
bath) and SB (Stabilizer) cannot be changed separately. If one of the replenishment
rates is changed, the values of the other three solutions are changed in proportion.
Throughput-dependent replenishment:
Throughput Replenishment, Replenishment,
in case the throughput drops in case the throughput rises
(initial value = 15) (initial value = < 4)
Normal: as of 20 m2 / day 15 15 Normal replenishment
Normal replenishment
between 7 and 20 m2 / day 15 7 Increased
Increased: <7 m2 / day <7 <7 replenishment
Increased replenishment
between 4 and 7 m2 / day 7 4 Maximum
Maximum: < 4 m2 / day <4 Maximum replenishment <4 replenishment
Explanation:
The replenishment the machine selects depends on whether or not the throughput rises
or drops during the observation period.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-25


Settings
Machine settings
PP replenishment
Changing the throughput-dependent
replenishment:
Touch the button of the parameter that
should be changed and enter the new value.
Upon first machine startup or after the
machine has not been used for some days:
Touch Activate normal repl.
The system switches automatically to the
throughput-dependent replenishment after
five days of operation.
To reset all settings to standard:
Touch Reset to standard.
309 After all desired settings have been
performed:
Replenishment rates
Replenishment rates
Solution Normal replenishment Increased replenishment Max. replenishment
CD Developer 41 ml/m2 Factor 1,4 = 140% Factor 1,6 = 160%
+ Water 10 ml/m2 14 ml/m2 16 ml/m2
BX Bleachfix 68 ml/m2 Factor 1,4 = 140% Factor 1,6 = 160%
SB Stabilizer 41 ml/m2 Factor 1,4 = 140% Factor 1,6 = 160%
+ Water 159 ml/m2 223 ml/m2 254 ml/m2
4-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.4.2.2 Paper Processor: Setting the temperatures / Calibrating the temperature sensors
Nominal temperatures for solutions and dryer:
CD 38 °C ± 0,3 °C
40 °C ± 0,3 °C (27 sec developer time)
BX 38 °C ± 2,0 °C
SB 38 °C ± 3,0 °C
Dryer 65 °C 4
Reset modified values as well:
Touch buttons Reset reference or Reset calibration to enter the default values of the
data base again.

Settings
Machine settings
PP temperatures
Set the reference temperatures for the
solutions and the dryer
Calibrating the temperature sensors:
Touch Readjust CD:
The numeric keypad opens. The
temperature of the selected solution is
indicated in the first line of the input
field.
Remove the chemical filter, insert a
calibrated thermometer in the filter
holder and measure the current
temperature of the solution.
311 Enter the measured temperature value
via the numeric keypad and press OK:
The sensor will be calibrated.
Calibrate the temperature sensors for
BX and SB in the same way as described
for the CD.
If necessary Reset reference or Reset
calibration
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-27

4.4.2.3 Paper Processor: Calibrating the Water Pumps

Note:
The replenishment rages cannot be changed separately. The rates for CD (developer),
BX (bleachfix), and SB (stabilizer) can only be increased or reduced together at the
same ratio. If one of the replenishment rates is changed, the values of the other
solutions are changed in proportion.
CAUTION!
AgfaPhoto paper. Therefore we recommend not to change the preset values.
Modified values should be Reset to standard, if required.
The values should only be modified if you notice during operation that the preset
values do not produce the best possible results.

Settings
Machine settings
PP pumps
Enter the water supply rate for CD-W, BX-W
or SB-W
Activate xx-W pump
The pump button is only activated for the
pump for which a calibration volume was
entered.
Use a cylinder and hang in the hose elbow.

The pumping starts immediately when
Activate xx-W pump is touched.
When Readjust xx-W is touched, a numeric
keypad for the entry of the measured volume
314 is opened.
Enter the value and OK:
The pump is calibrated.
4-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.5 Machine
Note:
The buttons User interface and User manager have been described already:
see 4.2.1 User Interface: Entering country-specific Settings
see 4.2.2 User Manager: Entering user-specific Settings

4
4.5.1 Timer
4.5.1.1 Defining the ON/OFF Times and the Standard Users

Start
When entering the times for the automatic start, take into account the time for
preheating the solutions and the dryer, which is approx. 1 hour, until the operating
temperature is reached. For weekdays that are always off, e.g. Sunday, select Off. Single
off-days or periods, like national holidays or staff vacations are defined in the Calendar.
Sleep / Shutdown
In the Sleep mode the machine is shut down when Shutdown is pressed in the End of
work menu. Only the main computer remains on, e.g. for statistical checks via remote
data transmission. (Statistical functions will be available in a lager Software version). The
Main Computer is then switched off automatically at the indicated time. The Sleep mode
is activated by entering this switch-off time.
Standard logon
If the same operator usually starts the work on the machine every workday, log-on can be
simplified as follows:
– The operator is preset already in the logon window when the machine boots.
– Logon may even happen without a password check. It is specified under Autom.
Logon whether the user is logged on automatically after switch-on, or whether he has
to identify himself by means of a password. In case of automatic log-on, the Main
menu appears immediately after the warming-up phase.
Standby:
– Printer energy saving mode:
If no entries are performed for a certain time during the day, the machine goes
automatically into the Standby mode.
Preset time: 15 minutes
Admissible range: 1 – 1.440 minutes
– Shutdown when no action:
If no inputs are made for some time after the machine has been switched on, the
machine will switch off again automatically.
Preset time: 3 hours
Admissible range: 1 – 24 hours
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-29


Settings
Machine settings
Timer
Define the Start times and the Sleep mode:

Start
Enter a switch-on times for each
weekday or set Off
Sleep / Switch off
Enter a switch-off times for each
weekday or set Off
Standard logon
If necessary, select a standard user for
the first logon after machine startup.
Activate Autom. logon if the user
033
should log on without a password
check.
Standby
Printer energy saving mode:
Enter the desired time interval
Shutdown when no action
Enter the desired time interval
Edit calendar
Another screen opens; see 4.5.1.2
Calendar: Defining Off-Days on the next
page
4-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.5.1.2 Calendar: Defining Off-Days

The machine should not switch on automatically on off-days.
1. Therefore free workdays are defined in general in the Timer screen.
2. National holidays and staff vacations, however, must be defined individually in the
Calendar.
4
Settings
Machine settings
Timer
Edit calendar
Select year / month with the arrow keys
Define off-days:
black Workday
blue Free workdays
blue circle Current day
OK
084
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-31

4.5.2 Importing Indexprint Layouts / Combiprint Layouts

Imported Layouts can be used in Indexprint and Combiprint configurations.
Prerequisites:
The import of the layout files (optional) must be enabled before.
Only those layouts can be imported which were created in the AGFA IP Layout
Software. The file extensions of the Indexprint layouts correspond to the respective film
formats: .135, .240, .dig (digital). The file extension of the Combiprint layouts is .pas.
Lists and filters:

All Layouts of the selected drive or directory are listed on the left side; the right side
shows the Layouts already imported.
If a filter is indicated under Film mask, only the corresponding Layout files appear in the
two lists of this screen. Unfiltered lists can be called up with the setting No filter.
Use of:
When a Layout is marked, it is shown here in which configurations it is used.

Settings
Machine settings
Indexprint layout or
Combiprint layout
Request a filtered or an unfiltered list of the
layout files:
Filtered: Select a Film mask
Unfiltered: Select No filter
Press the Symbol for a drive and, if
necessary, in the next screen (see 4.5.2.1
on the next page) select the directory in
which the Layout files are stored.
Import single or all files of a drive or
directory:
092 Mark single file(s) in the left list and
touch the arrow or
Example: Import of Indexprint layouts
Touch the double arrow
Mark any Layouts not needed in the right list
and Delete
Confirm the selection with OK and close the
screen
4-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.5.2.1 Searching files

If more than six entries are made, arrow keys appear on the right edge that can be used to
scroll the list.

Settings 4
Machine settings
Indexprint layout or
Combiprint layout
Drive symbol
Search a directory:
Use and to scroll the list until the
desired directory is displayed.
Touch the directory:
All directories and files contained are listed.
If necessary, return to the parent directory
with .
Import single or all files and transfer them to
the right list:
093 Mark the file and touch the arrow or
Touch the double arrow
Touch Refresh to refresh the data in the
lists.
screen:
The selected files appear in the opened
screen, e.g. Importing Indexprint Layouts.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-33

4.5.2.2 Settings for the IPLayout Software

The following is an overview of the major settings of the AgfaPhoto IPLayout Software for
the definition of Indexprints. Other data can be taken from the documentation of the
IPLayout Software.
The resolution in dpi must be set in accordance with the input device:
– d-lab.1:
– 380 for sizes smaller than/equal 152x203
– 260 for sizes larger than 152x203
– image box:
– 400 for all sizes
Enter the settings:

Width of paper in 1/10 inch:
Paper width in Inch x 10
Grid:
Horizontal 1
Vertical 1
(not used on the d-lab.1)
Maximum layout:
Product of resolution in dpi and paper
width or length
Usable layout:
3% to compensate for Printer tolerances
Resolution in dpi:
Set as a function of the input device
and the size (only d-lab.1).
iplayout1
Observe the following for the sizes on the d-lab.1:

1. Small size (smaller than/equal 152x203) means
Paper width not larger than 152 mm and cut length not larger than 203 mm
2. Large size (larger than 152x203) means
Paper width larger than 152 mm and/or cut length larger than 203 mm
Example:
4-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.5.2.3 Overview of the AGFA standard Indexprint layouts

The following layouts are supplied as standard with the machine and can be used as basis
for own layouts.
Settings for IPLayout Software

Paper Maximum 4
Film Size Paper width Paper length Grid Resolution
Name width Layout
type
Inch mm Inch mm Inch mm 1/10 Inch H,V Width Length dpi
135 AGFA_35x50.135 3,5x50 9x13 3,5 89 5 127 35 1,1 1330 1900 380
AGFA_40x60.135 4x6 10x15 4 102 6 152 40 1,1 1520 2280 380
AGFA_50x70.135 5x7 13x18 5 127 7 178 50 1,1 1900 2660 380
AGFA_60x80.135 6x8 15x20 6 152 8 203 60 1,1 2280 3040 380
AGFA_60x8.25.135 6x8,25 15x21 6 152 8,25 210 60 1,1 1560 2145 260
AGFA_80x60.135 8x6 20x15 8 203 6 152 60 1,1 1560 2080 260
AGFA_80x120.135 8x12 20x30 8 203 12 305 80 1,1 2080 3120 260
Agfa_CD_50x50.135 5x5 12x12 5 127 4,75 121 50 1,1 1900 1805 380
240 AGFA_35x60.240 3,5x6 9x15 3,5 89 6 152 35 1,1 1330 2280 380
AGFA_40x70.240 4x7 10x18 4 102 7 178 40 1,1 1520 2660 380
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-35

4.5.3 Printer Settings

The Overlapping function is used to suppress undesirable white borders. The value
indicates by how many per cent the digitized image is calculated bigger than the paper to
be exposed. The presetting is 3%. The step width is 0,1%.
The Master paper must be the most commonly used paper in the laboratory. The MBL
(Master balance) is printed on this paper.
If Autom. MBL has been activated, an automatic MBL test will be printed after the
automatic machine start and the warm-up phase.

Settings
Machine settings
Printer
Enter Overlapping
Select Master Paper
Activate / deactivate Autom. MBL
Max. repetitions:
Enter a value between 1 and 10 under
Working points and LUT (Look-up table)
037
4-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.5.4 Scanner Settings (not for netlab.1)

Scratch correction:
– The scratch correction corrects scratches on both the front and back of the film.
– Scratches can be corrected that are caused, for example, by dust in the camera or in
the film drive. Deep scratches (damaged emulsion) and holes cannot be corrected.
– Depending on the extent of the scratches on the film, the printing procedure may take 4
very long (computing time).
Crop :
This value identifies the part of the scanned negative / slide on the CCD that has to be
printed. If the value is increased, the prints may get black borders.
Presetting for prints without undesirable black borders:
– Scan window for frames: 96%
– Scan window for slides: 91% to compensate varying slide frames

Settings
Machine settings
Scanner
Negative:
Activate / deactivate Negative scratch
corr.
Enter the value for Negative crop or
Slide crop
Reset the entered value to standard if
required
Dia:
Activate / deactivate Slide scratch
correction
Enter the value for Slide crop
031
Reset the entered value to standard if
required
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-37

4.6 Production Balance
4.6.1 General Information

General machine settings like e.g. corrections, contrast settings, the activation of the TFS
logic are listed under Production Balance. Modifications become effective only after a
new start (ON button on the housing).
Prerequisite:
The machine must be calibrated before: see Test prints: MBL (Master Balance) and
PBL (Paper Balance) in Chapter 5.
Note:
Changes in the production balance should only be made if after a long observation
period and sufficient production experience it is clear that the complete production
must be corrected in one direction.
Recommended procedure:
A long observation period should pass between the individual steps (1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2 and
everything mentioned under 3.).
For color and density corrections, the weighting depends on the entered correction
intensity, see 4.6.4.1 Correction Intensity (for Color negative and Digital).
1. Basic setting:
1.1 Color corrections (YMC)
1.2 Density corrections (D)
2. Over and under-exposed negatives (Slope)
2.1 Color corrections (YMC)
2.2 Density corrections (D)
3. All other corrections:
Sharpness - edges, saturation, surface and detail contrast, gradation etc., as well as the
additional parameters of the TFS logic for color negatives (color, density, selector
logic)
A change of the parameters shifts the printed results into one direction. But the result in
the opposite direction is also influenced. For this reason, parameters should only be
modified by experienced operators.
Back print:
The settings are not considered in the back print as the productions balance defines the
basic setting (0-value).
Correction values entered later (e.g. via correction configurations or for image
enhancement) are added to this 0-value.
The back print only shows the manually entered corrections, not the ones of the
corresponding configuration.
Note for slides:

There exists no production balance for slides. They must be corrected manually
(correction configurations for color/density corrections).
The corrections entered under Production Balance / Color negative do not influence
the production of slides.
4-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.2 Calling up the Production Balance

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
(see Next screen 4.6.3 Selecting Color
Negative or Digital
4
005
4.6.3 Selecting Color Negative or Digital

The differentiation between Color negative and Digital is necessary because some of the
settings are different. See also 4.6.3.1 Overview: Identical and different parameters for
color negative and Digital

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Select Color negative or Digital
OK:
The associated next screen is opened: see
4.6.6 and 0
102
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-39

4.6.3.1 Overview: Identical and different parameters for color negative and Digital
Parameters Color negative Digital
Intensity (of correction) x x
Sharpness – edges x x
SAT saturation x x
Sharpness – grains x x
DCT detail contrast x x
ACT surface contrast x x
Gradation x x
Red eyes x x
Portrait logic x x
Color/density corrections – x
see Note
TFS selector logic x
TFS color logic x
TFS density logic x
DX code independent of color correction: x
Basic setting and under- and overexposure
DX code depending on color correction: x
Basic setting and under- and overexposure
Note:
Color/density corrections for color negatives are entered independent of the exposure.
For this reason, they appear in other screens (see the two bottom lines in the Table).
First, a description of the identical parameters for Color negative and Digital. Followed
by the call-up and the operation of the screens and functions for Digital and Color
negative as well as an explanation of the parameters that differ.
4-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.4 Identical Parameters for Color Negatives and Digital
4.6.4.1 Correction Intensity (for Color negative and Digital)

Basic setting of the machine to modify the colors/density for the whole production: It
affects all color/density corrections, i.e. in all screens with regulators for yellow, magenta,
cyan and density. These corrections do not show in the back print. 4
Change of the Intensity (only influences the color and density regulators):
– Presetting: 100%
– Range: 50-200%
The exact effect of the selected correction intensity depends on the paper gradation:
The presetting of 100 should result in a correction density step of about 0.07D and a color
step of about 0.03D-0.04D on the print. The parameter changes are linear: 50 halves, 200
doubles the effect.
Recommendations:
1. The correction intensity should only be changed once in order to adjust the fine
grading or the scope of correction to personal requirements.
2. Seasonal changes (color dominants green and white) should not be balanced
by the correction intensity, but only by the corrections themselves.
Shifting all 3 colors by the same extent and in the same direction has no effect.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-41

4.6.4.2 Sharpness – Edges (for Color negatives and Digital)

The parameter Sharpness – Edges has a selective impact on lines with a strong contrast
change, i.e. light/dark transitions along edges, e.g. windows in a building. This makes the
sharpness impression sharper or softer.
Setting range: –9 to +9
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
– Shifting towards +
The light/dark transitions is emphasized, edge appears sharper
– Only effective if there is sufficient contrast.
– Blurred and unsharp exposures are only improved to a limited extent.
– Excessive increase will cause artifacts, e.g. thin white lines on dark branches appear
artificial.
– Shifting towards –
The light/dark transitions are reduced, edges are softened
– For portrait pictures a reduction by –2 to –4 may be appropriate to conceal
blemishes on the skin, for example.
Note:
The impression of sharpness depends on the print size and the paper surface. It is
therefore recommended to create special correction configurations, e.g. for large sizes
or crop enlargements with a shift towards +, or for portraits with a shift towards - (see
4.13 Correction Configurations).
It is recommended to set this parameter not, or not too much, in contrast with
Sharpness – Grain (see 4.6.4.4 Sharpness – Grain (for Color negatives and Digital)
4-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.4.3 Saturation (for Color negatives and Digital)

The parameter Saturation (SAT) is used for color prints to change the color saturation.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect: 4
All colors get more intensive.
– Shots with many colored areas (flowers, cars, technical shots, product advertising
etc.) get even more colorful, but portraits and moody pictures appear unnatural.
– The soft-focus of very colorful details (fabric folds, structure of a flower leaf) is lost.
All colors are reduced.
– This may make sense for portraits and moody pictures.
Note:
Make changes only for single negatives.
4.6.4.4 Sharpness – Grain (for Color negatives and Digital)

The parameter Sharpness – Grain has a similar effect as Sharpness – edges (see
4.6.4.2 on the previous page), but on all picture parts with a fine structure, like e.g. grass
stalks or hair in portraits.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
Fine details appear even sharper (e.g. highlights in the night), homogeneous parts in
contrast show noise effects, the grain may become visible.
Soft-focus effect, the noise is reduced, the grain structure is reduced (with values ≤ 0,
e.g. –4), but detail sharpness is lost.
Note:
It is recommended to set this parameter not, or not too much, in contrast with
Sharpness – Edges.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-43

4.6.4.5 Gradation (for Color negatives and Digital)

The parameter Gradation has the effect as if softer or harder paper was used. A
modification of the parameter affects all prints, in contrast to the surface contrast which
only influences contrasty pictures.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
Prints appear harder
Prints appear softer, e.g. "washed-out" picture parts, like flashlight on cheeks, are
reduced, black areas appear less extreme.
Note:
Modifications of the gradation do not cause color changes.
4.6.4.6 Surface contrast (for Color negative and Digital)

The parameter ACT (Surface) influences the contrast of large structures (cm). Shadow
parts can be lighted and at the same time highlights (e.g. flashlight faces) can be
darkened.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
The contrast is reduced.
Values that are too high may cause artifacts, like e.g. Halo effects of dark faces in front
of a gray background.
The contrast is increased.
For example, bright faces in front of a dark background: The more negative the value
is, the brighter is the face and the darker is the background.
Extreme settings cause artifacts.
Notes:
Detail contrast and area contrast should not be adjusted in opposite directions.
4-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.4.7 Detail Contrast (for Color negatives and Digital)

The DCT (Details) parameter influences the contrast is small structures. For reference,
these are structures on the finished print which are smaller than 5 mm.
Changes also influence the sharpness impression of the complete picture.
Step width: 1 4
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
Structures appear sharper / harsher
Structures appear softer / flatter
Note:
Extreme settings cause artifacts.
Detail contrast and area contrast should not be adjusted in opposite directions.
4.6.4.8 Red-eyes correction (for color negatives and digital)

These parameters can be used to correct red eyes in faces. These parameters are based on
a logic which detects and evaluates faces in pictures.
If this function is activated it looks for faces in pictures and corrects reds eyes. Correction
is only possible if both eyes and the mouth in a face are visible. Certain circumstances,
such as reflections and eyeglasses, for example, may cause that faces are not detected.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-45

4.6.4.9 Portrait logic (for color negative and digital)

The parameters of the portrait logic allow color and density corrections in the faces. These
parameters are based on a logic which detects and evaluates faces in pictures.
Prerequisite:
The portrait logic only works in combination with dTFS. In other words, the portrait logic
cannot be used if dTFS is switched off or deactivated.
Range of applications:
As an automatic correction the portrait logic has been developed primarily for amateur
production. However, the function can also be used to get better results of professional
portraits. But still, the manual corrections allow to correct these pictures more precisely.
Adjustment range: –9 to +9
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
strongest correction in magenta direction ("colder")
strongest correction in yellow direction ("warmer")
If this function is activated it looks for faces in pictures and corrects the skin color. The
color correction is added to the TFS correction and influences the complete picture and
not just the faces.
The impact of the color correction after portrait detection can be adjusted by the
Correction impact control. The control for target color (target skin tone) can be used to
shift the face color either in yellow or in magenta direction.
In Asian countries the magenta skin tones are favored, the Europeans prefer warmer skin
tones. With this parameter such continent specific differences can be considered.
The influence of the color correction on the entire picture is useful from a photographic
viewpoint because color casts in a portrait are often caused by the exposure light (warm
evening sunlight, cold shadows). So the correction improves the complete picture.
Correction is only possible if both eyes and the mouth in a face are visible. Certain
circumstances, such as reflections and eyeglasses, for example, may cause that faces are
not detected.
4-46 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.4.10 Brightness: Lights, Medium Tones, Shadows

These parameters allow separate control of the brightness in light, medium and shady
light conditions, and thus influence the gradation in the individual brightness areas.
Lights, medium tones and shadows can be made brighter or darker.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0 4
Brightness Effect:
Shifting towards + Shifting towards –
Lights Lights become brighter Lights become darker
Medium Tones Medium tones become brighter Medium tones become darker
Shadows Shadows become brighter Shadows become darker
For the Indian and maybe also the Asian market the parameter Brightness: Lights could
be reduced, because then the highlights become softer and blemishes on the skin will not
show as much (make-up effect), which corresponds to the general taste there. The
parameter Brightness: Medium tones could be slightly increased to intensify this effect.
Moreover, Brightness: Shadows should be reduced to make hair and eyes show darker.
For the European market a reduction of Brightness: Lights in portraits may also be an
advantage. Shadows which are too dark can be made lighter by increasing the parameter
Brightness: Shadows.
4.6.5 Different Parameters for Color Negatives and Digital

Now follows a description of the call-up and operation of the screens and functions for
Digital and Color negative with an explanation of the parameters that are different:
– Digital see 4.6.6 Digital: Entry of Corrections
– Color negative see 4.6.7 Color Negative: Entry of Corrections
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-47

4.6.6 Digital: Entry of Corrections
4.6.6.1 Color/density corrections (digital)

Note:
Color/density corrections for color negatives are entered independent of the exposure.
For this reason, they appear in other screens (see 4.6.9.2 Color/Density Corrections.
There is a regulator each for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Density. The effect of the
corrections depends on the setting of the parameter Intensity (see 4.6.4.1 Correction
Intensity (for Color negative and Digital). Corrections entered here do not appear in the
back print.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Digital
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Density
Enter color/density corrections by means of
the arrows:
Reducing the value: left arrow
Increasing the value: right arrow
can be used to call up other regulators
for the image enhancement (see next
screen)
103_1
4-48 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.6.2 Image enhancement (Digital)

Note:
For the description of the effect see 4.6.4.2 to 4.6.4.7
Corrections entered here do not appear in the back print.
Setting range: –9 to +9 4
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Sharpness– Edges
SAT saturation
Sharpness – Grain
Gradation
Enter corrections by means of the arrows:
screen)
103_2
ACT (Surface)
DCT (Details)
Activate or deactivate Red eyes
Activate or deactivate Portrait logic:
If the function is active, set the control for
Correction impact and Target color (target
skin tone) on the desired value:
screen)
103_3
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-49

Brightness: Highlights
Brightness: Middle tones
Brightness: Shadows
is used to return to the other corrections
(see previous screen)
103_4
4-50 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.7 Color Negative: Entry of Corrections
4.6.7.1 Image enhancement (Color Negative)

Note:
For the description of the effect see 4.6.4.2 to 4.6.4.7
4
Corrections entered here do not appear in the back print.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
Activate or deactivate Red eyes
Sharpness – Edges
SAT saturation
Sharpness – Grain
Gradation
can be used to go to other regulators (see
next screen)
079
ACT (Surfaces)
DCT (Details)
Activate or deactivate Portrait logic:
If the function is active, set the control for
Correction impact and Target color (target
skin tone) on the desired value:
can be used to go to other regulators (see
next screen)
079_2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-51

Brightness: Shadows
079_3
4-52 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.7.2 Learning TFS (Color Negative)

The TFS (Total Film Scanning = AgfaPhoto Ganzfilmmessung) scans the whole film (film
strip). This way, additional information is available for each single negative, with the
following results:
– The differences among the various film types (mask, character, emulsions) are
harmonized. This makes the production more uniform.
– As not only the picture contents of each single negative is analyzed, but the whole 4
film (film strip), subject groups can be influenced selectively by color/density
corrections.
Selective use of the function:

– The factory presettings are used.
– The TFS learning mode is activated. Once the learning phase is finished, the values
found are used. The aim is to ensure a uniform production by compensating for color
dominants and emulsion fluctuations.
TFS learning mode:

During the learning phase (self-learning TFS curves), at least 21 different films of the
same film type with at least 6 negatives each must be scanned. The films should be
exposed in different cameras if possible.
Note:
Do not use the same film 21 times as otherwise the statistics will be falsified!
The learning TFS is based on the DX code. As the fluctuations due to film processing
differences are stronger than the differences among film types, the best results are
obtained with films that have been processed, if possible, in an identical or at least
similar way.
During the learning phase the standard values are used.
Use TFS learning:

Only after the learning phase, i.e. from film 22 of the same type on, the film type specific
values determined during the Prescan have an effect: The TFS curves are used for logic
calculations.
This has an effect on the handling of dominant colors. Advantages are especially visible
on films with a large green portion: The magenta color casts in the gray areas are
reduced.
Reset learning TFS:

All values determined for all films during the learning phase are reset, i.e. all curves are
deleted. This Reset should only be activated in case the production deteriorates. Then the
learning process begins again if the learning mode is activated.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-53


Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
Activate or deactivate TFS learning mode
and Use learning TFS
Reset learning TFS if the production gets
worse.
079
4.6.7.3 Panorama Identification (Color Negative)

TFS recognizes Panorama negatives. The function must be activated so that the TFS
Panorama shots on films 135 can be recognized and printed correctly.
If films 135 are used for photographing, it is not the Full Frame that is exposed with the
Panorama setting: parts of the negative are blanked out. If the Panorama detection is
deactivated on the d-lab.1, these unexposed parts of the negative are exposed on the
photographic paper, causing black bars on the prints.
Activate Panorama identification if

Panorama formats should be printed from
films 135.
079
4-54 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.8 Color/Density Logic (Color Negative)

Note:
Certain parts of the logic intervene even if the regulators have not been changed.
Recommendation:
Do not change the standard setting.
4.6.8.1 TFS Color

The parameters for the following corrections are accessible with the button TFS Color:
– Dominants
– Tungsten light detection
– Shift correction
Dominant parameters
Negatives showing color parts that differ very much from the average, so-called color
dominants (e.g. a red car nearly filling the whole picture) are recognized by the TFS. The
areas with a color dominant are not taken into consideration for the calculation of the
exposure data so that negatives showing color dominants are printed without a color cast
(the red car in the above example remains red).
The threshold values (upper dominant limits) for the detection of color dominants can be
set separately for the colors Magenta, Blue, Green and Yellow.
Setting range: 0.0 to +4.0

Step width: 0.1
Standard setting: 1.0
Shifting towards +
– Color dominants are detected not so well. Prints from negatives with predominant
colors may possibly be treated like normal negative, i.e. they may show
complementary color casts.
– More uniform colors on the prints of one and the same order.
– Better color balance for subjects taken under special light conditions.
Shifting towards –
– Color dominants are detected more reliably: The prints appear neutral.
– Less uniform colors on the prints of one and the same order.
– Less good color balance for subjects taken under special light conditions (e.g. sunset).
Note:
Before the learning phase for films is not terminated, the effect of the dominant
parameters (if standard value unequal 1,0) may be very weak, if not invisible. Their
effect gets normal once the learning phase is over.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-55

Parameters for artificial light detection

Negatives exposed in artificial light can be recognized and corrected by TFS.
Parameters for threshold values:

– Shots taken in a warm light, like the light of a standard bulb or candle light:
TL (Tungsten Light)
– Shots taken in fluorescent light
FL (Fluorescent Light)
Parameters for correction intensities:

– CTL (Correction Tungsten Light):
The strong yellow-reddish color cast is neutralized and the prints show a character
resembling daylight.
– CFL (Correction Fluorescent Light):
The green color cast is neutralized and the prints show a character resembling
daylight.
Setting range: see Table

Step width: 0.1
Function
Parameter Threshold value for the detection of Correction intensity Setting range
TL Tungsten light –4,0 - +4,0
CTL Tungsten light 0,0 - +1,3
FL Fluorescent light –4,0 - +4,0
CFL Fluorescent light 0,0 - +2,0
Note:
Negatives with color values above the threshold values are automatically color
corrected. The higher the value of TL / FL, the more shots are recognized as artificial
light shots. The higher the value of CTL / CFL, the more the color cast is corrected.
4-56 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Parameters for shift correction

If the color density curves of a film are not exactly parallel with respect to each other, the
so-called color shift will result. This means that a color dominates in the bright picture
areas and its complementary color dominates, in the dark area. A neutral gray wedge, for
example, would have the following color cast:
– Bright areas (highlights) Magenta
– Dark areas (shadows) Green 4
The shift behavior depends on the film type intensity and color spread) and on the film
processing.
The shift correction is determined individually for each negative, taking into account the
contrast and the subject. The color cast itself is not removed by the correction, it is true,
but as the neutral point is to the more important parts of the picture, the color cast is felt
less disturbing and the general impression of the picture is improved.
The parameter K influences the intensity of the shift correction.

Setting range: 0,0 – +4,0
Step width: 0.1
The impact of the color correction acts in proportion to the modification of the K value. If,
for example, the value is increased from 1.0 to 1.5, the shift correction is 50% stronger.
Note:
The preset shift correction has no effect on negatives without a shift effect as well as
on tungsten light shots.

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
TFS color
099
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-57

4.6.8.2 TFS Density

This parameter detects and selects certain subject groups so that their density can be
corrected.
Step width: 0.1
Lower values produce lighter prints, higher values produce darker prints in all subject
groups.
Parameter Function Setting range

DL 1 Flash shots (flash heads and bright subjects in front of a dark background) 0,0 – +2,0
DL 2 High-contrast backlight, snow or beach shots, landscapes with large parts of a 0,0 – +2,0
bright sky
DL 3 Low-contrast snow shots, gray water surface with an overcast sky, hazy visibility 0,0 – +1,4
etc.
DL 4 Persons with white clothes (e.g. wedding dress) on a green meadow, view through 0,0 – +2,0
trees, flowers with a green background etc.
DL 5 Subjects with a high percentage of blue 0,0 – +1,4
Note:
It is recommended to leave the standard setting 1 for all density parameters because
any modification of the standard values does not only result in an improvement in one
subject group, but also in a deterioration in other subject groups.

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
TFS density
100
4-58 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.9 Selector Logic (Color Negative)

The selector logic recognizes negatives that would produce waste prints. These negatives
are not printed.
Notes:
The button TFS Selector is only accessible after Selector logic has been activated.
The function should always be activated and should only be switched off for special
test purposes, e.g. test of mixed printing. 4

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
Activate Selector logic
079
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-59

4.6.9.1 TFS Selector

The selector logic recognizes negatives that would produce waste prints (e.g. due to
exposure failures). These negatives are not printed.
Step width: 0.1
Note:
Certain parts of the logic intervene even if the regulators have not been changed.
Parameter Selects the following categories Setting range Description

Under- Underexposed negatives 0.0 – +4.0 Towards 0.0 more underexposed
exposed negatives are printed
Towards +4.0 fewer underexposed
negatives are printed
Over- Overexposed negatives –4.0 – +4.0 Towards –4.0 more overexposed
exposed negatives are printed
Towards +4.0 fewer overexposed
negatives are printed
Fogged Fogged or partly blackened negatives –4.0 – +4.0 Towards -4.0 more negatives with
(e.g. light leaking into an opened exposure failures are printed
camera) Towards +4.0 fewer negatives with
exposure failures are printed
Splices Splices (e.g. Twin Check label) on films –4.0 – +4.0 Towards -4 more negatives with stickers
are printed
Towards +4 fewer negatives with
stickers are printed

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
TFS selector
If the button TFS Selector is not accessible,
activate Selector logic
098
Note:
Set the parameter Splices in such a way that the negative with the sticker (Twin Check
label) is just not printed.
4-60 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.9.2 Color/Density Corrections

The basic settings and general corrections can be entered under Color corrections for
under- and overexposures. They apply to all film types irrespective of the DX code.
If certain film types are not printed in a satisfying manner in spite of TFS, or if the results
do not correspond to the usual taste in the country, individual DX corrections can be
entered in addition for every defined DX code and they can be saved in the DX
configurations (see Color/density corrections (basic setting / Slope), DX code- 4
dependent on the next page). During printing they are added to the general corrections
when the respective DX code is detected.
Color/density corrections (basic setting / Slope), DX code-independent

The entered corrections apply to all film types.
Setting range: –9 - +9
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
The corrections are immediately effective and not only after a restart. They do not appear
in the back print.

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
Color corrections
Enter the correction values for Basic
setting, Overexposure and Underexposure
by means of the arrows:
101
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-61

Color/density corrections (basic setting / Slope), DX code-dependent

When the DX code is detected while a film is inserted, the entered corrections are added
to the general corrections during the printing.
Setting range: –9 - +9
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
The corrections are immediately effective and not only after a restart. They do not appear
in the back print.
– DX configurations – Edit the list

Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
DX corrections
Edit the configuration list:
Create a new configuration:
Edit the existing configuration:
Mark the configuration and Modify (see
next page)
Mark a configuration no longer needed
in the list and Delete
313
– Edit DX configuration
Settings
Machine settings
Production Balance
Color negative
DX corrections
New or Edit
Enter the DX code in the following format:
123-456
Enter the correction values for Basic
setting, Overexposure and Underexposure
by means of the arrows:
101_dx
4-62 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.7 Network Orders, Settings

File print
Defines an external storage location within the network to which the d-lab copies and
saves the image files entered in the file print mode.
Autosave
Defines an external storage location within the network to which the d-lab copies and
saves the image files locally for Autosave configurations when the Autosave function is 4
activated.
– Computer Name
Here the name or the IP address of the computer (Workstation) in the network is
indicated on which the data is to be saved.
– Name of the enabled directory
The release name is entered here; the actual directory name (released directory on the
specified Computer) is not used.
Note:
The d-lab.1 logs into the Remote computer as User dlab (small letters) with the
password dlab (small letters). To allow the logging into the Remote computer, the
above User must have been created on it with the password. The password dlab of the
User dlab must never expire!
Release must be on the PC on which the directory was created. No password protection
must have been activated.
Network orders
This parameter can be used to limit the incoming order volume:
– Maximum number of network orders:
This setting specifies the number of network orders that can be processed on the d-lab.
It covers the time span going from the entry up to the exit of the prints into the Sorter.
If the number of network orders rises above the preset value, the next network order is
fetched by the d-lab only when one of the network orders just being processed on the
d-lab is completely in the Sorter.
– Maximum number of images in the network orders:
Orders with a higher number of prints are not fetched by the d-lab.
d-workflow
Information about the PC (Server) on which the d-workflow Software is installed (with
User interface) or about the image box workstation with the Software d-bridge (without
user interface, running at the background). This Software (see PDM, further down) is
needed for network orders. It records incoming orders and connects them to the suitable
output device.
– Standard IP address for image box workstation: 192.168.1.120.
– Standard entry for Port-No. is 5001 or pfdfcom if the pertaining entry exists in the
file SERVICES.
Notes:
For information about the current version of d-workflow, please contact the service
engineer.
Address, Name and Port-No. must not contain line shifts, blanks or "\".
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-63

In network connections with several input devices, the d-workflow should be installed on
a PC that is only responsible for this task.
Prerequisites:
32-Bit Windows PC
Operating system Windows 2000
at least 700 MHz
at least128 MB RAM
at least 20 GByte hard disk
Explanation:
– PfDF (Photofinishing Data Format) is a standardized format for order data to be used in
networks.
– The PDM (PFDF Data Manager) – for AgfaPhoto the software d-workflow and d-bridge
– manages the order files. It saves digital orders (images and PFDF information) until
they are called by a receiving station.

Settings
Machine settings
Network orders
File print
Computer name
Enter the name or the IP address of a
workstation in the network
Name of the activated directory
Enter the release name
Autosave
Computer name
workstation in the network
Name of the activated directory
Enter the release name
040
Network orders
Maximum number of network orders
Enter the number
Maximum number of images for the
network preview
Enter the number
d-workflow
Address or Name
Enter the name or the IP address
Port-No.
Change the entry if you do not want to
accept the presetting.
4-64 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.8 Software
4.8.1 Ordering optional software components

Some optional programs are included already in the Main Software. They only have to be
enabled upon the purchase, e.g. Import of Combiprint layouts for the production of
Combiprints/Greeting cards/Passport prints.
4
Ordering optional programs:

Call up License ID: / Versions Info
(in the screen at the bottom left)
Order the option from AgfaPhoto,
indicate the license ID:
AgfaPhoto will supply an alphanumeric
key code
Install the software:
see 4.8.2 Updating the main software /
Enabling software components
063
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-65

4.8.2 Updating the main software / Enabling software components

Note:
First, save all settings on an external storage medium!
They can be loaded back into the machine after update / enable of the software.
Prerequisite:
1. Insert the CD
2. Touch Install Software:
Update and other Software components are displayed on the screen
(see figure on the next page).
3. If a CD not authorized by AgfaPhoto is inserted, insert the correct CD
and touch Load CD.
The screen offers various possibilities:

1. Update the main software to a higher version:
AgfaPhoto ships the CD with the new version together with textless instructions.
Once the user selected the Main Software and touched Install, the new version will
be installed and the software for the sub-assemblies will be updated. Then the system
enforces a new start.
If the machine fails to work correctly after this action, the user should just press Back
to preversion and confirm the safety check with OK to return to the status prior to
the update.
2. Enabling software components:
Some optional programs are included already in the Main Software. They only have to
be enabled upon purchase: see Software enable further down on this page.
CLICKRATE Production statistics
SCRATCH_CORR_SLIDE Scratch correction slide
FILEPRINT_ON_BOARD File print on d-lab.1
FILMONCD_ON_BOARD Burning CD on d-lab.1
INDEX Indexprint layouts
PASSPORT Combiprint layouts
RED_EYES_CORRECTION Red eyes correction
SLIDE_FILM_UNMOUNTED Slide film
Once the user selected the component and pressed Install, a safety prompt is
displayed asking if the settings have been saved on an external storage medium: If
No the operation is stopped; if Yes the input screen opens. Here the user must enter
the key received from AgfaPhoto. If several components were marked, all license keys
must be entered.
The software will then be enabled. After the forced new start, the pertaining buttons
and layout files are accessible.
4-66 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Save the settings on an external data carrier:

Settings
Save settings
see 4.21
Put the CD in the drive
Call up in the Start screen: 4

Settings
Machine settings
Install Software
The Main Software and possible components
are listed on the screen
If a CD not authorized by AgfaPhoto is
inserted, insert the correct CD and touch
Load CD.
058
CAUTION!
Mind the textless instructions attached to
the CD!
Update the Main Software:

Mark the line in the list
Install
Answer the question whether the
settings have been saved on an external
data carrier by Yes:
The input screen opens.
If the machine fails to work correctly
after this Update, just press Back to
preversion to return to the status prior
to the update
Enable the Software compontent(s):

Mark the component(s) in the list
Install
Answer the question whether the
settings have been saved on an extern
data carrier by Yes:
The input screen opens.
Enter the release key
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-67

4.9 Date / Time

Settings
Machine settings
Date/time
Date
Enter the system date
Time
Enter the system time
068
4-68 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.10 Other Settings

– Lab ID
Machine-specific identification number within a laboratory. Can be included in the
back print.
If the d-lab is integrated in a network to receive (network orders) or send orders
(Autosave), the entered Lab-ID must be the same number as the one in the program d-
workflow: d-lab.1 = 80.
Other d-lab.1 in the lab can get the numbers 81-89. 4
– Lab name
Freely selectable name. Can be included in the back print.
– Film length
Indication at which Film length the order end should be set automatically (preset: 400
mm).
– Order no.
– Manual
The order number displayed for the printing of an order can be changed by the
operator.
– Automatic
The order number is assigned by the machine.

Settings
Machine settings
Other settings
Lab name
Enter a name (40 characters at max.)
Lab ID
Enter a number (5 characters at max.)
Enter Film length
Order no.
Select Manual or Automatic
039
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-69

4.11 Product Configurations

The product configurations contain all settings required for the production of the desired
products (e.g. Prints 9x13 and Indexprint) from a film size (e.g. 135 Full frame) or a digital
image.
The product configurations are hierarchically structured. At the top, there are the order
configurations that combine under one name all products to be produced for a complete
order (prints, Indexprints, Autosave).
Order configurations are a combination of sub-configurations (see 6. to 8.) and product
configurations (see 2. to 5.):
1. Order
2. Print size
3. Autosave
4. Indexprint
5. Combiprint
6. Correction
7. Back print
8. Front print
9. Easy
The sub-configurations and partial products (Print, CD / Internet Upload, Indexprint,
Combiprint) must therefore be created first. A sub-configuration can be used in any number
of order configurations. The number of single partial products ordered by the customer is
indicated in the respective order configuration.
In the Easy mode (see 9.) only the order configurations selected under Easy are offered.
Note:
See 4.11.1 Notes about Creation, Modification and Deletion of Configurations.
All configurations will be described in detail later on.

Settings
Product config.
The next screen is opened (see next page).
_m2
4-70 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Touch the desired button:

The corresponding configuration list is
opened.
004
4.11.1 Notes about the Creation, Modification and Deletion of Configurations

When touching a configuration type, e.g. Correction, almost always a list is opened at
first that shows the already existing configurations of the selected type, e.g. all correction
configurations.
The standard configuration for the selected film mask appears in the first place of each
list. All other configurations can be sorted by the user in the order in which they should
be displayed in the selection boxes.
Note:
Editing is similar for the various configuration lists. For this reason, we first give a
general description of the procedure, followed by a detailed description of the
individual configuration screens.
Configuration names:
The following prerequisites hold for the entry of configuration names:
max. 30 positions
Admissible special characters: - . : , ; + ! ? = ( ) _ / & % $ and blanks
Quotation marks are not allowed: "
Used by:
After a configuration has been marked, it is indicated here to which configurations is was
connected.
Delete:
If orders are open, configurations cannot be deleted, e.g. film processing and print orders
were not exited completely from the machine.
A configuration used in a parent configuration cannot be deleted. This concerns:
– Sub-configurations in order configurations and
– Order configurations in Packages
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-71

Select a film mask:

1. Standard, IX240 or Digital
If existing, appropriate configurations are
shown in the list. If the list contains more
entries than can be displayed, arrows appear
for scrolling.

1. New
The next screen is opened. Fields for which
there are presettings show the preset values.
2. Enter the settings
3. Touch Save as and enter a meaningful name
in the input screen
303 Creating a new configuration based on an

existing one:
Example: Configuration list
1. Mark a similar configuration in the list
2. Touch Modify and in the next screen, modify
the settings that differ from the basic
configuration
3. Touch Save as and enter a new name
Modify a configuration:
1. Touch the configuration in the list
2. Touch Modify and change the settings in the
next screen
3. Touch Save
Delete a configuration:
1. Mark the name in the list
2. Touch Delete
023 Sort configurations:

Example: Configuration screen 1. Mark the name in the list
2. Shift the entry up or down in the list, using
the arrows
Close the list screen:

1. Touch Back
4-72 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.12 Print Sizes

Film mask:
After the film mask has been selected, the corresponding print sizes are shown in the list.
Used by:
When a print size is marked, it is shown here in which print configurations it is used.
4
delivered.
Cut length
Name Film masks Film type Paper width Back print
Classic High Vision Panorama
10x15 135 FF CN 102 Glossy 152 152 305 Backprint
(102 glossy) Standard
IX 240 IX 240 CN 102 Glossy 152 178 290 Backprint
(102 glossy) IX240
IX 240 IX 240 CN 89 Glossy 127 152 254 Backprint
(89 glossy) IX240
PrintConfig Digital Digital 102 Glossy 152 152 152 Backprint
Digital Digital
PrintConfig Slide Slide 102 Glossy 152 0 0 Backprint
Slide Standard
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-73

4.12.2 Print Sizes – Edit the List

Settings
Product config.
Print size
Select Film mask:
135 FF
IX240 or
Slide
Digital
Mark the configuration and touch
Modify (see Explanation of the next
316 screen on the next page)
Sort the configurations in the list:
Select the name in the list and press
the arrows to shift the entry up or down
in the list
Mark a configuration not needed any
Note about the Cut length in the next screens:
The Cut length corresponds to the aspect ratio of the sizes High Vision, Classic and
Panorama and the paper width. For two authorized options, the cut length corresponds
to the shorter side. The cut lengths are entered directly.
Admissible: 82 – 305 mm.

For paper widths smaller than 110 mm, the minimum cut length is 110 mm.
4-74 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.12.2.1 Editing print size for film mask 135FF

Two different print sizes can be selected by the amateur on a film 135: Classic and
Panorama. The recorded data is read on the d-lab and the coded size is printed from each
negative. Prerequisite for this is the correct setting of Adjust x to.
The following configurations can be created:

– Printing of negatives acc. to the camera setting during photographing: 4
Classic on Classic and Panorama on Panorama (mixed configuration)
– Printing of negatives, the camera setting being ignored:
– Printing of the sizes C and P on Classic
– Printing of the sizes C and P on Panorama
Note:
It is not the Full Frame that is exposed if Panorama is set for photographing with a
films 135: parts of the negative are blanked out. Panorama detection must be
activated under Settings > Machine settings > Production Balance so that the
prints are printed correctly.
Standard:
A print size defined as standard is shown in the first position in the corresponding lists.

Settings
Product config.
Print size
New or Modify
Film mask: 135FF
Select Film type:
Color negative or B/W
Activate or deactivate Standard
Back print, Correction and Front print:
Select a configuration or Off.
Border / Border color:
If a border is desired, select the border width
and touch Border color
In the next screen (see 4.12.3) select
a color and OK or
022_135
Touch New and define a new color in
the next screen (see 4.12.4), touch 2x
OK.
Paper config., Cut length, Adjust to:
Select a paper configuration, a cut length
and the type of adjustment for each one of
the sizes Classic and Panorama.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-75

4.12.2.2 Editing the print size for film mask IX240

Three different print sizes can be selected by the amateur on a film IX240: High Vision,
Classic and Panorama. The selected size is saved by optical or by magnetic means on the
pertaining negative. The saved data is read on the d-lab and the coded size is produced
from each negative. Prerequisite is the correct setting of Adjust x to (see next page).
Note:
Always the APS Full Frame is exposed on the film, no matter which aspect ratio was
selected on the camera. For this reason, the IX204 coding of the camera can be
ignored.
The following configurations can be created:

– Printing of negatives acc. to the camera setting during photographing:
Classic on Classic and Panorama on Panorama (mixed configuration)
– Printing of negatives, the camera setting being ignored:
– Printing of the sizes H, C and P on High Vision
– Printing of the sizes H, C and P on Classic
– Printing of the sizes H, C and P on Panorama
See Print sizes and aspect ratios in the following illustration.
Standard:
A print size defined as standard is shown in the first position in the corresponding lists.
Print sizes Aspect ratio

High Vision 16:9
Classic 3:2
Panorama 1:3
4-76 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


Settings
Product config.
Print size
New or Modify
Film mask: IX240
Film type: 4
Only Color negative is possible
a color and OK or
022_ix240
OK.
Paper config., Cut length, Adjust to:
Select a paper configuration, a cut length
and the type of adjustment for each one of
the sizes Classic, High Vision and Panorama.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-77

4.12.2.3 Editing the print size for the slide film mask
Settings
Product config.
Print size
New or Modify
Film mask: Slide
Film type:
only Slide is possible
a color and OK or
022_dia
OK.
Paper config. and Cut length:
Select a paper configuration and a cut
length for the size Classic
4-78 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.12.2.4 Editing the print size for the Digital film mask
Fit-and-fill method:
The fit-and-fill method decides about how the image information is fitted to the selected
print size in case the aspect rations of the frame and the size do not match. There are four
fit-and-fill methods:
1. When the frame is fitted to the paper, the entire image information is used. As the
cut length is taken into consideration, white borders may appear on the print. 4
2. When prints are filled, the image information is used for the full size. As the cut
length is taken into consideration, part of the image information may not be printed
(image crop).
3. When fitting the shorter side (to the paper width), the complete image information
is printed format-filling.
4. When fitting the longer side (to the paper width), the complete image information
is printed format-filling. A white border appears only if the minimum cut length is not
reached.
3003_105
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-79


Settings
Product config.
Print size
New or Modify
Film mask: Digital
Film type:
Only Digital is possible
a color and OK or
022_digi
OK.
Adjust Paper config., Cut length: Select
the paper configuration and the cut length
for the Classic size
Fit the frame to the paper
Fill print size
Fit: Shorter side
Fit: Longer side
Select the fit-and-fill method
Reproduction:
see 4.12.2.5 Reproduction.
4-80 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.12.2.5 Reproduction
Reproduction means:
– The size of the original image is kept if the resolution corresponds to the values
indicated below.
– All functions of the AgfaPhoto image enhancement are switched off (no dTFS, no
sharpening, no scaling) so that the Printer result corresponds exactly to the original.
4
Application cases:
– For all file prints to be exposed on the d-lab.1 by means of output profiles. Output
profiles must be used for the image file in external image editing programs (like e.g.
Photoshop >6.0).
A topic output profile for the d-lab.1 (generic mean value profile) can be downloaded
from the AgfaPhoto Homepage.
– Originals whose size should be preserved, e.g. business cards or CD cases.
– Pictures created with programs such as Photoshop or exposures falsified artistically.
Resolution of the image files:

Depending on the output size, the d-lab.1 exposes with two different resolutions:
– Print size up to 152 x 203 mm: Resolution 384 dpi
– Print size larger than 152 x 203 mm: Resolution 261 dpi
To get a (1:1) copy of the original, the resolution of the image file must be adjusted to the
output format.
This may be done prior to the scanning of the original, or afterwards for digital exposures
or images scanned already by means of an image editing program.
Example:
An image should be output of the size 70 x 110 mm.
For the output of the print size 102x152 a resolution of 384 dpi is set.
For the output of the print 203x305 a resolution of 261 dpi is set.
In both cases, the image of the size 70 x 110 mm is exposed in the middle of the paper.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-81

Reproductions are obtained with configurations in which the Reproduce function is

activated.

Settings
Product config.
Print size
New or Modify
Film mask: Digital
Film type:
Only Digital is possible
Back print:
Activate Reproduce
022_repro
4-82 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.12.3 Selecting a Color

Settings
Product config.
Print size
New or Modify
Border color
4
Touch the desired color and close the screen
with OK or
Touch New to define a color yourself
080
Note:
User-defined colors are displayed in the bottom line. In the above example, one color
was defined. If other colors are defined, the colors existing already are shifted to the
right. When the column has eight colors, the color on the right edge is omitted.
4.12.4 Defining a new Color

Settings
Product config.
Print size
New or Modify
Border color
New
Red, Green, Blue:
Enter the color portion to create the desired
color
Close the screen with OK:
The Select color screen is displayed again.
See Note on this page.
087
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-83

4.13 Correction Configurations
4.13.1 Correction Configurations– Edit the list

The options offered by the d-lab to improve the image can be combined, named and
saved in special configurations, e.g. for certain subject groups (portraits, passport).
Note con. slides:

These is no Production Balance for slides. They must be corrected manually (correction
configurations for color/density corrections).
The corrections entered under Production Balance / Color negative have not effect
on the slide production.
Used by:
When a configuration is marked, it is shown in which product configurations it is used.

Settings
Product config.
Correction
Select Film type:
After a film type has been selected, the
corresponding configurations are displayed.
next page)
303 Sort the configurations in the list:
in the list
4-84 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.13.2 Editing a Correction Configuration

For the effect of the different corrections see 4.6 Production Balance.
These corrections appear in the back print if they are selected for the back print text.
Red-eyes and Portrait logic: Options in both functions:

– Yes = always activated
4
– No = deactivated; however, the function can be switched on in the screen Change
configuration and in Preview.
– Standard = general settings are taken over

Settings
Product config.
Correction
New or Modify
Red-eyes and Portrait logic:
Select Yes, No, or Standard.
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Density
Negative values: left arrow
Positive values: right arrow
can be used to go to other corrections
023
(see next screen)
Sharpness – Edges
SAT saturation
Sharpness – Grains
Gradation
(see next screen)
023_2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-85

ACT (Surfaces)
DCT (Details)
Brightness: Shadows
(see next screen)
023_3
023_5
Notes con. slides:

Instead of ACT (Surfaces) LCT (Luminance contrast)
Instead of DCT (Details) LDT (Luminance density)
See 4.13.2.1 on the next page
4-86 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.13.2.1 Luminance contrast and luminance density for slides

Note:
The parameters LCT and LDT do not influence the color saturation.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
4
Effect of LCT:
Contrast is reduce (the picture gets softer).
Contrast is increased (the picture gets harsher).
Effect of LDT:
The picture gets darker.
The picture gets lighter.
Effect for Gradation.

The parameter acts as if softer or harder paper was used.
Note:
In contrast to color negatives, modifications of the gradation cause color changes for
slides. The intensity of the effect varies between that of the parameters LCT (little
influence on color saturation) and SAT (change of the color saturation).
Prints appear harsher and more colorful
Prints appear softer and flatter, e.g. "washed-out" picture parts, like flashlight on
cheeks, are reduced, black areas appear less extreme.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-87

4.14 Back Print Configuration

delivered.
Name Film mask Parameter

Backprint Standard Order number / Negative number / Correction / Date / Time
Standard
Backprint IX 240 FID number / Negative number / Correction / Date / Time
IX 240
Backprint Digital Order number / File name / Correction / Date / Time
Digital
4.14.2 Back Print Configuration – Edit the List

Film mask:
The desired category is selected here:
Film size Print Indexprint

135 Standard Indexprint
IX240 IX240 IX240 Index
Digital Digital Indexprint
List:
The list always indicates only the configurations that correspond to the selected filter. The
list can be scrolled with the arrow keys.
Used by:
When a configuration is marked, the displays shows the product configurations in which it
is used.
4-88 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


Settings
Product config.
Back print
Select Film mask:
Standard
IX240
Digital 4
Indexprint
IX240 Index
300 Explanation of the next screen on the
next page)
in the list
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-89

4.14.3 Editing a Back Print Configuration

Additional parameters (IX240 film data and IX240 film text) are available in the list of the
configurations for IX240 (APS); see 4.14.3.1ff on the next pages.
The offered lists are reduced for configurations for Indexprint – Indexprint (for 135 and
Digital) and IX240 Index.
4.14.3.1 Parameters for the back print (film mask-dependent)

135 (Standard) IX240 Digital
Parameter Print Index Print Index Print Index Length
Order no. x x x x x x 3
Crop size x x x 3
Crop position x x x 7
DX code x x — 7
Free text x x x x x x open
Corrections x x x 10
Lab ID x x x x x x see Other
Lab name x x x x x x settings
Negative number x x — 3
File name — — — — x 21
Number of prints x x x x x x 3
Print date x x x x x x 8
Print time x x x x x x 5
See also 4.14.3.2 / — — — APS FID; — — —
4.14.3.3 No. of Prints
H, C and P
4-90 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

The preview of the back print and the residual length are refreshed after every
modification. Up to 80 characters are printed. If the total length of 80 characters is
exceeded, the number of excess characters is shown with a minus sign under Residual
length, e.g. –8.

Settings 4
Product config.
Back print
New or Modify
Compose the back print text from the
parameters of the offered list (on the left)
and a free text:
Add or remove parameters:
If Free text is selected, touch this field
and enter the text
Sort the selection list with :
This has an impact on the order in the back
print (see preview at the bottom left in
the figure)
025
Notes regarding certain parameters:

– Print date and Print time are printed in the formats selected under Machine
settings > User interface.
– Corrections prints corrections of the configuration plus manual corrections.
– As there are only 10 positions in all available in the back print for Color/density
corrections (YMCD) as well as for Sharpness – edges, SAT saturation, Sharpness –
grains, Gradation, ACT (Surfaces) and DCT (Details), shortcuts must be used:
-9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9
I H G F E D C B A N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Note:
Values between -99 and +99 can be entered. Values greater than -9/+9 cannot be
output in the back print.
Examples:
Value +25 Magenta: in the back print 9 (corresponds to correction +9)
Value -25 Magenta: in the back print I (corresponds to correction -9)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-91

4.14.3.2 IX240 film coding

Optical / magnetic codes on the film are used to record print sizes (High Vision, Classic,
Panorama) and special back print texts.
Codings:
1. Two magnetic tracks on which the amateur
can save data in the APS camera
Superior data for photofinishing 2. Two magnetic tracks on which the
Magnetic image data for photofinishing Photofinisher can modify or add production-
relevant data
Optical image data of the manufacturer
Magnetic camera image data of the customer 3. Film tip to record film-specific information
Optical camera image data of the customer 4. Data that only applies to one negative
Panorama (image title, aspect ratio, exposure data) is
Classic recorded in the so-called negative data area.
__ High Vision
Superior optical data of the camera
(exposure conditions, e.g. flash)
Superior magnetic data of the camera
(exposure conditions, e.g. flash)
Superior optical data of the manufacturer
4.14.3.3 IX240 back print

On an IX240 film, the first 35 positions are predefined for the film, the date and the
time; they cannot be influenced (film data). This also holds for the characters 41 to 80
which the amateur selects on the camera (film text).
This data can be included in the back print. It is offered when a back print configuration is
created for the film mask IX240.
4-92 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.15 Front Print Configurations
4.15.1 Front Print Configurations – Edit the List

These configurations can be used to expose free texts with a colored or transparent
background on the front of the print.
List: 4
In case not all entries can be shown at the same time, arrows for scrolling will appear on
the right side of the list.
Used by:
After a configuration has been marked, the display shows here in which production
configurations it is used.

Settings
Product config.
Front print
Creating a new configuration:
Mark the configuration and touch
Modify (see Explanation of the next
screen on the next page)
in the list
301 Mark a configuration not needed any
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-93

4.15.2 Editing the Front Print Configuration

Settings
Product config.
Front print
New or Modify
Select Font, Letter size and Position
Touch Free text:
The keyboard screen is opened. Enter the
desired text.
Touch Font color:
Select a color in the next screen (see
4.12.3) and OK or
Touch New, define a new color in the
next screen (see 4.12.4), touch 2x
OK.
026 Define the background:
Activate Transparent background or
Touch Background color and select or
define a color (see 4.12.3) and 4.12.4)
4-94 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.16 Indexprint Configurations
4.16.1 Indexprint Configurations – Edit the List

Definition of Indexprint sizes.
Le Layouts matching the selected Film mask are listed.
4
Prerequisites:
Only layouts that have been imported already can be used in Indexprint configurations.
Only layouts can be imported that were created with the AGFA IP Layout Software. The
file extension of these layout originals correspond to the film size in use, e.g. .135,
.240, .dig (digital). See also 4.5.2 Importing Indexprint Layouts / Combiprint
Layouts.

Settings
Product config.
Indexprint
Select Film mask
135FF
IX240
Slide
Digital
304 next page)
in the list
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-95

4.16.1.1 Editing the Indexprint configuration

The film type depends on the film mask selected in the previous screen. A selection is
only possible for the film mask 135FF; for all other film masks there is only one setting:
Film mask Film type

135FF Color negative or
B/W
IX240 Color negative
Slide Slide
Digital Digital
Only those Layouts are available that match the previously selected film mask
Under Paper config. all paper configurations with a paper width corresponding to the
length of one side of the layout can be selected.
The configurations matching the selected film mask are shown under Back print.
Layout Info:
– Number of frames:
Indicates how many thumbnails can appear on one Indexprint (standard: 42). Each
Indexprint layout offers several options, e.g. 20, 30, 42. From these options, the
machine automatically selects the suitable layout for each order in accordance with
the number of frames.
– Paper width / cut length;
Are calculated from the selected layout.

Settings
Product config.
Indexprint
New or Modify
Select Film type under Film mask 135FF:
Color negative, B/W or Slide
Select Layout
Select Paper config.
Back print and Correction:
Select a configuration or Off
321
4-96 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


The following layouts are supplied with the machine as standard and can be used as basis
for own layouts.
Settings for IPLayout Software
Film Size Paper width Paper length

Paper
Grid
Maximum
Resolution 4
Name width Layout
type
Inch mm Inch mm Inch mm 1/10 Inch H,V Width Length dpi
135 AGFA_35x50.135 3,5x50 9x13 3,5 89 5 127 35 1,1 1330 1900 380
AGFA_40x60.135 4x6 10x15 4 102 6 152 40 1,1 1520 2280 380
AGFA_50x70.135 5x7 13x18 5 127 7 178 50 1,1 1900 2660 380
AGFA_60x80.135 6x8 15x20 6 152 8 203 60 1,1 2280 3040 380
AGFA_60x8.25.135 6x8,25 15x21 6 152 8,25 210 60 1,1 1560 2145 260
AGFA_80x60.135 8x6 20x15 8 203 6 152 60 1,1 1560 2080 260
AGFA_80x120.135 8x12 20x30 8 203 12 305 80 1,1 2080 3120 260
Agfa_CD_50x50.135 5x5 12x12 5 127 4,75 121 50 1,1 1900 1805 380
240 AGFA_35x60.240 3,5x6 9x15 3,5 89 6 152 35 1,1 1330 2280 380
AGFA_40x70.240 4x7 10x18 4 102 7 178 40 1,1 1520 2660 380
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-97

4.17 Combiprint Configurations
4.17.1 Combiprint Configurations – Edit the List

Definition of Combiprint sizes. :
Configurations for multiprinting an image on a sheet in different sizes or in the same size
(passport).
The layouts matching the selected film mask are indicated.
Prerequisites:
Only layouts that have been imported already can be used in Combiprint
configurations. Only layouts can be imported that were created with the AGFA IP
Layout Software. The file extension of these layout originals is .pas. See also 4.5.2
Importing Indexprint Layouts / Combiprint Layouts.

Settings
Product config.
Combiprint
Select a film mask:
135FF
IX240
Slide
Digital
Edit the configuration:
319 next page)
4-98 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.17.1.1 Editing the Combiprint configuration

The film type depends on the film mask selected in the previous screen. A selection is
only possible for the film mask 135FF; for all other film masks there is only one setting:
Film mask Film type

135FF Color negative or
4
B/W
Slide Slide
Digital Digital
Only those layouts are available that match the previously selected film mask
Under Paper config. all paper configurations with a paper width corresponding to the
length of one side of the layout can be selected.
The configurations matching the selected film mask are offered under Back print.
Layout texts:
The Customer texts (IPLayout Software) can be changed again on d-lab.1 (as of Version
3.xx) and image box workstation (as of Version 3.xx); however, only those that were
inserted in the current layout!
Layout-Info:
Paper width / cut length;
Are calculated from the selected layout.

Settings
Product config.
Combiprint
New or Modify
Select Film type under Film mask 135FF:
Select Layout
Touch Edit layout texts if you want to
change them:
A follow-up screen opens, see next page
Back print and Correction:
Select a configuration or Off
320 (027_2)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-99

Select the respective text in the Layout

texts screen and change it (keyboard screen
opens).
086
The layout texts may also be changed during
order processing in the Standard or Preview
screens:
Press Change configuration.

Press Layout texts.
4-100 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.18 Easy Configurations

1. Here, the configurations are selected that are offered for selection in the Easy print
mode:
– When inserting films into the film feeder (Printing)
– When placing film magazines in the d-lab.1 (film processing and printing of the
film sizes 135 and IX240)
4
2. Apart from this, the method is defined acc. to which the d-lab.1 / netlab.1 should
fetch network orders in the Easy mode:
– Allowing or refusing the fetching of network orders in the Easy mode.
– If network orders are to be accepted, the desired method must be selected.
4.18.1 Allowing / refusing the Handling of Network Orders in the Easy Mode
Settings
Product config.
Easy
Touch the following buttons one after the
other and select the configurations for the
Easy print mode. A subsequent window is
opened each time, see 4.18.2 on the next
page.
With film processing
Scan 135 FF
Scan IX240
Network orders:
Allowing / refusing the fetching:
110 Activate Accept orders:
The buttons Accept all or For available
paper only are displayed. Activate the
desired function.
Deactivate Accept orders:
The buttons for the order selection
disappear.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-101

4.18.2 Allocating Configurations for the Easy Mode

Touching the buttons With film processing, Scan 135 FF or Scan IX240 will open the
same window, but with different titles:
Processing 135 FF, Scan 135 FF or Scan IX240.
The procedure is identical in these screens. It is therefore only described by giving the
example of the configuration selection for film processing with printing. In the Easy mode,
the configurations are shown in the order defined here.

Settings
Product config.
Easy
With film processing, Scan 135 FF or
Scan IX240
111_a
Select the desired configurations one after
the other in the pulldown menus:
The partial products belonging to the current
(marked) configuration are displayed under
Selected configurations; in the opposite
example, Print size and Indexprint.
111_b
4-102 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.19 Autosave Configurations

Autosave configurations are used to copy image files of an order to data carriers or
transmit them to other machines for further handling. All scanned negatives/slides are
saved, as well as versions of an image that may have been added in the preview.
Note:
For films IX240, always the whole negative content is saved, independent of the set
PAR (Print Aspect Ratio = H, C or P) to avoid image losses. As a consequence, the 4
information about the size set on the camera is lost, but can be restored for Reorders
by selecting the appropriate print size.
A directory is created for each order on the selected data carrier:
Name of the directory = order number_date/time, e.g.: 001_0208051130.
Date/time format in the example JJMMTTSSMM (year month day hours minutes)
The files copied to this directory are named as follows:
Filename_internal image number.format, e.g.: Testprint_0001.bmp
For negatives the DX code is transmitted to the d-workflow as part of the file name:
File name = DX code_consecutive number

delivered.
Name Film mask Film type Type Resolution File format Use
Film on CD 135 FF CN d-workflow 2460x1640 jpg CD
high quality
Film on CD Digital Digital d-workflow 2460x1640 jpg CD
high quality
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-103

4.19.2 Autosave Configurations– Edit the List

Settings
Product config.
Autosave
Select the film mask:
135FF, IX240, Slide or Digital
next page)
302 the arrows to shift the entry up or down
in the list
4.19.3 Editing Autosave Configuration

Prerequisites:
The required data (e.g. enabled directory, address of the PCs on which d-workflow is
installed) must have been entered already under Settings > Machine settings >
Network orders.
Note:
Autosave local and d-workflow exclude each other.
Identical settings for Autosave local and d-workflow:

– Resolution (in pixels):
Different resolutions are offered.
– File format:
bmp or
jpg with different compression factors (high, middle, low)
Different settings for Autosave local and d-workflow:

– Autosave local
– Drive: Remote or Drive: CD local
Selection of an external or local storage target
– Copy Image Viewer
The Viewer program to view the orders / images on a finished CD can only be
activated for the drive selection: CD local.
4-104 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

– d-workflow
– Internet Upload, Any and/or CD
When one or several options (application purpose) are marked, the image files are
identified in the pertaining order file. This identification allows automatic
continuation of the files on the devices connected to d-workflow or d-bridge, e.g.
burning of a CD on the image box workstation of d-lab.1 allrounder 2.
4
Settings
Autosave
Select film mask
New or Modify
Select Film type
Select Correction configuration
Activate Autosave local or d-workflow (see
below)
When Autosave local is activated:

Select Resolution
Select File format
029 Activate Drive: Remote or Drive: CD local
Activate Copy Image Viewer if required.
When d-workflow is activated:

Select Resolution
Select File format
Activate Internet Upload, Any and/or CD
029_2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-105

4.20 Order Configurations

Prerequisite:
As the order configurations has to have access to the sub-configurations and the partial
products, the latter must have been created before.
All partial products to be created (Prints, Autosave, Indexprint, Combiprint) are defined in
the order configurations and combined under a name. An order is always only limited to
one film mask and one film type, i.e. scanned negatives and scanned slides, for example,
cannot be mixed within one and the same order.
Each order configuration may include any number of different sub-configurations for
partial products. The number ordered by the customer can be entered separately for each
partial product (1 is preset).
The user can impose a uniform correction configuration for all partial products of an order
configuration, which will then replace the data of the sub-configurations. A uniform back
print configuration can be imposed as well.
Note con. IX240 Autocopies:

The number of prints set by the amateur upon photographing is not used by the d-lab.1.
It must therefore be entered on the d-lab.1 – just like for all other film sizes.
4-106 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


delivered.
Order configuration Film mask Film type Product configurations

Name (paper width) Print Autosave Index 4
10x15 + Index + CD 135 CN 10x15 Film on CD Index 10x15
(102 glossy) (102 glossy) (102 glossy)
10x15 + Index 135 CN 10x15 — Index 10x15
IX 240 + Index + CD IX240 CN IX 240 Film on CD Index 9x15
IX 240 + Index + CD IX240 CN IX 240 Film on CD Index 10x18
IX 240 + Index IX240 CN IX 240 — Index 9x15
IX 240 + Index IX240 CN IX 240 — Index 10x18
OrderConfigDigital Digital Digital — — —
Slide Slide Slide — — —
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-107

4.20.2 Order Configurations – Edit the List

Film mask:
After the film mask has been selected, appropriate existing configurations are entered
into the list.
Film type:
In the following screen, the order of the configurations can be defined for each film mask
in which they are offered later on for selection. This is only possible if All is selected
under film type.
New:
The creation of a new configuration is only possible for the indication of one film type, not
for the selection All.
Film mask Film type

135FF, IX240, slide All
135FF Color negative or B/W
Slide Slide
Digital Digital

Settings
Product config.
Order
Select Film mask
Select Film type
next page)
318 Select the name in the list and press
in the list
4-108 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.20.3 Editing the Order Configuration
4.20.3.1 Selecting a configuration type

Config. type
The configuration type can only be set for the creation of a new order configuration; the
type cannot be changed with Modify. The configuration types offer the following partial
products: 4
– Print
Used to print the prints of an order.
– Autosave
Used to save the image files of an order on CD or transmit them to other machines for
further handling.
– Indexprint
Used to print an Indexprint for all prints of an order.
– Combiprint
Used to print Combiprints from all frames of an order.

Settings
Product config.
Order
New or Modify
Select Config. type
konf-typ
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-109

4.20.3.2 Selecting sub-configurations

The configuration is clearly defined by the film mask and the configuration name.
Consequences:
1. The same configuration names can be used for several film masks.
2. Different configuration names are necessary if the same film mask is used in the
configurations and only the film types are different.
3. The order of the configurations can be defined independent of the film types.
Number:
The number can be entered for each selected partial product, independent of the other
partial products. No entry is necessary if the number ordered by the customer is 1
(standard setting).
Preview:
If an order configuration is selected for printing an order in which the preview is activated,
the single frames of the order are shown in the preview.
Standard:
For each film mask a product configuration of the type Print, Autosave, Indexprint and
Combiprint can be selected as standard configuration. It is then always displayed in the
1st position everywhere where a configuration selection is possible.

Settings
Product config.
Order
New or Modify
Activate or deactivate Preview
Select Config. type Print:
Mark the configuration in the left list
and send it to the selection list (right)
with the arrow key
If necessary, enter the Number
104_1
4-110 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Select Config. type Autosave:

with the arrow key
4
104_2
Select Config. type Index:
with the arrow key
104_3
Select Config. type Combiprint:
with the arrow key
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-111

4.21 Saving Settings and Configurations

Save settings:
– After the first setting into operation of the machine and the creation of customer
configurations.
– After major modifications of the settings and/or configurations.
– At regular intervals, e.g. after PBL.
– Prior to the installation of a Software Updates.
This is recommended as the Backup (Load settings) ) can only be restored with the
same Software version, otherwise the data base may get destroyed. In case of doubt,
check the software version with and Info Version.
– To port configurations to other d-labs.
Lists:
All files of the drive / directory are listed on the left; existing backup files are listed on
the right.
Note:
The settings can be saved on the hard disk.
To be on the save side, the settings should be saved on an external data carrier (CD) at
regular intervals.
Save settings:
Settings
Save settings
Touch the drive symbol for the hard disk or
the CD and select a directory, if necessary
Return to the superior directory with in
case of need.
Touch Save or Save as and enter a name
021
4-112 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.22 Loading Settings and Configurations

Note:
Product configurations created on one d-lab.1 can be saved on a CD and copied to
another d-lab.1. Make sure when loading that only Product config. are activated and
loaded.
4
Action Target device for Loading Machine settings Product config. Pricing
Backup d-lab.1 / netlab.1 on which the Activate Activate
Backup was created No function at
present
Port configurations Other d-lab.1 / netlab.1 Deactivate Activate
First, the question comes up asking whether the configurations should really be
overwritten. Apart from this, the user can select what should be done with the
configurations that were created after the creation of the Backup data base (save with the
settings): The new configurations are either deleted or kept when the Backup is loaded.

Settings
Load settings
Mark Machine settings and/or Product
config.
Insert a CD if required
Touch the drive symbol for Hard disk or CD
Select a directory if required
Return to the superior directory with if
required.
Select a file name
Touch Load
If required, answer the query about the
handling of newly created configurations
030
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 4-113

4-114 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Tests
5 Tests
The following tests should be used to set up the machine for optimum results. The
operators must run these tests regularly before and during production to ensure a uniform
high quality of the production.
– PBL (Paper Balance) compensates for the differences of the various paper types and
width, and it ensures uniform color reproduction on all paper emulsions in use.;
see Ö 5.1.2.3 Executing the PBL (Paper Balance)
– MBL (Master Balance) compensates for minor fluctuations of the chemicals;
see Ö 5.1.2.2 Executing the MBL (Master Balance)
5
– Pico (Pixel correction) for the scanner calibration;
see Ö 5.2 Scanner Calibration
– Control strip, to check the chemicals in the Film Processor and Paper Processor
see Ö Checking the film process / Paper process in Chapter 10
– Service functions can only be called up if the user has logged in as Service user. The
Service functions are described in the folder Repair.
– Log files => CD: Log files can be burnt on CD.
All the above tests can be called up via the main

menu Test.
m3
This chapter describes the test cases and possible special cases, and it also explains
which test must be carried out when.
This is followed by a description of the test procedures.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 5-1

Tests d-lab.1 family: Operation
5.1 Test Prints: MBL (Master Balance) and PBL (Paper Balance)
Prior to production start the machine must be calibrated. Good print results are only
possible in case of optimum adjustment, i.e. exposure, used paper, and paper process are
ideally adapted. The result of successful calibration is the neutral appearance of the
grayscale on the last printed test print.
We differentiate two types of test prints. They are printed from digital test images:
1. PBL test (Paperbalance)
The calibration only applies to the paper on which the PBL test was printed. Therefore
this test must be printed for each paper used in the laboratory for production. The
machines detects the papers (widths and surface) by the paper magazine code as well
as the defined paper configurations; see Ö Defining Paper Configurations in Chapter 4.
2. MBL test (Masterbalance)
The MBL test influences all paper configurations, although it must only be carried out
for the most frequently used paper (master paper) in the laboratory. All other papers
are adapted based on the differences between last and current MBL. For a definition of
the Master paper see Ö Printer Settings in Chapter 4.
Note:
PBL and MBL tests do not determine the print quality with respect to color. This is
determined by the Production Balance, see Chapter 4.
5.1.1 Conditions for Executing an MBL and PBL

Prerequisites:
– There must be enough paper in the magazine for both tests
(display not <5 m for MBL).
– Chemical solutions must be on nominal temperature.
– Chemicals are in tolerance; see Ö Paper Processor: Process check
in Chapter 10.
5-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

5.1.2 Calibrating the Machine after First Operation or after New Software Installation
5.1.2.1 Printing a PBL for the master paper

Test
Start PBL
Select paper configuration:
Select master paper in the list
Use configuration:
5
Select none (= new calibration)
Press PBL to start the test.
After a successful PBL define this paper as
master paper under Settings > Machine
settings > Printer. It will then be used for
MBLs.
075
5.1.2.2 Printing an MBL

Conditions:
PBL for master paper has been executed and this paper has been defined as master
paper.
How often the MBL should be repeated if the values after the 1st try are out of
tolerance is set up under Settings > Machine settings > Printer (number of retries
1-10).
For the calibration described below either predefined paper configurations can be used
(rename if necessary) or new configurations can be defined (see Ö Chapter 4).
If the master paper is not inserted when an MBL is started, the operator is prompted to
insert the master paper.
An info screen pops up during the test.
Print an MBL:
Test (in the Start screen)
Start MBL
Notes:
Afterwards a PBL must be printed for all other papers used in the laboratory, see Ö
5.1.2.3 Printing a PBL for all other papers on the following page.
To keep the production stable the MBL test must be printed once per day before
starting production; see Ö 5.1.3 Daily Calibration with the MBL.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 5-3

5.1.2.3 Printing a PBL for all other papers

Conditions:
The PBL test for all other papers in use should be printed as soon as possible after the
successfully completed MBL, since the conditions of Printer and Paper Processor
should be identical.
How often the PBL should be repeated if the values after the 1st try are out of tolerance
is set up under Settings > Machine settings > Printer (number of retries 1-10).

Test
Start PBL
Select the paper configuration for which the
PBL test is to be printed in the listing.
Use configuration:
Enter settings as required:
New calibration: Select none
Recalibration: Select the same paper
configuration as in the list
Copying paper data: see Ö 5.1.2.4
Copying paper data
075
5-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

5.1.2.4 Copying paper data

With Use configuration a PBL can be taken over for other paper width with the same
emulsion. This reduces the calibration procedure. A detailed description of the procedure
follows in the steps below.

Test
Start PBL
Select the paper configuration for which the 5
PBL test is to be printed in the listing.
Use configuration:
Select the paper configuration of the master
paper or a previously calibrated paper
(prerequisite is an identical emulsion
number)
Note:
After copying paper data proceed as follows
to cut the procedure:
075
Change to Standard mode
When the first PBL print appears on top right
at Current order, the respective paper data
is already stored temporarily. Press Stop to
abort this order; the paper data remains
stored.
Note:
To save the data permanently see Ö 5.1.2.6
Save .
Repeat these steps for all papers used in the

laboratory.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 5-5

5.1.2.5 Gradient Correction

The gradient correction checks the paper characteristic curves and corrects them if
necessary.
Note:
Make this correction in case of the deviations listed below!
If a correction has been made, make sure to follow the required actions described
below!
Cause:
In addition to the exposure times a PBL also determines the characteristic curves of a
paper. If these characteristic curves show a deviation this may result in loss of production
quality. The deviations occur when the exposure unit gradually changes its characteristics.
Deviations in the production (mainly visible in portraits):
the color changes in skin tomes seem unnatural (show steps).

Test
Start PBL
Select the respective paper
Gradient correction:
The result is shown in a message:
In tolerance:
no correction will be made.
No further actions required.
Successfully completed:
Required actions:
1. Recalibrate the master paper (PBL)
2. Assign the master paper again
(Auto-MBL)
3. Calibrate all further papers (PBL)
075
5-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

5.1.2.6 Save Settings

To be able to load the values back into the machine the settings must be saved after a
PBL was printed for all papers. The values can be saved according to the following
methods:
a) Recommended method in case of first installation after printing of all PBLs:

Press the ON button to save all values immediately and permanently in the database.
b) In case of minor changes:
Use the function Settings > Save settings to save the values temporarily in the
database or on CD alternatively; upon shutdown of the machine the values are then
saved permanently. 5
Save settings:
Settings > Save settings > select
respective symbol (CD or PC) and enter
a meaningful name
or
Press the ON button.
021
Now the Printer is calibrated for all papers: The production can be started.
5.1.2.7 Setting the production balance

After successful calibration of all papers (MBL, PBL) the production balance must be set
up. There the general machine settings such as corrections, contrast settings, TFS logic
are combined. See Ö Production balance in Chapter 4.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 5-7

5.1.3 Daily Calibration with the MBL

Daily calibration is required to keep the production stable. The MBL is printed
automatically in the morning after the machine has started up and reached nominal
temperatures always provided the option Auto-MBL has been activated under Settings >
Machine settings > Printer. See also Ö Timer (automatic switch-on) and Ö Printer
settings in Chapter 4.
Prerequisite:
Ensure that the master paper is inserted at end of work on the previous day! Otherwise
the solutions will not be heated.
If in spite of the Auto-MBL visible production fluctuations occur during the day the
calibration should be repeated more frequently: Start a manual MBL one or twice per day:
Test > Start MBL.
Calibration of all other papers:

The MBL calibrates the master paper back to nominal value and all other papers are
adapted automatically according to the master correction.
This only works in calibrated machines and under the following conditions:
− Only print a PBL for a paper, e.g. because of a new emulsion, if a successful MBL was
printed just before.
− Before changing the emulsion of the master paper print an MBL on the old emulsion
always provided there is still enough paper left. If this is not the case, proceed as
explained in Ö 5.1.4.1 Calibrating paper (PBL) without MBL (exception)
− In case of emulsion changes in the master paper, a PBL must be printed immediately
on this paper.
5-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

5.1.4 Special Cases
5.1.4.1 Calibrating paper (PBL) without MBL (exception)

In the following situations a calibration without MBL is useful or even necessary:
1. Useful:
If the MBL corrections cannot have the same
effect on all papers because the paper types
are too different, e.g. paper of different
manufacturers.
5
Execute a PBL for each paper that is
needed
2. Necessary:
If the emulsion of the master paper changes
and there is not enough paper left to print an
MBL on the old emulsion (approx. 5 m).
Print a PBL for the master paper on the
new emulsion
Print an MBL for the master paper
Print a PBL for each paper that is
needed
5.1.4.2 Non master paper: Calibrating for new paper or emulsion changes for a paper
With the same emulsion an MBL is not necessary in the following cases:
– The last MBL with the old emulsion was made only a few hours ago.
– During this time the production was stable printing perfect quality.
Print an MBL:
This provides for a calibrated condition of the
machine.
Print the PBL right after the MBL.
5.1.4.3 Complete New Calibration

This is recommended:
– if the prints on the papers in use are to different;
– if another paper (other surface or width) should be defined as master paper;
– if the emulsion of the master paper changed and the old emulsion was used up before
printing an MBL. Otherwise there may be a deviation between the master paper and all
other papers.
Procedure see Ö 5.1.2 Calibrating the

Machine after First Operation or after New
Software Installation
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 5-9

5.2 Scanner Calibration (Pico)

The pixel correction (Pixel correction) calibrates the light path of the light source all the
way to the CCD. It is required for the following jobs:
− Balancing the pixel sensitivity of the CCD (for each single pixel).
− To determine the light intensity (influenced by the light source, mirror box, film
carrier).
− To define the window of the inserted film carrier (illumination on the CCD chip).
Aim: Black reference (dark current) and white reference (sensitivity) should be identical
and reproducible for the following signal processing to lead to uniform production results.
5.2.1 Pico: Procedure

− Dark Pico, white reference, film carrier:
executed with the film carrier inserted
− Bright Pico is carried out as follows:
Press Bright Pico:

A message (popup) requests removal of the
film carrier.
Remove film carrier and mirror box.
Place the tool for scanner calibration on the
lens.
Insert the mirror box and close the popup
with OK:
The light Pico is executed (duration
approx. 2-3 minutes.
A message request insertion of the film
carrier:
Remove the mirror box
Remove the calibration tool
Insert the mirror box again.
Remove the film carrier.
5-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

5.2.2 Pico: Automatic

The pixel sensitivity varies, among others, with the temperature of the CCD chip and with
brightness. For this reason, the Pico is executed automatically in the following cases:
− Machine startup
Whereby any film carrier may be inserted when the machine is started.
− Film carrier change
− Major light and temperature fluctuations (light path / CCD)
Standard mode is displayed while the Pico is carried out. Film scanning is not possible
during this time. 5
5.2.3 Pico: Manual

If the Pico is not completed correctly, it must be started again manually.
Possible cause:
Objects in the light path (e.g. film) or the film carrier is not correctly inserted.
Conditions for the Pico:

1. Film carrier must be inserted and empty.
2. Do not change the carrier during Pico!
The Pico is interrupted when the film carrier is changed and the window
is not defined correctly. This results in wrongly exposed prints (brightness,
colors) and possibly prints with white borders.

Test
Start Pico
Dark Pico
Bright Pico
White reference
Film carrier
Press the required test to start.
107
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 5-11

5-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Preparing conventional Orders
6 Preparing conventional Orders
6.1 Preparing Films for Processing (d-lab.1 with Film Processor)
6.1.1 Processable Film Sizes in the Film Processor

Note:
Only C41 color negative films and C41-compatible B/W films can be processed.
Film sizes
135 mm film
120 roll film (4,5x6 to 6x9) 6
110 Pocket film
IX240 (APS)
6.1.2 Film 135

If films are completely wound into the cartridge, the tongue of the film must be extracted
first. There are 3 film tongue extractors available:
– Film Picker 135
– Filmpicker MFP.APS.170.024 from Technotape (incl. driver)
– FEX 1, fully automatic
Pull the film tongue of the film 135 out of

the cartridge
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 6-1

Preparing conventional Orders d-lab.1 family: Operation
6.1.3 Film size 120 (roll film)
CAUTION!
Use the dark bag!
Remove the roll film 120 from the backing

paper in the dark bag, roll it up and put it in
a film magazine 120
6.1.4 Film size 110 (Pocket)
CAUTION!
Use the dark bag!
Break the cartridge of the film 110 in the

dark bag and remove the backing paper
Roll up the film and put it in the film
magazine 120 together with the adapter
bracket 110
3003_077
1 Film cartridge 110
2 Dark bag
3 Film magazine 120
4 Adapter bracket 110 for film magazine 120
6-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

6.1.5 Film Splicing Station

The film is transported through the Film Processor by means of a Leader card made of
plastic.
CAUTION!
Clean Leader cards regularly because dirt and sweat reduce the adhesive power of
the tapes and the film may detach from the card.
Leader cards with damaged perforation or bent edges must not be used any more
because they may cause transport problems.
6
The film is prepared in the cutter/splicer station for the processing in the Film Processor.
3003_098
1 Cutter for film tongue

2 ON/OFF switch with pilot lamp
3 Positioning flap for film cartridges
4 Drawer for film scraps
5 Positioning pins for Leader card
6 Film magazine holder 120
7 Storage for Leader cards
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 6-3

6.1.6 Splicing the Film to the Leader Card and attaching the Order Number
135
IX240
110/120
A 1234 123
5
5
123
B
34
12
34
12
FE
ED
3003_107
6-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Explanation of some operator steps:

RE 5 and 7:
The film is spliced to the Leader card by sticking a tape on the front and back. The tapes
must not extend beyond the edge of the film.
RE 6:
The order envelope and the film must get a number sticker (Twin Check label) so that the
film and the prints can be combined again later on.
Stick the Twin Check Label on the film and on the order envelope, observing the
following:
The sticker should be put neither on nor too close to the tape:
Both would cause problems when the film is cut off the Leader card in the Film Processor
(Leadercutter), e.g.:
– Cut not possible, Leader card dirtied by rests of glue 6
– About 10 mm of film remain on the card when the film is cut off. If the Twin check
label is adhered in this area, it is cut off as well. The order number of the film is lost!
RE 1:
Put the film cassette in the cutter/splicer
station and cut off the film tip
RE 2:
Insert the Leader card:
3rd hole from the left of the perforation on
the pin
RE 3:
Butt-join the Leader card and the cut film tip
so that there is no gap between the two.
RE 4:
Tear off the tape
RE 5:
Splice the film to the Leader card:
1st tape on the front side
RE 6:
Stick the Twin Check Label on the film and
the order envelope
RE 7:
Splice the film to the Leader card:
2nd tape on the back
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 6-5

6.1.7 Film IX240
3003_108
The following section only refers to handling differences with respect to film 135:
RE 1:
Be sure to use the provided adapter as otherwise the film is not spliced correctly to the
Leader card.
The film IX240 has been would already out of the cassette and into the Intermediate
Cartridge (at the top right in the illustration). The latter is put in the adapter (at the
bottom right in the illustration). The adapter is put in the splicing station (see arrow in the
illustration).
RE 2:
Insert the Leader card (3rd hole from the right of the perforation on the pin):
The Leader card for film IX240 is white and has a cutout for the film tip.
It is put against the right edge of the film splicing station.
RE 1:
Put the Intermediate Cartridge in the adapter
RE 2:
Put in a white Leader card:
3rd hole from the right of the perforation on
the pin
RE 3 to 7:
Procedure as shown and described on the
previous pages
6-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

6.1.8 Putting the Film in the Processing Magazine

There are coded magazines available for films 135, 110 and 120. The coding is located at
the bottom of the magazines:
3003_079
Example:
The illustration shows a processing magazine 120 with an inserted film magazine
Put the film with the Leader card in a

suitable processing magazine
3003_080
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 6-7

6.2 Preparing Paper Magazines

In order to ensure accurate guiding of the paper in the magazine, the latter must be
adjusted to the paper width in use.
Processable paper widths:
82 – 210 mm
3,25 – 8,25 inch
If several paper brands are processed, it is recommended to prepare several magazines for
the various paper widths.
Open the empty magazine and take out the

winding core
Remove the screw of the holding plate of
the paper guides (cross-tip screwdriver)
3003_091
Put the 4 fingers of the paper guides in the

notches corresponding to the paper width:
Make sure that all 4 fingers sit in the right
notch.
3003_092
6-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

The structure of the notches makes it easy to find the right position.
There is a new paper magazine on which paper width 114 mm is available.
3003_099
Unscrew the screws of the guides at the

magazine exit
6
Adjust the guides to the correct width
3003_093
Do the same adjustment on the guides of
the other magazine part
3003_094
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 6-9

6.2.1 Inserting Paper in the Magazine

Take the paper out of the cool storage at
least 24 hours before using it so that any
condensation water may dry
Take the paper roll out of the package in the
dark room and push the winding core
through the roll
Put the paper in the magazine, observing the
paper winding direction (see illustration)
Pass the paper tip through the two brackets
on the magazine exit
Pull some paper out of the magazine, hold it
with one hand and close the magazine with
the other hand
Avoid preexposure of the paper tip:
3003_095 After closing the magazine, rewind the paper
by turning one of the gears mounted on the
side of the magazine mouth until the latch
of the magazine closes.
6-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

6.2.2 Coding the Paper Magazines

The paper magazine is coded for the paper width (1-4) and the surface (5-6) in use.
Meaning of the coding:
Switch closed (corresponds to ⌧ in the menu)
■ Switch open (corresponds to in the menu)
PATTERN 1 2 3 4 5 6
PAPER SIZE
3.25 Inch (82 mm) *
3.50 Inch (89 mm)
3.75 Inch (95 mm)
4.00 Inch (102 mm)
6
4.50 Inch (114 mm) *
4.75 Inch (120 mm) GLOSSY
5.00 Inch (127 mm) MATTE
7.00 Inch (178 mm)
8.00 Inch (203 mm)
8.25 Inch (210 mm)
free
free
free
free
free
* see Paper width 114 on the next page

The table shows the AgfaPhoto standard. If required, a different allocation of the switches
to paper widths and surfaces can be defined.
Once the magazine is put in, the machine automatically recognizes the paper width and
the paper surface, and offers the corresponding print sizes in the print menus for
selection.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 6-11

6.2.3 Changing the paper magazine

The LED in front of the magazine indicates when the magazine can be removed:
– Green yes
– Red no
CAUTION!
Remove the magazine only after the LED has turned green. This means that the
paper has been wound back into the magazine.
When a magazine is inserted, the machine checks the remaining paper length: For this,
the paper is advanced to the cutter and returned. The Printer door must be closed as
otherwise the operation is not performed.
Remove the magazine:

Push the latch to the side
Pull out the paper magazine
Insert the magazine:

The Printer door must be closed
Put the magazine in the guide rails and
push it to the back until it locks in
audibly
3003_096
Check whether the paper tip should be cut off:

To avoid paper transport malfunctions by an inaccurately cut paper tip, the check should
be confirmed when
1. a new paper roll is inserted
2. a paper jam has occurred
If a paper cut is desired, the machine cuts the paper tip. This unexposed sheet is
transported through the Printer/Paper Processor and deposited in the Sorter.
Answer the check for the Paper cut
6-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

6.2.4 Changing the Film Mask

Note:
The film mask can only be pulled out when no film is inserted.
A change of the film mask is automatically followed by a pixel correction (Pico).

Do not remove the film mask while the Pico is running!
Pull out the film mask:

Pull it to the front and
Lift it up and out
6
Insert the film mask:
Put it in the guide and
Push it to the back until it locks in
noticeably
3003_022
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 6-13

6.3 Film IX240
6.3.1 Film IX240, Handling

− Do not bend the film as otherwise the magnetic code cannot be read in this spot
− Do not expose the film to strong magnetic fields as otherwise the magnetic code is
deleted
− Do not splice the film in the area of the magnetic tracks as otherwise the magnetic
coating may get damaged when the tape is removed
6.3.2 Film Cassette IX240

As the film is narrower and the film base is thinner, the APS film cassette is smaller than
the cartridge 135
The APS film is rewound into the cassette after processing. The cassette serves as storage
device for the film.
The APS film not being visible for the customer, the film status is indicated on the
cassette.
3003_097
Film status indication :
Unexposed
Partially exposed
Fully exposed but not processed
Processed film
IPI: Irreversible Process Indicator
(pushed in on processed film)
6-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation image box workstation
7 image box workstation
7.1 Switch on
Press the switch on the back of the machine:
The image box starts.
7.2 Preparing the image box for usage of the workstation Software
7.2.1 Installation CD Version 3.0.4

Note:
The question asking whether the machine should in future be started as image box 7
workstation or as image box kiosk only appears at the first start after the installation.
Click on:
Kiosk Software
or
Workstation Software
select
Note:
The selection can be changed later via the icon
on the desktop.
The start screen is displayed.

The program always starts with the user level with limited rights (User).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-1

image box workstation d-lab.1 family: Operation
7.2.2 Installation CD Version 3.1.0

Click on image box controll center on the
desktop:
The following screen is displayed.
Click on image box Application
3009_101
Click on:
Kiosk Software
or
Workstation Software
select
The start screen is displayed.

The program always starts with the user level with limited rights (User).
7-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.2.3 Installation CD Version 6

Minimize the Kiosk Software
Move d-bridge into Autostart:

Click on the server symbol of d-workflow
on the desktop, move it to Start >
Programs > Startup and drop it into Empty
as shown in the screenshot
3009_102
Double click on the symbol of the

Hardware Attendant:
The window will be displayed.
3009_103
Select Agfa APM Kiosk.exe and click on

Edit
3009_104
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-3

Uncheck Autorun and activate Run

minimized
Press OK:
The window of the Hardware Attendant
will be displayed again
3009_105
Select New
3009_104
Change the path (see Look in at the top of

the window) to C:\windows\sysem32
Enter start.bat (see File name at the
bottom of the window)
Click Open
3009_106
7-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Activate Autorun and press OK:

The window of the Hardware Attendant
will be displayed again
3009_107
Important!
Press Quit:
This will save the settings.
The Hardware Attendant will be closed.
3009_104
Restart the image box:
From now on the image box will always start
up with the workstation software. The Kiosk
software remains in the background until it
is called up from the workstation software.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-5

7.3 Actions of the Administrator

Before you are able to start production, the settings must be entered and various
preparations must be made. These actions may only be executed by a user with the
respective rights. This user is the Administrator.
7.3.1 Entering the settings.

Settings Call-up with the following buttons
Since only the user level User is offered upon startup of the image box Settings
workstation, the administrator must change the user level to be able to Machine settings
enter the settings. User level
Log in as Administrator
Enabling basic functions and optional components Settings
Machine settings
Licenses
Entering country-specific settings Settings
Machine settings
User interface
Some layouts are already included in the system. Settings
If the optional components indexprint and combiprint layouts have been Machine settings
purchased, further layouts can be imported. Indexprint layout
Combiprint layout
Settings for the label printer, network orders and drives of the image box Settings
workstation; Machine settings
Entering system date and time; Receipt print
Other settings, such as e.g. assignment of order numbers (automatic or DPOF settings
manual). Network orders
Media configuration
System date and time
Other settings
7.3.2 Defining Order Configurations

Basic (lowest level): Settings
Entering paper surfaces, paper widths, and cut lengths; Product config.
Defining configurations for the back print, corrections, autosave, and front Paper surfaces
print. Paper widths
Front print
Back print
Correction
Autosave
Front print
Global settings
Level 2: Settings
Combining paper surfaces, and paper widths in paper configurations; Product config.
Defining configurations for indexprints and combiprints. Paper configurations
Indexprint
Combiprint
Level 3 (highest level): Settings
Combining sub-configurations in order configurations. Product config.
7-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.3.3 Saving Settings and Configurations

Creating a backup copy of the settings and configurations Settings
Save settings
7.3.4 Sequence of the Settings

Some settings require prior setup of others:
Define first Then define

Machine settings Machine settings
Change User level User interface
Product configurations Product configurations
Set up all sub-configurations Combine sub-configurations in order configurations.
7
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-7

7.4 Keyboard Displays

If the system requires an input an input screen will open showing the following elements:
– Keyboard layout:
Language-specific characters are shown in accordance with the selected keyboard
allocation.
– Display area and preview, if applicable:
Entered characters are displayed in the blue field above the keyboard display. If the
text may be shown in a pull-down menu, the respective preview is shown in addition.
This shows during the input if the entered text will be fully visible or if the text must
be abbreviated.
For entering numbers a numeric keypad will be displayed.
7.4.1 Alphanumeric Keyboard

Enter the text by pressing the keys.
Return to the previous menu.
047
7-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.4.2 Numeric Keypad

Enter the numbers by pressing the keys.
Return to the previous menu.
600
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-9

7.5 Menu Overview
7.5.1 Print Modes
3099_001
7-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.5.2 Settings
7.5.2.1 Product Configurations / Loading and Saving the Settings
3099_003
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-11

7.5.2.2 Machine Settings
3099_002
7-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.5.3 Tests
3099_004
7.5.4 Shutdown
3099_005
7.5.5 Status Information / Help
3099_006
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-13

7.5.6 Further Menus

These screens are accessible at any time. They are displayed under the following
conditions:
1. When text inputs are necessary, e.g. user names, back print text, by touching the
respective field.
2. When numbers have to be entered (order number, password), by touching the

respective field.
3. When severe errors occur, which must be fixed, for operators to continue.
4. When the operator has to make a decision.
3003_090
7-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.6 Settings and Configurations

Note:
Only the user Administrator is able to enter settings and define configurations.
The purpose of the settings is to prepare the machine for operation and production.
Machine settings
Basic machine settings, such as e.g. language of the user interface, settings for receiving
/ transmitting network orders, software updates.
Usually the administrator defines these settings when the machine is put in operation.
Print configurations
Here the configurations for papers, corrections, back print, indexprints, etc. are defined.
These configurations can then be combined in various product configurations. The
operator only selects a suitable product configuration for the order.
Save settings / Load settings 7
Machine settings and configurations are saved. If required these machine settings and/or
configurations can be loaded again.

Settings
m2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-15

7.7 Machine Settings

Settings
Machine settings
005
Machine
Basic settings of the machine:
– User interface: Country-specific settings
– Licenses: Enable basic functions and optional software components
– Indexprint layout: Import predefined or customer-specific layouts for indexprints
– Combiprint layout: Import predefined or customer-specific layouts for combiprints,
greeting cards and ID-photography
– Software Update: Install new software version / fall back to previous version
– Label printer: Define the print-out of receipts
– User level: Change user level and password
– DPOF settings: Define in this setting if and how the data entered and saved in the
digital camera are used for the exposure in the front print.
– Network orders: Settings for receiving and transmitting remote orders and network
orders
– Media configuration: Define drives for input and output media
– System date and time: Settings for system date and system time
– Other settings: such as e.g. CD check, order number assignment automatic or
manual, path to the kiosk Software
Note:
We recommend to define the User interface first since this facilitates all further
settings.
7-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.7.1 User Level: Change User / Change Password

Two users are preset and cannot be deleted:
1. Administrator with unrestricted rights and permissions (protected by password)

2. User with restricted rights and permissions (no password)

Settings
Machine settings
User level
Change user:
Press Change to and select the desired
user level.
If you select Administrator enter a 7
password for the user level.
Change password:
Select Administrator or User:
The keyboard screen is only shown for
Administrator.
Enter the new password.
201 Repeat the new password.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-17

7.7.2 User Interface: Entering Country Specific Settings

Note:
We recommend to define the User interface first since this facilitates all further
settings.
Language:
Available languages: German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Japanese.
When the Administrator selects the respective language, all country specific settings in
this screen are automatically filled with the usual standards: measuring system (metric /
US), decimal and numeric separator, formats for date and time. The Administrator can
change the preset values by selecting another setting in the respective pulldown menu.
Note:
After changing to US units all dimensions in all dialogs are shown in inches (rounded).
Keyboard:
Keyboard layout for input on the touch screen.
Date format / Time format:
Date and time information in the respective format are included in the back print.
If a 24-hour format has been selected for Time format, the buttons for selection of the
codes for morning and afternoon, e.g. a.m. / p.m. are not necessary and cannot be
activated.

Settings
Machine settings
User interface
Select Language
Select Keyboard character set
Select System, Decimal sign and Numeric
separator, Time / Date format and
separator.
a.m. / p.m. (morning / afternoon)
If a 12-hour format has been selected for
Time format, select the respective code
here.
311
7-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.7.3 Licenses
7.7.3.1 Ordering Optional Software Components

The main software must be enabled before operation.
Some optional programs are already included in the main software. If purchased, they
must only be enabled, e.g. options like import of layouts for production of indexprints and
combiprints/greeting cards/ID-pictures.
Ordering optional programs:

Call up Machine ID:
and press Version Info
The machine ID is displayed on the
screen bottom left-hand side.
Order the option from AgfaPhoto, and
indicate the machine ID:
7
AgfaPhoto will then supply an
alphanumeric key code.
063
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-19

7.7.3.2 Activating Main Software and Software Components

Enable the main software and software components:
Notes on the loading of licenses:

The licenses are loaded from the inserted medium, independent of their storage
location on the medium.
Medium Available drives, type 500 Available drives, type 700

CD ROM CD-RW / DVD CD-RW / DVD
Card PCMCIA slot xD
Card Secure Digital – Multi Media Card Secure Digital – Multi Media Card
Card Memory Stick Memory Stick
Card Compact Flash + Microdrive Compact Flash + Microdrive
Card Smart Media Smart Media
Card USB USB

Settings
Machine settings
Licenses
Software components not yet enabled will
be listed on the screen.
Select the main software and/or
components in this list.
Install licenses:
Load the licenses either from memory card
or CD or enter them manually:
Insert the memory card with the
licenses and press Licenses for loading
cards: The licenses will be loaded.
or: Insert the CD with the licenses and
press Licenses for loading CDs:
058 The licenses will be loaded.
or: Press Enter licenses and type the
license keys in the dialog window.
The licensed software components are then
enabled. The corresponding functions
and/or layout files can only be called up
after a restart.
Shut down software and start again:
Call up the Shutdown menu.
Select Shutdown in the window.
Start again via the icon on the desktop.
7-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.7.4 Importing Layouts

The imported layouts can be used in the configurations.
Conditions:
The import of the layout files (optional) must be enabled before.
Only those layouts can be imported, which were created in the AGFA IP Layout
Software.
The complete medium is searched for the layout files, not only a specific path.
Exception: In Version 1.0.13 the layout files must be in the following directories:
Indexprint: Standard_Layouts\Index
Combiprint: Standard_Layouts\Combiprint
File extensions:
Indexprint: .dig (digital)
Combiprint: .pas
7
Listings:
All layouts of the selected drive or directory are listed on the left, and the imported
layouts are listed on the right.
7.7.4.1 Importing Indexprint Layouts

Settings
Machine settings
Indexprint layouts
Press the symbol for a drive.
Import individual files or all files of a drive or
folder:
Select individual file(s) and press the
arrow, or
press the double arrow
If necessary select a layout that is no longer
needed in the right hand list and press
Delete.
screen.
318
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-21

7.7.4.2 Importing Combiprint / Passport Print Layouts

Settings
Machine settings
Combiprint layouts
Press the symbol for a drive.
Import individual files or all files of a drive or
folder:
Select individual file(s) and press the
arrow, or
press the double arrow
If necessary select a layout that is no longer
needed in the right hand list and press
Delete.
screen.
319
7-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.7.5 Software Update

Note:
Software updates are possible as of Version 1.0.13. All settings are kept.
Save the settings:

If you press Start update a query checks if the settings have been saved on an external
storage medium: If No the operation is stopped; in case of Yes the software is installed.
Saving the settings on an external storage

medium or network drive:
Settings
Save settings
Press on the symbol and insert the medium
if necessary.
Start saving 7
323
Settings
Machine settings
Software update
Insert CD or card if necessary.
Select drive:
Detected versions are displayed.
Select the desired version.
Press Start update
Answer the prompt whether settings were
saved with Yes:
The software will then be updated.
If afterwards, the system fails to work
correctly, go back to the status prior to this
update with Back to preversion.
328
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-23

7.7.6 Defining the Label Print

Settings for the label print:
1. Activate label print if a receipt should be printed.
2. Press Two labels, if two labels should be printed instead of one.
3. Activate the texts for the label print - image box ID, Date / time, Free text - and if
Free text was activated enter the desired text. The texts are shown under Preview.
4. Activate the Dealer address if you want the address printed on the label, and enter
the respective address. It will be displayed under Preview.

Settings
Machine settings
Label print
Activate label print or deactivate.
If the function is active, define the label
print:
Define the number of labels:
1 label = Two labels must be
deactivated
2 labels = Two labels must be
activated
Activate the desired texts for the print:
image box ID
Date / time
Free text
313 Dealer address
Select Label printer:
A network printer may also be used.
Activate Free text, if desired:
Any existing text will be shown
immediately in Preview.
Enter the text or change:
Press the respective button: The input
screen opens. Enter a new text or
change the existing text.
Activate Dealer address, if desired:
Any existing address will be shown
immediately in Preview.
Enter the text or change:
Press the respective button: The input
screen opens. Enter a new text or
change the existing text.
Accept the settings with OK.
7-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.7.6.1 Customer Specific Logo for the Label

The owner of the image box wants his own logo instead of the AgfaPhoto logo on the
label. This is possible by changing the logo file.
The file agfalog.bmp can be found in the following path:
C:\Program Files\image_box_workstation
Properties of the existing file:
Format BMP
Size 295 x 68 pixels (width x height)
Color depth monochrome (black/white)
Notes:
These properties should not be changed.
Colored logos appear in a gray raster.
If the dealer address is also printed on the label, the logo height can be increased up to
250 pixels.
7
7.7.7 Activating DPOF

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format): Order format for digital prints. DPOF data can be
entered and saved in a digital camera. If the function is active this data can be used on
the d-lab.

Settings
Machine settings
DPOF settings
Activate or deactivate DPOF.
If the function is activated define the
settings for the text exposure on the print:
Select Font and Font size.
Press Font color.
Press Color of the text frame.
Note:
Press Font color or Color of the text frame to
open the next screen, see Ö 7.10.3.3
Accept the settings with Save.

325
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-25

7.7.8 Network Orders, Settings

Remote file print and Remote autosave
Define an external memory location within the network, where the image box workstation
can copy or save image files if the function was activated. In case of a file print or
autosave order the workstation automatically connects to the defined
computer/directory. Computer and directory names must not include any line breaks,
blanks, and "\".
– Computer name
The IP address of the computer (workstation) in the network on which the data is to be
saved can be entered here.
– Enter a sharing name under Directory name; the actual name of the folder (shared
folder on the specific computer) is not used.
Notes:
The image box workstation logs in at the remote computer as user Image with the
password MSC (capitals). To allow login at the remote computer the above mentioned
user must be set up with this password. Password MSC of the user Image must never
run out!
The folder must be shared on the PC where the folder is located. Password protection
must not be activated.
Network orders
The setting Maximum number for CD orders to be loaded automatically under
Network orders is meant to restrict the order volume to be accepted.
d-workflow
Die Software d-workflow or d-bridge is needed for network orders. It records incoming
orders and assigns them to the suitable output devices.
To make the transfer work, address / name and port of the server must be defined: The
server is a PC on which the d-workflow software is installed, or the image box workstation
with the d-bridge software.
The default entry for Port no. is 5001 or pfdmcom, if the corresponding input in the
SERVICES file exists.
Notes:
For information about the current version of the d-workflow please contact the
AgfaPhoto Service Technician.
Address, Name, and Port must not include any line breaks, blanks, and "\".
7-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


Settings
Machine settings
Network orders
Remote file print

Computer name
workstation in the network.
Directory name
Enter the share name.
Remote autosave
Computer name
workstation in the network. 7
310 Directory name
Enter the share name.
Network orders
Max. no. for CD orders to be loaded
automatically
Enter the quantity.
d-workflow
Address or name
Name or IP address of the order server
Port
If the preset port is not accepted change
the input.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-27

7.7.9 Date / Time

Settings
Machine settings
System date and time
Date
Enter the system date.
Time
Enter the system time.
315
7-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.8 Other Settings

Machine ID and Machine name
Specify ID and name of the image box workstation in d-workflow / d-bridge: ID 240
d-lab (dTFS) compatibility

Measuring of digital print files on the d-lab (digital Total Film Scanning).
dTFS is always active in Easy mode. The following settings only have an effect on
Standard mode:
– Activated
dTFS is always activated and cannot be deactivated.
– Deactivated
– dTFS can be activated or deactivated for a complete order.
– dTFS can be activated or deactivated in preview for each individual image.
7
Check CD
We recommend to activate this function only if burning faulty CDs is a frequent problem.
Note:
If this function is active the burning time for a CD will double.
Use scanner profile

If this function is activated the profile of the connected scanner is used for the "print to
print" function (see Ö 7.14.3 Standard: Scan Image). The scanner is automatically
detected and the corresponding profile is assigned. The output device must also be
selected to ensure optimum quality for the "print to print" function.
Order no.:
– Manual
The operator can change the order number.
– Automatic
The order number cannot be changed.
Path: kiosk
Path to the kiosk Software: C:\Windows\System32\Startup.exe
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-29


Settings
Machine settings
Other settings
Machine ID and Machine name
Enter ID and name of the image box
workstation.
d-lab (dTFS) compatibility
Activate or deactivate.
Check CD
Activate or deactivate
309
Activate or deactivate the option Use
scanner profile. If activated select d-lab
profile:
d-lab.1 (normal case)
d-lab.2/3
Order no.:
Select Manual or Automatic
Path: kiosk
Enter the path to the kiosk Software.
Preview images:
Enter the maximum number of images to be
displayed in the preview.
Maximum size (GB) for order buffer (for
waiting orders):
The input is checked. An error message will
be displayed if the entered value exceeds
the storage capacity.
See also Ö Notes on the following page.
ICC path:
Specify the path to the program image box
Control Center.
It can be activated in the Start screen by
pressing Start Control Center (ICC); see Ö
7.17.3
7-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Notes:
If the order volume exceeds the defined maximum limit (max. size), the status line
indicates that the order cannot be saved.
Apart from these exceptions all other orders are saved (order buffer see Ö 7.13.5.2
Saved Orders) and can be processed again. Once the memory space is used up the
older orders will be deleted one by one. There is no message.
7.8.1 image box Control Center (ICC)

Functions / Displays of the external program:
– Statistics
– Current software versions 7
– Machine ID
– Drive letter of the card reader
– Connected hardware
– TouchScreen calibration
– Settings of screen saver
– Diagnostics (log files)
– Selection of image box application
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-31

7.9 Product Configurations

All settings that are needed to produce the desired print size (e.g. 9x13) of a film size in use
(e.g. 135 full frame) or of a digital image are stored in the product configurations.
The product configurations have a hierarchical structure, i.e. they are a combination of sub-
ordinate configurations. For this reason, the sub-configurations (partial products) must be
created first. A sub-ordinate configuration can be used in any number of product
configurations.
The lowest level are the basic configurations. They are set up first:
1. Paper surface
2. Paper width
3. Front print
4. Back print
5. Correction
6. Autosave
7. Global settings
On level 2 the paper surfaces and paper widths are combined in paper configurations and
the products indexprints and combiprints are defined.
On the highest level 3 all offered products (sub-configurations) are combined in product
configurations.
Note:
See Ö 7.9.1 Information about defining, changing, deleting configurations.
The individual sub-configurations and the product configurations are described in detail
after this paragraph.

Settings
Product configuration
Press the desired button:
The corresponding screen opens.
004
7-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.9.1 Instructions for Creating, Changing, and Deleting Configurations

When activating a configuration, e.g. by pressing the button Back print, quite often a
pull-down menu opens offering the existing configurations of the selected type, e.g. all
back print configurations. They can be selected and edited or deleted. If a new
configuration is created or an existing configuration is modified a follow-up screen opens.
Editing of the various configuration lists is similar. Therefore at first we give only a
general description of the procedure (see Example). Afterwards the individual
configuration screens will be explained in detail.
Note:
Names of configurations:
Length: max. 30 characters
Permissible special characters: - . : , ; + ! ? = ( ) _ / & % $ and blanks
Inverted commas are not permitted: "
Example
Define a new configuration: 7
1. New
The following screen opens (see bottom left).
2. Enter the settings.
3. Press Save as and enter a name in the dialog
box, see Ö Note at the end of this page.
Creating a new configuration based on an

existing one:
1. Select a similar configuration in the list.
2. Press Change and enter the settings which
differ from the basic configuration in the next
screen.
3. Press Save as and enter a new name, see Ö
Note at the end of this page.
360
Note:
If a name that exists is entered, the corresponding message is displayed together with
the buttons Enter new name or Overwrite configuration.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-33

Changing a configuration:
1. Press a configuration in the list.
2. Press Change and change the settings in the
next screen (see left).
3. Press Save.
Deleting a configuration:
1. Press a configuration in the list.
2. Press Cancel and confirm with Yes.
A configuration, which is used in a superior
configuration cannot be deleted.
Exit from the screen:

302
1. Press Back
7-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.10 Configurations
7.10.1 Defining the Paper Surfaces

Define the paper surfaces used in the lab.
Note:
Delete: If you try to delete a surface which is used in a configuration, an error message
will be displayed.
7.10.1.1 Paper Surfaces – Editing the List

Settings
Paper surface 7
Edit the list:
Define a new surface:
Press New, see next screen Ö 7.10.1.2
Changing an existing surface:
Select the configuration and press
Change, see next screen Ö 7.10.1.2
Select surfaces in the list that are no
longer needed and press Delete.
367
7.10.1.2 Defining Paper Surfaces

Settings
Machine settings
Paper surface
New or Change
Select PfDF surface:
Select the surface in the list of standard PfDF
surfaces, e.g. glossy, fine-grain, silk.
312
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-35

7.10.2 Defining the Paper Widths

Define the paper widths used in the lab.
Permissible range
82 - 210 mm (integer values)
3.50 – 8.25 inches (two digits behind decimal point)
Note:
Delete paper width: If you try to delete a paper width which is used in a
configuration, an error message will be displayed.

Settings
Machine settings
Paper widths
Edit the list:
Define a new paper width:
Press New paper width and enter it via
the displayed numeric keypad.
Select paper widths in the list which are
no longer needed and press Delete
paper width.
306
7-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.10.3 Front Print Configurations

By means of these configurations free texts can be exposed on the front of the print.
7.10.3.1 Front Print Configurations – Editing the List

Settings
Front print
Define a new configuration:
Change an existing configuration:
Change, see next screen Ö 7.10.3.2 7
Select configurations in the list that are
no longer needed and press Delete.
361
7.10.3.2 Defining Front Print Configurations

Settings
Front print
New or Change
Select Font, Letter size, and Position.
Free text
Enter the text for front print.
Select Font color and Background color.
Note:
Touch Font color or Background color to
open the next screen, see Ö 7.10.3.3.
Background transparent:
Activate, if desired
304
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-37

7.10.3.3 Selecting a Color

Select the color and press OK
or
Select the color and press New:

The next screen opens, see Ö 7.10.3.4
080
Note:
User defined colors are shown in the bottom row. In the example above, one color has
been defined. If further colors are defined the existing colors move to the right. If the
row shows more than eight colors, always the color on the right border is omitted.
7.10.3.4 Defining a New Color

Enter the following values for black:
Red 1
Green 1
Blue 1
Specify the red, green, and blue portion to

create the desired color.
Press OK:
The New color screen closes.
Press OK:
The Select color screen closes.
087
7-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.10.4 Back Print Configurations
7.10.4.1 Back Print Configurations – Editing the List

Here the texts for back print are defined.

Settings
Back print
Change, see next screen Ö 7.10.4.2 7
360
7.10.4.2 Defining Back Print Configurations

Back print text Preview and Residual length of the selected parameters will be updated
after each modification. The printer always prints 2 x 40 characters. Positions not used are
filled up with dots. If the total length exceeds 80 characters the field Residual length
will indicate the excess characters with a preceding minus sign, e.g. -8.

Settings
Back print
New or Change
Combine a back print text with the
parameters offered in the listing of options
(left) and the free text:
Add Î or remove Í parameters
If Free text was selected, press the field
of the same name and enter the text.
Sort the list with ÏÐ:
The sorting has an influence on the
sequence in the back print text (see Ö
Preview illustration bottom left).
302
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-39

7.10.4.3 Parameters for the Back Print

Parameter Max. length
Order number 3
Cropping size 3
Cropping position 7
File name 21
Free text —
Corrections 8
Lab ID 3
Lab name —
Print quantity 3
Date 8
Time 11
Notes regarding certain parameters:

– Overlong file names will be reduced to 21 characters.
– Date and time of order creation are printed in the format selected under Machine
settings / User interface.
– Corrections prints the corrections of the configuration plus the manual corrections
made in the preview.
As there are only 10 positions in all available in the back print for Color/density
corrections (YMCD) as well as for Sharpness – edges, SAT saturation, Sharpness –
grains, Gradation, ACT (Surfaces) and DCT (Details), shortcuts must be used:
-9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9
I H G F E D C B A N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Note:
Values between -99 and +99 can be entered. Values greater than -9/+9 cannot be
output in the back print.
Examples:
7-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.10.5 Correction Configurations
7.10.5.1 Correction Configurations – Editing the List

The options the d-lab offers to improve the image can be combined in special
configurations saved, e.g. for certain motif groups (snow shots, portraits).

Settings
Correction
Select the configuration and press 7
363
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-41

7.10.5.2 Defining the correction configuration
Note:
The option Red-eyes correction must be ordered from AgfaPhoto and enabled after
receipt of the license, see Ö 7.7.3.1 Ordering Optional Software Components.
Red-eyes correction:
If the function has been activated red eyes in pictures are detected and automatically
corrected.
Portrait logic:
If the function has been activated faces in pictures are detected and automatically
corrected.
Options in both functions:

– Yes = always activated, even if the function has been deactivated in the global
settings
– No = deactivated; however, the function can be switched on in the screen Change
configuration and in Preview.
– Standard = General settings are taken over, see Ö 7.10.7 Global Settings

Settings
Correction
New or Change
Red-eyes correction and Portrait
logic AIC:
Select Yes, No, or Standard.
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Density
DCT (Details)
Sharpness – edges
SAT Saturation
Enter corrections by pressing the arrows:
For negative values: press the arrow left
303
For positive values: press the arrow right
7-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.10.5.3 Red-eyes correction

These parameters can be used to correct red eyes in faces. These parameters are based on
a logic which detects and evaluates faces in pictures.
If this function is activated it looks for faces in pictures and corrects reds eyes. Correction
is only possible if both eyes and the mouth in a face are visible. Certain circumstances,
such as reflections and eyeglasses, for example, may cause that faces are not detected.
7.10.5.4 Portrait logic

The parameters of the portrait logic allow color and density corrections in the faces. These
parameters are based on a logic which detects and evaluates faces in pictures.
Prerequisite:
The portrait logic only works in combination with dTFS. In other words, the portrait logic
cannot be used if dTFS is switched off or deactivated.
Range of applications: 7
As an automatic correction the portrait logic has been developed primarily for amateur
production. However, the function can also be used to get better results of professional
portraits. But still, the manual corrections allow to correct these pictures more precisely.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
strongest correction in magenta direction ("colder")
strongest correction in yellow direction ("warmer")
If this function is activated it looks for faces in pictures and corrects the skin color. The
color correction is added to the TFS correction and influences the complete picture and
not just the faces.
The impact of the color correction after portrait detection can be adjusted by the
Correction impact control. The control for target color (target skin tone) can be used to
shift the face color either in yellow or in magenta direction.
In Asian countries the magenta skin tones are favored, the Europeans prefer warmer skin
tones. With this parameter such continent specific differences can be considered.
The influence of the color correction on the entire picture is useful from a photographic
viewpoint because color casts in a portrait are often caused by the exposure light (warm
evening sunlight, cold shadows). So the correction improves the complete picture.
Correction is only possible if both eyes and the mouth in a face are visible. Certain
circumstances, such as reflections and eyeglasses, for example, may cause that faces are
not detected.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-43

7.10.6 Autosave Configurations

Autosave configurations are used to copy image files of an order to storage media, or to
transfer them to other equipment for further processing.
A folder is set up for every order on the storage medium:
Folder name = order number, e.g.: 001.
If this folder exists, a sequence number will be added:
e.g. 001-1, 001-2
The file name of the files copied to this folder remains unchanged.
7.10.6.1 Autosave Configurations – Editing the List

Settings
Autosave
362
7.10.6.2 Defining Autosave Configurations

Note:
PfDF allows image file transmission in the following formats:
JPEG (file extension jpg)
Bitmap (file extension bmp)
The image box workstation is able to accept a lot more formats, see Ö 7.13.1.1.
7-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Autosave d-workflow
Resolution Resolution
7 different resolutions are offered 7 different resolutions are offered
File format File format
bmp or bmp or
jpg with different compression factors jpg with different compression factors
(high, medium, low) (high, medium, low)
Drive CD and Internet Upload
Selection of an external or a local drive: Offers the services CD burning and/or Upload to Web
Remote directory or Local CD drive Album.
Further options under Image if Local CD drive is Upon activation the saved image files are marked in the
activated: corresponding order file. This marking allows automatic
further processing of the files in the equipment
– Copy original: connected via the d-workflow and/or d-bridge, e.g.
The original images, without corrections, are stored burning a CD in the image box workstation.
in the Reorder directory. 7
– Copy image viewer
The corrected and may be added versions of images
are burnt on CD together with the viewing program.
– Copy both
Burns the Reorder directory with the original images
and the Image Viewer with corrected and possibly
added images on CD.

Settings
Autosave
New or Change
Correction:
Select a correction configuration if
necessary.
Activate Autosave and/or d-workflow:
Select Resolution
Select File format
If Autosave has been activated:

Select Remote directory or Local CD drive.
If Local CD drive has been activated select
one of the following options under Image:
301
Copy Image Viewer
Copy original
Copy both
In case of d-workflow:
Activate CD and/or Internet Upload
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-45

7.10.7 Global Settings

Changing the Strength:
– Presetting: 100%
– Range: 10-2000%
The parameter changes are linear:
50 halves, 200 doubles the effect.
Notes:
Strength affects all corrections. It determines how strong the effect of a manual
correction step is.
The Strength parameter influences the complete production. It should only be
changed once in order to adjust the fine grading or the extent of the correction to
personal requirements.
All other corrections should be compensated for by correction configurations.
Red-eyes correction:
If the function has been activated red eyes in pictures are detected and automatically
corrected.
Note:
The option Red-eyes correction must be ordered from AgfaPhoto and enabled after
receipt of the license, see Ö 7.7.3.1 Ordering Optional Software Components.
Portrait logic:
If this function is activated faces in pictures are detected and corrected automatically as
set up under Target color and Degree of impact.
– Target color (colors for skin tones):
negative values colder skin tones
positive values warmer skin tones
– Degree of impact (for portrait logic):
This determines how far the color angle of skin tones is turned in the direction of the
set skin hue balance, e.g.:
–9 50%
0 75%
+9 100%
Notes on the Red-eyes correction and Portrait logic:

If the Standard option is selected when changing/creating a correction configuration
the settings entered here will be taken over in the configuration.
7-46 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


Settings
Global settings
Enter Strength
Activate or deactivate Red-eyes correction
Activate or deactivate AIC portrait logic
If portrait logic is activated set the Target
color and Degree of impact by pressing the
arrows:
7
327
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-47

7.10.8 Paper Configurations

At this point combine the previously defined paper widths and paper surfaces in paper
configurations. They correspond to the switch positions on the paper magazines used in
the d-lab. The cut lengths are managed independent of the paper configurations.
7.10.8.1 Paper Configurations – Editing the List

Settings
Machine settings
Paper configuration
Edit the list:
Defining a new paper configuration:
Edit an existing paper configuration:
Select paper configurations in the list
that are no longer needed and press
Delete.
366
7.10.8.2 Defining Paper Configurations

To ensure that the images are printed on the correct format, specify the paper width. For
the surface even the option Off may be selected. The d-lab then prints an order with such
a paper configuration on the respective paper width, but on any surface.

Settings
Machine settings
Paper configuration
New or Change
Select Paper width and Surface.
316
7-48 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.10.9 Indexprint Configurations

Path/directory for layout files:
C:\Program files\Agfa\image_box_workstation\Standard_Layouts\Index
File extensions: .dig, .135, .240
7.10.9.1 Indexprint Configurations – Editing the List

Definition of indexprint formats.
Note:
The list only shows layouts which have been imported.
The software ignores layouts which were only copied.
Call up in the Start screen: 7

Settings
Indexprint
364
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-49

7.10.9.2 Defining Indexprint Configurations

Note:
It is not necessary to enter the cut length. This is determined by the layout and the
paper configuration selected here.

Settings
Combiprint
New or Change
Select Layout
Select the number of Indexprints.
307
Layout info:
Check if the data corresponds to the desired layout.
Number of images/indexprint indicates how many images may be printed on an
indexprint (standard: 42). However, each indexprint layout allows several variations, e.g.
20, 30, 42. From these variations the d-lab selects the matching layout for the number of
images.
Note:
If the frames of an order do not fit on one indexprint, a second indexprint is created
automatically.
7-50 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.10.10 Combiprint Configurations

Path/directory for layout files:
C:\Program files\Agfa\image_box_workstation\Standard_Layouts\Combiprint
File extension: .pas
7.10.10.1 Combiprint Configurations – Editing the List

Definition of combiprint formats.
Note:
The list only shows layouts which have been imported.
The software ignores layouts which were only copied.

Settings 7
Combiprint
368
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-51

7.10.10.2 Defining Combiprint Configurations

Note:
It is not necessary to enter the cut length. This is determined by the layout and the
paper configuration selected here.

Settings
Combiprint
New or Change
Select Layout
Touch Layout texts:
A follow-up screen opens, see Ö next page.
308
Select the respective text in the Layout
texts screen and change it (keyboard screen
opens).
Note:
This is only possible if the layout was created
with Version 5.18 of the IP Layout Software or
a higher version. Also see Ö Note at the end of
the next page.
329
7-52 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

The layout texts may also be changed during

order processing in the Standard or Preview
screens:
Press the Change configuration button in

the Standard screen or in the Preview
screen. The opposite following screen is
opened.
Press Layout texts. The next screen opens,
see the (see Ö previous figure on this page).
7
Ip062
Note:
It is possible that not all entered texts were placed on the layout when the layout was
created with the IP Layout Software. The image box workstation also shows the texts
which have not been placed in the layout, however, it is not possible to activate these
texts subsequently.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-53

7.10.11 Product Configurations

Prerequisite:
As the sub-configurations (partial products) are accessed in the product configurations,
they must always be created before.
A product configuration combines all partial products to be made (i.e. print, indexprint,
CD) under one name.
7.10.11.1 Product Configurations – Editing the List

The listing shows abbreviations indicating the configuration type of the product. And
configurations that are shown in Easy print mode are marked accordingly.
S = Single
K = Combiprint
R = Reproduction
P = Package
+E = Easy product

Settings
Product config.
317
7-54 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.10.11.2 Selecting the Configuration Type

Notes:
The option Config. Type (configuration type) can only be set up with new creation of a
product configuration; the type cannot be changed with the option Change.
When defining a new configuration:

Press Config. type, select the desired type
and confirm with ok.
konf-typ
There are three configuration types available:

Single:
All prints of the order are printed on the same format.
Combiprint:
Depending on the layout an image is printed repeatedly either in different sizes (combi-
print) or in the same size (ID or passport prints) on one sheet of paper.
Reproduction:
For example for images created with programs like Adobe PhotoShop or exposures
creatively falsified. The image files of an order are printed without the automatic image
improvement and without image size adaptation so that the prints correspond precisely to
the original. If there is a difference between image and print size the result will be a
border or loss of image information.
Package:
Up to four configurations to print an image on several sheets of different sizes.
The following table shows, which parameters or calculation routines are effective during
reproduction and dTFS:
Reproduction dTFS off dTFS on

Color management no yes yes
Sharpness - edges no yes yes
Logic for individual images no no yes
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-55

7.10.11.3 Defining Product Configurations

Standard:
The configuration may be defined as standard configuration. The standard configuration is
shown in the first position of the respective configuration listings.
Type of adaptation:
The adaptation type decides how the image information is adapted to the selected print
size if aspect ratio of image and print size are not corresponding. There are four
adaptation types:
1. In case of the option Fit image to paper the complete image information will be
used. As the cut length is considered here, this may result in white borders on the
print.
2. In case of the option Fill print the image information fills the complete paper format.
As the cut length is considered here, part of the image information may be lost
(cropped image information).
3. In case of Adjust: shorter side (to paper width) the complete image information is
printed to fill the paper format.
The shorter (narrower) side of the image is adapted to the paper width, the longer side
determines the cut length.
4. In case of Adjust: longer side (to the paper width) the complete image information
is printed to fill the paper format. Only if the size is shorter than the minimum cut
length this will result in a white border.
The longer side of the image is adapted to the paper width, the shorter (narrower) side
determines the cut length.
3003_105
Configuration type:
Configuration type Single displays all the buttons; the types Combiprint,
Reproduction and Package show some inactive buttons.
Border prints:
With very wide borders the image is reduced accordingly; in extreme cases even to
only a few pixels.
dTFS
The default setting, dTFS active or inactive can be set up individually for each
configuration. The default setting can then be changed temporarily via Change
configuration.
7-56 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

dTFS is not used in the following cases, even if it is activated:

– If the header of the file indicates that the image was modified with an image editor.
– If a correction was used since probably intentional color casts would be neutralized by
dTFS.
– If three sides of the image show the same color or white, since this indicates that such
an image has been created by an image editor.
Configuration type Single

Settings
Product config.
New or Change
Activate Standard if necessary 7
Easy Print
Specify the name for configuration display in
Easy Print mode or select No.
Select the Config. type
Border / Border color
If a border is desired select or enter a border
widths. Press Border color and select a
color.
Note:
305_single Press Border color to open the next screen,
see Ö 7.10.3.3
Image adjustment:
Select the desired configuration or select Off
Indexprint
Back print
Correction
Autosave
Front print
Select Paper config. and Cut length.
Select one of the four adaptation modes:
Fit image to paper
Fill print
Adjust: shorter side
Adjust: longer side
Specify the quantity
Activate dTFS , if required
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-57

Configuration type Combiprint

Explanation of the buttons, see Ö
Additional button compared to the Single
configuration type:
Combiprint
Select the desired configuration
305_combi
Configuration type Reproduction

305_repro
7-58 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Configuration type Package
Information about the button Active:

If the function is deactivated the settings are not accessible (faded display).
The settings can be changed later temporarily, i.e. for the current order, via the Change
configuration button.

Different buttons compared to the Single

configuration type:
Define print order:
Select print order 1
Press Active and the enter the settings 7
for print order 1.
Select print order 2 and enter the
settings.
Continue until the package is
completely defined (max. four print
orders).
305_pack
Standard screen:
The configuration list shows how many print
order the package configuration includes.
Example (see right in the list):
P3 = three print orders
pack_1
Standard screen:
Print order 1 of the package configuration is
displayed like in all other configurations (see
screen top / middle).
Quantity, format, and surface for print order
2, 3, and 4 are shown right of the order number.
Example (see right in the list):
P3 = three print orders
pack_2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-59

7.11 Saving Settings and Configurations

Save the settings:
– After first startup of the machine and setup of machines settings and configurations.
– After major modifications of settings and/or configurations.
– Before the main software or a software component is enabled.
Saving the settings on an external storage

medium:
Settings
Save settings
Save the settings:

Select the storage location:
Press the symbol.
If you selected a memory card or CD
insert the respective medium.
Upon selection of the symbol for a
memory card, a following screen opens,
see Ö following screen display
Start saving
XML export for support:

The contents of the database are copied.
323
HDD or CD
If you selected CD:
Insert CD
Start export
Refresh display, if necessary:

Read in the cards again
Select the desired memory card(s)
Start Backup
326
7-60 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.12 Load Settings and Configurations

Settings
Load settings
Load settings:
Select the storage location where the
backup copy is kept:
Press the symbol.
If you selected a memory card or CD
insert the respective medium with the
backup copy.
Select the file.
Machine settings
Check the desired data 7
Start loading
324
XML import from support:
The contents of the database stored last with
XML export is loaded again.
HDD or CD
If you selected CD:
Insert CD
Start import
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-61

7.12.1 Delete Backup

Settings
Load settings
Delete Backup
324
7-62 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13 Operation
Note:
Insert only one medium in die image box workstation as there is only one symbol for
all card readers.
7.13.1 Preparing Print Orders

Digital orders are prepared completely on the image box workstation. They are then
collected by the d-lab.1. When and which network orders are collected, and if these
orders are printed automatically or by operator control, can be set up on the d-lab (see Ö
Order selection in Chapter 8).
Conditions for prints on the d-lab.1:

1. Only the formats jpg, bmp, and tif (uncompressed) can be processed.
2. A single file should not exceed 110 MByte (tif, bmp; as well as jpg unpacked: The real 7
unpacked size of jpg files cannot be recognized!) Bigger files are downscaled before
they are transferred to d-workflow / d-bridge.
3. The total order must be smaller than 400 MByte, otherwise there will be handling
problems.
4. For digital images with an aspect ratio of 3:4 print formats with the same aspect ratio
should be created since otherwise too much image information is lost.
7.13.1.1 Input and Output Formats for Image Files

Input Output
external media to image box workstation to d-lab.1
(see Ö tables) (only BMP, JPEG, TIF)
Supported Input Formats on the image box workstation

Supported File extension Others / restrictions
Adobe PhotoShop .psd 24 Bit RLE
Animated Cursor .ani 4 Bit
Bitmap: Windows and OS2 .bmp RGB1, RGB16, RGB24, RGB32, RGB4, RLE4, RGB8, RLE8
Clipboard .clp 24 Bit
Enhanced Metafile .emf 24 Bit
FlashPix .fpx 24 Bit JPEG
GEM IMG .img 8 Bit RLE
GIF .gif —
IFF .iff 24 Bit
IOCA .ica ioca-g3-1d, ioca-g3-2d, ioca-g4, ioca-ibm, ioca-uncomp,
raw-ioca-g3-1d, raw-ioca-g3-2d, raw-ioca-g4, raw-ioca-ibm,
raw-ioca-umcomp
ITG .itg, .cit RLE1
JPEG .jpg —
Kodak PhotoCD Image .pcd 24 Bit
LEAD .cmp lead1, lead24, lead8
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-63

Supported File extension Others / restrictions

MacPaint .mac 1 Bit RLE
MacPict .pct, .pict 24 Bit RLE
MS Paint .msp 1 Bit RLE
Paintbrush .pcx Version 5 and 24 Bit RLE
PBM .pbm 1 Bit
PGM .pgm —
PNG .png png1, png24, png32, png4, png8
PostScript .eps 24 Bit
PPM .ppm —
Scitex Continuous Tone .sct, .ct uncomp24
Silicon Graphics Image .sgi 24 Bit
SUN Raster .ras 24 Bit
Targa TGA .tga 24 Bit
TIFF .tif, .tiff tif-ccitt, tif-ccitt-g3-1d, tif-ccitt-g3-2d, tif-ccitt-g4, tif-prgb, tif-
uncomp-rgb, tif12, tif16, tif24, tif24-cmyk, tif24-ycbcr, tif32,
tif4, tif48, tif64, tif8, tif8-prgb, LZW
TIFF .tif, .tiff tif24-jpeg-lossless, tif24-jpeg-ycbcr-411, tif24-jpeg-ycbcr-422,
tif24-jpeg-ycbcr-444 (will not be burned)
Windows Cursor .cur 24 Bit (burn: only the “Large” directory)
WinFax .wfx —
Windows Metafile .wmf 24 Bit
Wireless Bitmap .wbmp 1 Bit
Xionics SMP .smp g3-1d, g3-2d, g4, uncomp
XWindows Bitmap .xwd 32 Bit
X Bitmap .xbm 1 Bit
X Pixmap .xpm 8 Bit
Input formats not supported by the image box workstation (partly not shown)
Not supported File extension Others / restrictions
Acrobat .pdf Will probably be supported in the future.
CUT .cut 8 Bit
DICOM .dic —
EXIF .exf, .tif, .jpg —
FAX .fax —
FAX .g3 —
GIF .gif Protected by license
IFF .lbm 24 Bit
JBIG .jbg, .jbig —
JPEG .jpg, .jpeg, .jtf jpg12, jpg16, jpg24, jpg8
Leadwave .cmw Requires CMW plug-in
MS Fax .awd —
MO;DCA PTOCA .ptk —
TIFF .tif, .tiff tif-jbig, tif-lzwrgb, tif2, tif24-lzwrgb, tif3, tif5, fit6, tif7
(partly because of licenses)
Windows Icon .ico, .icon 24 Bit
WordPerfect Graphic .wpg Only raster format
7-64 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13.2 Order Handling – Overview
7.13.2.1 Simple Standard Orders for Prints of Digital Images

The print mode Easy is the fastest mode to print orders corresponding to the following
conditions:
– The order includes all images of one or several directories on a medium, e.g. camera
memory card.
– The desired print format is a frequently ordered format in the laboratory. Therefore the
setup defines that the respective configuration is shown in the Easy dialog.
– Since a temporary modification of configurations in Easy mode is not possible, the
order must not require any changes. Which means the number of prints per image is 1
or 2, always provided Easy configurations for "two-each" have been set up.
– The order can be processed without preview.
7
7.13.2.2 Orders of Digital Images Requiring Configuration Changes or Preview Function
Orders subject to the following conditions are printed in Standard mode:
– The order specifies individual images of one or several directories on a medium, e.g.
camera memory card.
– The desired print format and/or the ordered number of copies (number of prints per
image) do not correspond to any of the configurations offered in Easy dialog.
– The order requires temporary changes in a configuration.
– The prints of an order should be corrected or improved. This is only possible with the
preview functions.
– The same applies to the creation of special products, such as greeting cards.
7.13.2.3 Orders of Prints to be Scanned

Orders in which prints must be scanned are printed in Standard mode.
7.13.2.4 Local Orders to Burn CDs

Theoretically these orders cannot only be processed in Standard mode but also in Easy
mode. This depends on the configuration of the Easy dialog, i.e. if it includes the burning
of CDs, and also if the order can be assigned to the category "simple standard orders", see
Ö 7.13.2.1.
7.13.2.5 Orders Digitized on the d-lab.1 for CD Burning

These orders are always processed in the print mode CD from network.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-65

7.13.2.6 Print Modes

The customers’ orders are recorded with respect to the print modes and then passed on to
the respective machines for further processing. Local orders are handled within the image
box workstation (e.g. CD local), all other orders are forwarded by d-workflow or d-bridge to
the respective machine or into the Internet (Web Album).
Order setup:
1. Easy
It is not possible to select individual image files on a storage medium.
Orders are processed by means of the respective products and transferred to d-
workflow or d-bridge. The operator cannot change the given products.
2. Network: CD from network
This is for CD burning orders.
3. Standard
This option allows selection of individual image files on a storage medium, e.g. for
reorders.
Furthermore the operator has a possibility to influence the final results: i.e. the
operator can select another configuration for an order or change the configuration.

Print modes
_m1
Note:
No label will be printed if an order is aborted.
7-66 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13.3 Easy Mode

Preset products:
The left hand side of the screen shows the product configurations which have been
defined for the Easy dialog. If the user selects a product, details are displayed on the right,
in case of print orders these are e.g. number of prints (PPF), the print format and the paper
surface. Further partial products are shown by symbols:
Symbol Meaning
Print
Indexprint
CD Burning
Internet upload to Web album 7
Combiprint
Remote computer
Show configuration:
Details about the product configuration can be displayed but not changed (see section
below).
Start:
If the image files on the inserted medium are all in one single directory, press Start to
create the order: All image files will be included.
If the medium has image files in several directories, a box opens showing all directories
with image files. The operator selects the desired files in the individual directories. To
create the order press Start.
The progress bar of the order setup is displayed:
1. The images are copied to the hard disk.
Note:
This process can be interrupted with Stop.
2. Then a message is displayed indicating that the medium can be removed.
3. The PfDF file is transmitted to the d-workflow / d-bridge. Afterwards a popup is
displayed indicating that the Easy order has been successfully created.
4. After confirmation of the popup the display goes back to the Easy screen.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-67


Print modes
Easy
Select product configuration
Insert the medium
Show configuration:
see Ö 7.13.3.1
Press Start
358
Further procedures depend how the image
files are saved on the inserted medium:
Image files in one directory:
Order setup starts.
Image files in several directories: The
opposite screen is opened. Select the
desired image files from the displayed
directories and press Start:
Order setup starts.
094
Confirm the progress displays:
After the images have been copied to
hard disk, confirm the message with OK
and remove the medium.
And once the PfDF file has been
transferred to the d-workflow, confirm
the message with OK.
7-68 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13.3.1 Show configuration

The configuration can only be viewed but not changed.

Print modes
Easy or Standard
Show configuration
Close
Return to the previous screen.
049
7.13.3.2 Order in d-workflow

d-workflow shows the order that has just been made. The d-lab.1 collects the order from
the d-workflow and processes it.
work_1
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-69

7.13.4 Network: CD Burning

Autosave on the d-lab.1:
If films are developed or scanned on the d-lab.1 and a CD was ordered for these films, the
d-lab will send these orders to the d-workflow. The orders are displayed on the image box
workstation and can be made there.
List of orders:
The red status line shows the number of orders. If the option Load CD orders autom. has
been activated this number corresponds to the orders shown in the list. If the option is
inactive Refresh the list manually.
Orders can be processed with or without preview:
Without preview: After selecting the order in the list press Burn CD.
With preview: Press Preview + burn CD.
7.13.4.1 CD Burning – without Preview

Print modes
CD from network
Activate or deactivate the option Load CD
orders automatically.
If the function was inactive, press Refresh to
show all waiting orders.
Delete an order if necessary
Select an order, which must not be
processed, in the list and press Delete.
Select an order in the list and insert a blank
CD.
Start the order:
With preview:
Press Preview + burn CD,
200 see Ö 7.13.4.2
Without preview:
Press Burn CD:
The progress is displayed.
Once the order is completed, confirm
the messages in the popups with OK.
Afterwards the screen Network order:
Burn CD is displayed again.
Remove the CD.
7-70 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13.4.2 CD Burning – with Preview

The preview appears if you pressed Preview
+ burn CD in the previous screen.
Use the following buttons to rotate all or just
individual images.
Rotate all
Select individual images and press
Rotate left 90°.
Select individual images and press
Rotate right 90°.
Delete images:
Select the image and press Delete.
A blank CD has been inserted before.
Press Burn CD:
The progress is displayed. 7
Once the order is completed, confirm the
204 messages in the popups with OK. Afterwards
the screen Network order: Burn CD is
displayed again.
Remove the CD.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-71

7.13.5 Standard
Use this print mode to create orders:
1. of image files loaded from external media (CD or camera cards), see Ö 7.13.5.1
2. of scanned images, see 7.14.3
7.13.5.1 New Orders: Standard: Loading Image Files from Storage Media
Preview:
Activate this function if orders should be prepared with preview. The preview offers
options for image correction and image improvement, as well as special functions such as
cropping enlargements, colored borders, and text for greeting cards.
Thumbnails:
Activate this function if thumbnails should be displayed in addition to the file names.
Explanation of the drive symbols:
Symbol Drive, type 500 Drive, type 700

External cards: External cards:
– PCMCIA-Slot – xD
– Secure Digital – Multi Media Card – PCMCIA-Slot
– Memory Stick – Secure Digital – Multi Media Card
– Compact Flash + Microdrive – Memory Stick
– Smart Media – Compact Flash + Microdrive
– USB – Smart Media
– USB
CD-RW / DVD CD-RW / DVD
Remote computer Remote computer
Scanner Scanner
7-72 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


Print modes
Standard
Activate or deactivate Preview.
Activate or deactivate Thumbnails.
Prepare the new order, call up a finished
order again or start waiting orders:
New orders:
Insert the medium in the image box
workstation and press the drive symbol
or
Press Saved orders, see 7.13.5.2, or
Press Waiting orders, see 7.13.5.3
Select another product:
Press on the drop-down menu displayed 7
202_m under Configuration and select another
product.
If the images are not stored in folders, they
will be listed under Available images.
Otherwise select the folder where the
images are stored. Press to go back to the
superior folder.
Transmit the available images to the list of
Selected images:
Add all of them with

Select individual images and add with
.
Deselect images, if necessary, with
(all) or with (selected).
Change order number:
Press Change? and enter a new number.
Show configuration
see 7.13.3.1
Change configuration
see 7.13.5.3
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-73

7.13.5.2 Saved Orders

The order buffer stores all orders (only images, no configurations). With the button Saved
orders they can be selected and carried out again.
Note:
Orders with the same order number can be clearly identified b date / time.
Possible actions:
– Print the complete order again.
– Prepare the complete order with another configuration.
– Select individual images of the order in preview and print again.
– Delete an order.

Print modes
Standard
Saved orders:
see Ö following screen
202_m
Select the desired orders in the list and load
them into the Standard screen with Load.
Select orders which are no longer needed
and remove them from the buffer with
Delete.
216
7-74 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13.5.3 Waiting Orders

Orders can first be prepared, stored in the order buffer, and later they can all be processed
together. A listing of prepared orders can be called up via the button Waiting orders.
Waiting orders , which were selected from the list and processed, are deleted in the order
buffer.
Note:
Orders with the same order number can be clearly identified by date / time.
Possible actions:
– Prepare orders
– Execute orders
– Delete orders
7
Print modes
Standard
Waiting orders:
see Ö following screen
202_m
Prepare further orders:
Press Prepare the order to go back to the
Standard screen
Start processing of prepared orders:
Mark the desired orders in the list
Start the orders
Select orders which are no longer needed
and remove them from the order buffer with
Delete.
217
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-75

7.13.5.4 Changing Configurations
Border prints:
only a few pixels.

Print modes
Standard
Free text (for back print)
Config. Type
Border / Border color
If a border is desired select or enter a border
widths. Press Border color and select a
color.
Note:
Press Border color to open the next screen,
see Ö 7.10.3.3
Image adjustment:
Select the desired configuration or select Off
320
Back print
Correktion
Front print
Select Paper config. and Cut length.
Select one of the four adaptation modes:
Fit image to paper
Fill print
Adjust: shorter side
Adjust: longer side
Specify the quantity
Activate dTFS , if required
Change correction: see 7.13.5.5
Show configuration: see 7.13.3.1
7-76 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13.5.5 Changing corrections

Print modes
Standard
Change correction
Red-eyes correction / Portrait logic:
Set Yes, No, or Standard.
This setting applies to all images in the
current order.
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Density
DCT (Details)
Sharpness – edges
SAT Saturation 7
322
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-77

7.13.5.6 Starting an Order Setup

Start:
Press Start (without preview) to create an order. The progress of the order setup is
displayed:
1. The images are copied to the hard disk.

2. The PfDF file is transmitted to the d-workflow / d-bridge. Afterwards a popup is
displayed indicating that the order has been successfully created.
3. After confirmation of the popup the display goes back to the Standard screen.
Note:
As of Version 1.1 the selected configuration is kept after completion of the order
instead of always switching back and offering Standard configuration.

Print modes
Standard
Load images of a new order or press Saved
orders.
Activate or deactivate Preview.
Press Start
Further procedures depend on the fact if
Preview is activated or deactivated:
Order setup without preview:
After an order has been set up, confirm
the messages with OK and remove the
medium.
Order setup with preview:
The screen Preview: Standard is
202_m displayed, see 7.14 on the following
page.
7-78 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.14 Standard: Preview

Note:
The buttons Special and Image editing can only be activated if a single image was
selected.

Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Select the desired images:
Press Select all
or
press on the individual images
Color / density corrections:
7
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Density
203
Press Change configuration if you want to
change the configuration for the selected
images.
Activate the red eyes correction.
Special or
Image editing
Select the desired image and press
Special (see Ö 7.14.2) or
Image editing (see Ö 7.14.1).
The follow-up screens are explained in the
corresponding sections.
If required:
Press Refresh:
The preview is updated, which means
that all entered changes or corrections
are displayed.
Select them and Delete.
After images have been improved and/or
edited press OK:
The order is created.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-79

7.14.1 Standard: Image Editing

The image is shown in an enlarged view in addition to the original view. The enlarged
view may be rotated with the symbol at the side.

Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Image editing
Color/dens. correction
Opens a follow-up screen, see 7.14.1.1.
Crop
Image enhancement
Reset
Changes made in the follow-up screens are
canceled.
205 Replace
Return to the preview. The edited image
overwrites the original image.
Add
Return to the preview. The edited image is
saved in addition to the original. In the
screen Preview: Standard both images are
shown.
7-80 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.14.1.1 Standard: Image Editing Color / Density Corrections


Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Image editing
Color / density corrections:
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Density 7
209
Return to the Preview screen.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-81

7.14.1.2 Standard: Image Editing, Crop

Note:
If the aspect ratio of pictures is changed, create configurations with variable cut length
to avoid white borders or loss of image information.

Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Image editing
Crop
Aspect ratio:
If necessary use the arrows to adapt e.g. the
aspect ratio of a scanned image to the
original (also see Ö Note, above):
Change vertically
Change horizontally
Press the arrow key to reach the following
settings:
Specify the Crop size
207
Rotate if necessary
Define the Crop position
Define crop area
If necessary discard the defined crop area
with Reset and start again.
7-82 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.14.1.3 Standard: Image Editing, Image Improvement


Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Image editing
Image enhancement
Activate the red eyes correction.
Image enhancement:
Sharpness – Edges
SAT saturation
Grain 7
Enter corrections by means of the arrows
(left and right):
208 can be used to go to other corrections,
see the next screen
Image enhancement:
ACT (Surfaces)
Gradation
DCT (Details)
(left and right):
can be used to go to other corrections,
see the next screen
208_2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-83

Image enhancement:
Brightness: Lights
Brightness: Shadows
(left and right):
can be used to return to the other
corrections
208_03
7.14.1.4 Brightness: Lights, Medium Tones, Shadows

These parameters allow separate control of the brightness in light, medium and shady
light conditions, and thus influence the gradation in the individual brightness areas.
Lights, medium tones and shadows can be made brighter or darker.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Brightness Effect:
Shifting towards + Shifting towards –
Lights Lights become brighter Lights become darker
Medium Tones Medium tones become brighter Medium tones become darker
Shadows Shadows become brighter Shadows become darker
For the Indian and maybe also the Asian market the parameter Brightness: Lights could
be reduced, because then the highlights become softer and blemishes on the skin will not
show as much (make-up effect), which corresponds to the general taste there. The
parameter Brightness: Medium tones could be slightly increased to intensify this effect.
Moreover, Brightness: Shadows should be reduced to make hair and eyes show darker.
For the European market a reduction of Brightness: Lights in portraits may also be an
advantage. Shadows which are too dark can be made lighter by increasing the parameter
Brightness: Shadows.
7-84 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.14.2 Standard: Special

These functions allow the production of greeting cards (texts and colored borders).
Note:
Reset of changes:
Changes can only be reset under the following conditions:
The original image has not yet been overwritten (see Ö Replace) and the modified
image has not yet been included in the order in addition to the original (see Ö Add)
Border prints:
only a few pixels.
7
Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Special
Text
Border
Reset
Changes made in the follow-up screens are
canceled (see Ö Note, above).
Replace
Return to the preview. The edited image
overwrites the original image.
206
Add
Return to the preview. The edited image is
saved in addition to the original. In the
screen Preview: Standard both images are
shown.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-85

7.14.2.1 Standard: Special, Text


Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Special
Text
Press Enter text and type the text in the
input screen.
Position text
Rotate text
Press the arrow keys
Press or to reduce the text or enlarge

it.
Format text
212 Opens a follow-up screen, see 7.14.2.2.
7.14.2.2 Standard: Special, Format Text

Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Special
Text
Format text
Select Font
Select the text color:
Press Color and select a color in the next
screen, or define a new color: see 7.10.3.3
and 7.10.3.4.
Format the text:
B bold
I italic
215
U underline
Align the text:
left justified
centered
right justified
7-86 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.14.2.3 Standard: Special, Border
Border prints:
only a few pixels.

Print modes
Standard
Preview activated
Start
Special
Border
Width
Specify the border width
Select the border color: 7
Press Color and select a color in the next
screen, or define a new color: see 7.10.3.3
and 7.10.3.4.
213
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-87

7.14.3 Standard: Scan Image

Print modes
Standard
Press (symbol for the scanner):
The opposite screen is displayed.
Select format
Insert the original to be scanned in the
scanner: bottom left, crosswise (shorter side
aligned on the left, longer side in front)
Press Scanning:
The image is scanned.
This is indicated by an info-popup with the
respective message.
After the scanning a screen opens offering
image editing functions, see Ö 7.14.3.1.
211
7-88 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.14.3.1 Modifying a Scanned Image

Note:
If the aspect ratio of pictures is changed, create configurations with variable cut length
to avoid white borders or loss of image information; see Ö 7.14.1.2

Print modes
Standard
was pressed
Scanning
Opens a follow-up screen,
7
see Ö 7.14.1.1.
Crop
see Ö 7.14.1.2.
Image enhancement
see Ö 7.14.1.3.
Reset
210 Changes made in the follow-up screens are
canceled.
Note:
The scanner used last is memorized even after a restart.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-89

7.15 Deleting Network Orders

d-lab.1:
The final deletion of network orders depends on the installed Software version:
– From Main Software 08.00D, see Ö d-lab.1 Main-Software as of 08.00D:
The orders can be deleted in the standard mode on the d-lab.1.
When Delete order is touched, an inquiry window appears with the following buttons:
– Delete:
The order is deleted temporarily. It is still fetched by the d-lab.
– Delete definitely:
The order is deleted on the d-workflow.
– Cancel:
The order is not deleted.
– For all previous versions, see Ö d-lab.1 Main-Software up to 08.00D:
Final deletion of orders is not possible on the d-lab.
If an order is deleted on the d-lab, it is returned to the d-workflow and is fetched again
by the d-lab. For this reason, the order must be deleted on the image box workstation.
d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus and d-lab.3: Oorders can be deleted directly.
d-lab.1 Main-Software as of 08.00D

Print modes
Standard
Mark the desired order in the standard
screen and touch Delete order. An inquiry
window appears.
Touch Delete, Delete definitely or Cancel.
7-90 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 Main-Software up to 08.00D

On the d-lab.1:
Print modes
Standard
Suppress the acceptance of network orders
on d-lab:
Order selection
Mark Accept none
Mark orders to be deleted in the standard
screen on the d-lab and touch Delete order.
An inquiry window appears.
Touch Delete
On the image box workstation: 7

When an order is deleted on the image box
workstation, a difference is made between two
cases:
1. Image box workstation with d-bridge
(no d-workflow license):
Switch the image box workstation
OFF/ON:
When it starts, the inquiry comes up
whether all old orders should be
deleted).
Answer the inquiry by Yes.
2. Image box workstation with d-workflow:

Single orders are deleted on the d-
workflow user interface. No orders are
deleted when the image box
workstation is switched OFF/ON.
On the d-lab.1:
If desired, allow network orders to be
accepted again on the d-lab:
Order selection
Mark Accept all or
Only for available paper
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-91

7.16 Test
This is for the processing of orders for test purposes.
7.16.1 Calling up the Test Screen

Test
Diagnosis print
The next screen will be displayed.
_m3
7.16.2 Starting the Tests

Test
Diagnosis print
Standard order
Mixed order
CD
Indexprint
Web Album
Check the respective test orders.
Start
The selected tests will be executed.
270
7-92 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.17 Finishing
7.17.1 Changing to kiosk Software

The AgfaPhoto kiosk Software allows the end customers to prepare the order themselves.
If the kiosk Software is installed on the image box, press the respective button to switch
to this program.
Note:
The path to the kiosk Software is specified under Settings > Machine settings >
Other settings, see Ö 7.8.

Finish
Change to kiosk-Software
The program user interface is displayed. 7
_m5
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-93

7.17.2 Start Computer Based Training (CBT)

The interactive training program (CBT = Computer Based Training) is included on one of
the two enclosed CDs.

Finish
Start training (CBT)
The next screen is displayed.
_m5
Insert the CD with the training program in
the drive.
Press OK:
The training program starts.
Start cbt
7-94 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.17.3 Activating the image box Control Center (ICC)

Functions / Displays of the external program:
– Statistics
– Current software versions
– Machine ID
– Drive letter of the card reader
– Connected hardware
– TouchScreen calibration
– Settings of screen saver
– Diagnostics (log files)
– Selection of image box application
7
Finish
Start Control Center (ICC)
The user interface of the program will be
displayed.
_m5
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-95

7.17.4 Finish / Shutdown

Finish
The next screen is displayed.
_m5
Finish the program:
Press Terminate
or
Finish the program and switch off:

Press Terminate and switch off
501
7-96 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.18 Information Area

Buttons:
The buttons in the information area are always accessible. Info and help screens can be
reached any time.
Status information, e.g. solution temperatures
Context-related help function for all screens and error messages
If the machine does not react any more to operator entries, this key may be used to
trigger a new start of the software.
The status line is left of the abovementioned buttons. It shows: information, warnings,
requests.
7.19 Status Information

Call-up in any screen with in the info area. The screen Status information opens.
Press Order Info or Version Info to open the next screen.
Call up information:
Press the button on the respective
assembly shown on the screen.
Press one of the buttons on the right of
the screen.
052
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-97

7.19.1 Calling up the Order Info

Displayed information:
– Number of orders waiting in the network queue sorted according to CD orders and
print orders.
– Connection status
Note:
All orders in the network are displayed: If the server (PC with d-workflow) manages
several d-labs or image box workstations, it can also display the orders that the d-
workflow assigned to other machines, e.g. to another image box.
064
7-98 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.19.2 Calling up the Version Info

Module and Version lists the main software (core) and all the enabled optional
components with the respective version numbers.
The machine ID is displayed in the bottom left corner of the screen below License.
063
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-99

7.20 Help
7.20.1 Help Function for the Active Screen

Call-up in any screen with in the info area.
The help window shows explanations with respect to the screen in which was pressed.
Further buttons are offered on the right side of the help window:
− Help index
Opens a screen in which the titles of all screens are listed in alphabetical order. By
touching the title the corresponding help text opens.
− Close goes back to the screen in which was pressed.
7.20.2 Navigation in the Help Window

Navigating in the help window:
Scroll through the text with
Return to text beginning with Ï
If necessary call up the Help index and
select the respective subject.
Exit the help function with Close.
051
7-100 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.21 Trigger a New Start (Stop Button)

Call-up in any screen with in the info area. A window opens for selection of the
desired type of the new startup.

Start again
With user Backup
With system Backup
Cancel
neustart
7
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-101

7.22 Popup Windows

Popup windows are opened in the active screen if a confirmation or an action by the
operator is required:
− Error popup
Appears in case of wrong operator entries, consistency errors and system errors. These
errors have to be removed at once to continue working.
− Warning popup
If there is a risk of data loss.
− Info popup
Operator prompting; queries when changing to a different screen, indication of still
running processes.
– Query popup
When the operator has to make a decision.
7.22.1 Info, Query, and Warning Popup

Text information and buttons in the popups vary with the circumstances.
Therefore we will show here only an example.

The popup closes.
066
7-102 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.22.2 Error Popup

This popup window opens automatically if an operating error is made.
Text information and buttons in the popups vary with the circumstances.
Therefore we will show here only an example.
Press OK:
The error popup closes.
054
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-103

7.23 Setting Brightness and Contrast

Under certain circumstances it may be necessary to readjust brightness and contrast of
the monitor, e.g. bright backlight.
Adjusting tools:
Pointed object (e.g. ball pen), to press the switch on the back of the machine.
Note:
The monitor must be switched on (green LED
lights).
If the green LED is off, switch on monitor:

Press switch (1)
Press switch (5)
Press switches (3) and (4) and hold until the
submenu PC is displayed.
Press switch (5) until the line Brightness is
3003_100 selected.
Switch functions: Change the value:
1 Monitor on/off
to increase press (3)
2 Close
3 Right or +
to decrease press (4)
4 Left or – Press switch (5) and hold until the line
5 Menu
Contrast is reached.
Change the value:
to increase press (3)
to decrease press (4)
Save and finish: Press switch (2) twice.
7-104 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.24 Troubleshooting
7.24.1 Software Problems
7.24.1.1 New Start

Press the switch on the back of the machine:
Normally the system executes a shutdown
and then switches off the image box
workstation.
Press the switch again after a waiting time
of at least 5 seconds.
If the software fails to react and a system
shutdown is therefore not possible:
Switch off the image box workstation by
pressing the switch for a longer time (at 7
least 3 seconds), and switch on again after
5 seconds by pressing the switch again.
If this fails:
Disconnect the mains plug and connect
again after approx. 10 seconds.
Press the switch.
If the system also fails to restart with this
procedure: see Ö 0.
7.24.1.2 New Installation of the Software for the image box workstation
A new installation is required if a malfunction cannot be repaired by restarting.
Note:
All settings will be lost by the installation!
The system restarts several times during the installation.
Insert CD no. 1 (included in the shipment) in

the CD drive.
Restart the machine.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 7-105

7.24.1.3 Selecting the Application

See Ö 7.2 Preparing the image box for usage of the workstation Software
7.24.1.4 Restoring the Settings

Settings
Load settings
See Ö 7.12
7-106 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Production on the d-lab.1
8 Production on the d-lab.1
8.1 Prerequisites
– Machine and user-specific settings performed
– Order configurations created
– d-lab switched on, ready to operate and prepared for the first order:
– Negative mask inserted
– Paper magazines inserted
– Machine calibrated
– Operator logged on.
These actions were described already in previous chapters:

– see Ö Chemicals, chapter 3
– see Ö Settings and Configurations, chapter 4
8
– see Ö Tests, chapter 5
– see Ö Preparing conventional orders, chapter 6
8.2 Order Handling – Overview
8.2.1 Version Dependent Order Handling

Order Versions
Film development d-lab.1 with film processing
Printing of films (negative, slide) d-lab.1 with film processing and d-lab.1s
Printing digital images all versions (partly optional)
CD burning all versions (partly optional or via the image box workstation)
8.2.2 Film Processing only: All processable Film Sizes

1. Load the film magazine
2. Call up the Standard print mode
3. Deactivate Print after processing
4. Push the film magazine in the Film Processor
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-1

Production on the d-lab.1 d-lab.1 family: Operation
8.2.3 Film Processing and Printing in the Easy Mode: Film Size 135
Films 135 can be printed directly from the Film Processor. The films are advanced
automatically into the film drive after processing and are scanned.
2. Mount the negative mask 135
3. Call up the Easy print mode
4. Push the film magazines in the Film Processor
5. Select the configuration.
The films are drawn in, processed and scanned. Then the prints are produced.
8.2.4 Film Processing and Printing in the Standard Mode: Film Size 135
Films 135 can be printed directly from the Film Processor. The films are advanced
automatically into the film drive after processing and are scanned.
2. Insert a negative mask 135
4. Select a configuration under Incl. processing
5. For the automatic film transfer from the Film Processor to the film drive, activate
Printing after processing
6. Push the film magazines in the Film Processor:
The films are drawn in, processed and scanned.
7. In the standard mode, the orders are shown in the list Order handling continued, are
calculated and printed or prepared for the preview, see Ö 8.15.
Note:
The configuration can be altered or the Preview called up as long as an order has not
yet been calculated for printing, see Ö 8.15.
8.2.5 Film Processing and Printing: Film Sizes 110 and IX240
These film types cannot be handled automatically. They are deposited on the dryer of the
Film Processor after processing.
2. Push the film magazine in the Film Processor (settings in the standard mode have no
effect)
If necessary, change the negative mask and insert the processed film (at present only
IX240) in the Feeder:
The film is scanned. The order is shown in the list Order handling continued, is
calculated and printed or prepared for the preview, see Ö 8.15.The configuration can
be altered or the Preview called up as long as an order has not yet been calculated for
printing, see Ö 8.15.
8-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.2.6 Reorders
8.2.6.1 Films with extended DX code

1. Call up the Reorder print mode
2. Insert the negative mask and select the Film type
3. Select the following configurations in conformity with the order:
– Prints:
Select Print format and Back print
– CD or Internet Upload:
Select Autosave configuration
– Prints plus CD or Internet Upload:
Select Print format, Back print and Autosave configuration
4. Activate Preview, if required:

– Preview is deactivated:
The scanned negatives are printed automatically.
5. Preview is activated: 8
The order is shown in the list Order handling continued in the Standard screen and
can be called up for image enhancement / image editing, see Ö 8.15. Edit the
Reorder list and close it with OK
6. Put the film strips in the Film Feeder one after the other and finish with Order end
7. While the current order is running, a Reorder list can be edited for the next Reorder.
8. Orders for which the preview has been activated remain in the standard mode on the
display until they are selected by the operator for further handling.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-3

8.2.6.2 Films without extended DX code or single negatives

This print mode always works with the preview.
1. Call up the Manual positioning print mode
2. Select another configuration or modify the current configuration:
– Select another configuration in the Dropdown menu or
– Touch Change configuration and change the desired settings in the next screen
3. Insert the film or the single negative:
– Put the film / film strip in the Film Feeder
– Pull out the negative mask, put in the single negative or the short film strip (max.
2 negatives) directly in the negative mask and push the negative mask back in
4. Position the negative and refresh the display
5. Enter corrections:
Color/density correction: YMCD
Image enhancement: SHP, SAT, GRN, GRD, ACT, DCT
6. For the definition of a crop, a colored border etc. call up Image editing, see Ö
8.15 Preview
7. Touch Print to print the current image
8. Position all other negatives of the order, edit them and Print
9. Finish the order with Order end
8-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.2.6.3 Slide prints

1. Call up the print mode Slide print
2. Select another configuration or modify the current configuration:
– Select another configuration in the Dropdown menu or
– Touch Change configuration and modify the desired settings in the next screen
3. Put the slide in the slide mask and push in the mask
4. Enter corrections:
Color/density correction: YMCD
Image enhancement: SHP, SAT, GRN, GRD, ACT, DCT
5. For the definition of the crop, colored border etc. call up Image editing, see Ö
8.15 Preview
6. Print the current image or skip it:
– Touch Print:
The image is printed. It remains in the display so that it can be printed again, e.g.
of another size. 8
– Touch Print + Skip:
The current image is printed. The next image is displayed.
– Touch Skip:
The current image is printed. The next image is displayed.
7. Put all other slides of the order in the slide mask, edit them and Print
6. Finish the order with Order end
8.2.6.4 Network orders

2. Call up Order selection to define the transfer of the orders (e.g. from the image box
workstation)
3. Print the images automatically or edit them:
– Automatic printing: Touch Start order
– Call up the preview: Touch Preview, see Ö 8.15 Preview
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-5

8.2.6.5 File prints

1. Call up the print mode File print
2. Insert an external storage medium if necessary
3. Select a storage location
4. Select the frames
5. Print or edit frames automatically:
– Automatic printing:
Preview deactivated
Touch Start order
– Frame editing:
Preview activated
Touch Start order (see Ö 8.15 Preview)
8.2.6.6 Burning CD
1. On the d-lab.1 / netlab.1 (not d-lab.1 allrounder 2, d-lab.1s plus):
There is no separate print mode for the burning of CDs. When such orders appear, the
operator is requested in a dialog window (Pop-up) to put in a new CD and to remove
the finished one.
The CD is no finalized. This means that other orders of the same customer can be
burned on the same CD when required.
2. On the image box workstation (d-lab.1 allrounder 2, d-lab.1s plus):
Orders are sent to the image box workstation for the burning on CDs. This device has
a special print mode for this: CD from network (see Ö chapter 7).
8-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.3 Print Modes

The customer orders are entered and processed in the print modes. Or they are
transmitted for processing to the executing machines via the order server, or they are sent
to the Internet (Web Album).
Order entry / production:

Note:
The Standard screen offers an overview of all orders to be handled by the d-lab.1:
processed and scanned films, orders to be edited in the preview, orders created on
image box workstation.
1. Easy
Printing of films 135 without preview with or without preceding film processing
2. Standard
– Film processing with or without printing
– Printing of scanned films with or without preview
– Printing of network orders completely prepared on the image box workstation, with
or without preview
8
– Transfer of orders for recording on CDs or to the order server for Internet Upload
3. Reorder
Printing of scanned films/film strips with extended DX code for Reorders with or
without preview.
4. Manual positioning
Printing of scanned films/film strips without extended DX code as well as of short
film strips and single negatives with preview.
5. Slide print
Printing of scanned framed slides with preview.
6. Slide film
Printing of scanned slide films with preview.
7. File print
Printing of digital images from storage media (e.g. camera cards) with or without
preview
Note:
There is no separate print mode for the burning of CDs. The function is controlled by
the Autosave configurations. See Ö Burning CD on the d-lab.1.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-7


Print modes
_m1
Note:
Only one print mode can be used at a time. It is not possible to open several windows
for different print modes.
8.3.1 Print Mode and Negative Mask

The inserted negative mask has to match the current print mode, e.g. slide mask for
slides. If the print mode and the negative mask do not match, a message is displayed in
the status line:
Note:
The change to another print mode always forces an order end.
1. The print mode is changed.

The negative mask does not match the
current print mode.
Mount a matching negative mask.
2. The negative mask is changed.

It does not match the current print mode:
Change the print mode.
8.3.2 Paper Display

In all print modes, the paper surface and the paper width of both paper magazines are
shown in the status line.
8-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.4 Order Number (automatic / manual)

Order numbers are allocated automatically or manually acc. to the settings. See Ö
Machine settings / Other settings in chapter 4.
8.4.1 Order Number, automatic

Automatic is selected under Machine settings / Other settings / Order no. Work
always starts with number 1. The number is then automatically stepped up for the
following orders.
The order number allocated automatically by the machine can be changed by the
operator, if required. This is possible in the following cases:
– As long as the Change? button is displayed below the order number
– Before the film / film strip is drawn in (standard / Reorder)
– Before the first print / slide is calculated (manual positioning / slide print / slide film)
The entered number is stepped up for subsequent orders.

8
8.4.2 Order Number, manual

Manual is selected under Machine settings / Other settings / Order no.:
The order number must be entered manually for each order.
Touch Change? button:

The numeric keypad is shown.
Enter the desired order number and confirm
with OK
numkey
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-9

8.5 Notes regarding the Modification / Change of Configurations
8.5.1 Selecting an Order Configuration

Moment to select a different configuration:
– For films inserted in the Film Feeder by hand, before the film is inserted.
– For films drawn in automatically after processing, before the film magazine is put in
the Film Processor
Touch the indicated configuration under

Incl. processing or Without processing to
display the list.
Select the desired configuration in the list
and confirm with ok.
009_rechts
8-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.5.2 Modifying the Order Configuration

It depends on the settings under Order selection at what time the configuration can be
changed:
– Chronological: As long as an order has not been calculated for printing, the operator
can assign another configuration, or temporarily modify the existing one. These
modifications are not saved in the configuration, they only serve to adjust the number
of prints, the Indexprints or the CDs indicated in the configuration to the current order.
– Manual: At any time.

Print modes
Standard
Mark the order in the list
Modify order
The next screen is opened.
009_rechts
Assign a different configuration or modify
the existing configuration:
Touch the configuration shown under
Configuration and select a different
configuration in the Dropdown list.
or
Touch Edit:
The next screen opens.
106
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-11

Modify the order configuration:

Select Config. type:
Print, Autosave or Index
Mark the desired configuration in the
list Select configuration and transfer it
to the list Selected configurations
with the arrow
If necessary change the Quantity
If the print size has to be changed,
touch Edit and select a different print
size in the next screen.
Save
bb_konfig_ändern
8-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.6 Easy
8.6.1 Simple Standard Orders from digital Images for Prints / Indexprints
Orders corresponding to the following prerequisites can be printed the fastest in the Easy
print mode:
– The order encompasses all images of a medium, e.g. camera card.
– The desired print size is a size that is frequently ordered in the lab. It was therefore
defined in the settings that the corresponding configuration is shown in the Easy
dialog.
– As the temporary modification of configurations is not possible in the Easy mode, the
order must not require such a modification.
– The order can be handled without preview.
8.6.2 Film Processing and Printing in the Easy Mode (Film sizes 135 and IX240) 8
Note:
The area at the bottom right – network orders and button Accept all – is only displayed
if respective Easy settings are entered.

Print modes
Easy
Push the film magazines in the Film
Processor (see Ö 8.8.2.3 Putting the Film
Magazines in the Film Processor):
The next screen is opened (see Ö 8.6.2.1
Selecting a product)
112
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-13

8.6.2.1 Selecting a product

The product configurations defined for the Easy dialog are shown on the left side of the
screen. The activated product is shown under Selected configurations.
Select the desired product configuration and

confirm with OK:
The Easy dialog is displayed again.
Films 135 are drawn in, processed and
scanned, then the prints are printed. See
Ö 8.6.2.2 Status displays in the Easy
dialog.
Films IX240 are deposited on top of the
Film Processor and must be put in the
Film Feeder by hand, see Ö 8.6.3
Printing in the Easy Mode (Film sizes
135 and IX240).
113
8-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.6.2.2 Status displays in the Easy dialog

The respective operating step is shown as follows in the Easy dialog.
Operating step Display position Note

Film processing
Film being processed Bottom left
Film processing finished Bottom right The order is shown here only very briefly. The
following status displays appear in the upper part
of the screen.
Printing
Film being scanned Top left
Prints being calculated Top left
Prints being printed Top left
Prints being processed Top right The displayed order can be removed from the
Sorter as next order.
8
112_2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-15

8.6.3 Printing in the Easy Mode (Film sizes 135 and IX240)
Films IX240 are deposited on top of the Film Processor after processing. The operator
must put them in the Film Feeder by hand.

Print modes
Easy
Put the film in the Film Feeder:
The next screen is opened (see Ö 8.6.3.1
Selecting a product)
112
8.6.3.1 Selecting a product

The product configurations defined for the Easy dialog are shown on the left side of the
screen. The activated product is shown under Selected configurations.
Select the desired configuration in the list

and confirm with OK:
The Easy dialog is displayed again.
The films are drawn in, processed and
scanned, then the prints are printed. See Ö
8.6.2.2 Status displays in the Easy dialog.
113_2
Example: Film size 135
8-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.7 Order Selectionin the Standard Mode

Note:
Before orders are handled, it should be specified whether network orders should be
called from the d-lab.1 / netlab.1 and which ones, and in which order the operator
should handle the orders.

Print modes
Standard
009_links
Click Order selection :
The opposite screen is opened.
360
In this screen, the operator defines which network orders have to be called and in which
order conventional and digital orders have to be handled:
see Ö 8.7.1 Order selection: Network orders
see Ö 8.7.2 Order selection: Order handling continued
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-17

8.7.1 Order Selection: Network Orders

Network orders:
The operator can reject all network orders with Accept none and have them processed
automatically by the d-lab later on, e.g. to use waiting times (times without operator
actions). The list Order handling continued of the Standard screen then only contains
the orders prepared on the d-lab.1.
If the d-lab.1 should accept the network orders, the operator selects one of the other two
options, e.g. prior to a pause (Accept all or Only for available paper).
Explanation of the options:

– Accept all
All orders prepared on the image box workstation are accepted by the d-lab.1. The
orders appear in the list Order handling continued of the Standard screen. A
message comes up if the paper magazine has to be changed.
– Accept none
No network order is accepted.
– Only for available paper
All orders prepared on the image box workstation and not requiring a change of the
paper magazine are accepted. They appear in the list Order handling continued of
the Standard screen.
8.7.2 Order Selection: Order Handling continued

Explanation of the options:
– All automatic (paper available)
Orders not requiring a change of the paper magazine are handled automatically. All
other orders appear in the list with the information "No paper".
– Film automatic / Network manual
– Orders without preview prepared on the d-lab.1 /netlab.1 are handled
automatically.
– Orders with preview prepared on the d-lab.1 /netlab.1 are shown in the list Order
handling continued. They must be started manually by the operator. The same
holds for all orders prepared on the image box workstation.
– Chronological
The orders are handled in the order of their chronological arrival. This concerns the
Film processing with printing as well as all images scanned on the d-lab.1 in the
print modes Reorder, Manual positioning, Slide print and Slide film, and the orders
prepared on the image box workstation in accordance with the setting. See Ö Network
orders on the next page.
A message is displayed if the paper magazine has to be changed.
– Manual
The automatic processing is deactivated. All orders are shown in the list Order
handling continued. They must be started manually by the operator.
8-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.7.3 Order Selection: Overview

Network orders Order handling Orders from d-lab.1 Network orders from the image box
continued workstation
Accept all All autom. Orders without preview are handled – Paper inserted:
automatically Orders are printed automatically
– Paper not inserted:
Orders are collected in the list
Order handling continued with
the marker No paper
Film autom. / Orders without preview are handled Orders are started manually by the
network man. automatically operator
Chronological Orders are handled in chronological order
Manual Orders are started manually by the operator
Accept none All autom. Orders without preview are handled
automatically
Film autom. / Orders without preview are handled
network man. automatically
No orders are fetched 8
Chronological Orders without preview are handled
in chronological order
Manual Orders are started manually by the
operator
Only for All autom. Orders without preview are handled Orders are printed automatically
available paper automatically
Film autom. / Orders without preview are handled Orders are started manually by the
network man. automatically operator
Chronological Orders are handled in chronological order
Manual Orders are started manually by the operator
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-19

8.7.4 Setting the Order Selection

Print modes
Standard
Order selection
Order preparation:
Activate one of the four options.
Network orders:
Activate one of the three option.
360
8-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.8 Standard
009_rechts
8
This print mode is the mode that is used most frequently in production.
Film processing (only d-lab.1 with Film Processor) with or without printing:
The following settings control the film processing and the printing of developed films.
– Printing after processing
After a function has been activated, films 135 are automatically advanced from the
Film Processor to the film drive after processing and scanned.
If the function is deactivated, the films are put on the Film Processor dryer after
processing.
– Incl. processing
Here, the configuration for print orders is selected which are transmitted by the Film
Processor (films 135 are automatically passed on in the machine). This holds for the
next and all following orders until another configuration is selected.
– Without processing
Here, the configuration for print orders is selected which are coming from the Feeder
(films are inserted manually). This holds for the next and all following orders until
another configuration is selected.
Lists:
– LHS: Order preparation
Orders which are still in the Film Processor
Orders just being scanned
Orders fetched from the image box workstation
– RHS: Order handling continued
Orders that have been scanned and are calculated for printing
Orders with preview
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-21

Current order:
The Order number and the basic Configuration are indicated above. Print shows the
handling progress, e.g. 4/36. The 4th of 36 frames is being produced.
Saved orders:
Only data of scanned films / slides are saved.
Network orders and orders from the Manual positioning are not stored in the order
memory. See Ö 8.8.3
Order handling continued:

– Delete order
Mark an order in the list that should be deleted and delete it.
– Order selection, see Ö 8.7
– Modify order, see Ö 8.5
– Start order
Mark an order and start the handling cycle
8-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.8.1 Film Processing
8.8.1.1 Film Sizes processable in the Film Processor

– Only C41 color negative films and C41 compatible B/W films can be processed.
– Film size 110 cannot be printed on the d-lab.1 at present.
– Film size 120 cannot be printed directly on the d-lab.1.
These films are entered via an external Scanner (e.g. Nikon Coolscan LS8000 or Nikon
Super Coolscan 9000) and are printed on the d-lab.1 as digital order. See also Ö
Technical Data, chapter 11.
Film sizes
135 mm film
120 roll film (4,5x6 to 6x9)
110 Pocket film
IX240 (APS)
8
8.8.1.2 Film Feed and Film Exit
Film size Film feed Film exit
135 automatic from the Film Processor under the film collecting box
135, 120, 110, IX240 manual at the top of the Film Feeder at the top of the Feeder
– Automatic:
On conditions that Printing after processing has been activated (Film Feeder closed,
negative mask locked), the film 135 is automatically drawn into the film drive after
processing and scanned. The transfer from the Film Processor to the film drive is done
in the machine and is not seen by the operator. After the scanning, the film is
transported into the film collecting box.
Note:
If the Stocker is full, the films that should be drawn in automatically are moved up to
the top.
– Manual:
The operator puts the films (135 / IX240) in the Feeder by hand. As for the films
IX240, it is recommended to rewind them into the film cassette first and then put the
cassette in the Cartridge Feeder.
After the scanning, the films move again through the Feeder.
– If Printing after processing is deactivated for a film 135 (Feeder input activated),
the film is moved out of the Film Processor at the top after processing and is
deposited on the Film Processor dryer.
– The handling of films 110, 120 and IX240 is not continued automatically after
processing, they are always deposited at the top of the Film Processor.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-23

8.8.1.3 Changing to the Feeder Input

Note:
The machine switches to Feeder input when the operator changes from the standard
mode to another print mode.
It is not possible to change to Feeder input in the following cases:

1. A film 135 from the Film Processor is being scanned already.
2. A film 135 is about to be transmitted from the Film Processor to the film drive. The
message Next film in xx sec is shown next to the Agfa rhombus.
3. Other films 135 from the Film Processor will follow at a short time interval (film
magazines put in directly one after the other).
8.8.1.4 Order Tracing

To be able to regroup the film and the order, a sticker (Twin check label) with the same
number is put on both. Before the film magazine is put in the d-lab, the number on the
sticker can be entered on the d-lab as order number.
This order number may be printed on the back of the prints to make their regrouping with
the order easier.
After film processing, the film is cut into strips and sleeved in a plastic foil in an optional
film sleeving unit, e.g. AGFA FS1. The strips are put in the photo envelope together with
the prints, the photo envelope and the film are put in the order envelope.
8-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.8.2 Film Processing with Printing
8.8.2.1 Automatic Film Transfer

Prerequisites:
– Film size 135 only
– Negative mask 135 inserted
– Printing after processing activated

Print modes
Standard
Incl. processing:
Activate Printing after processing
If necessary, change the order number:
see Ö 8.4
Put the film magazine(s) in the Film 8
Processor, see Ö 8.8.2.3
009_links
8.8.2.2 Film put into the Film Feeder by Hand

Prerequisites:
– Printing after processing deactivated. This disables the automatic transfer of
films 135.

Print modes
Standard
Mount the desired negative mask
see Ö 8.4
Put the film magazine(s) in the Film
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-25

8.8.2.3 Putting the Film Magazines in the Film Processor

In the newer versions only the upper loading unit can be Optionally (only ex-factory) two loading units for film
used for the film processing boxes. boxes are available on the Film Processor.
3003_111 3003_015
Push the film magazine(s) in the Film

Processor, see Ö Procedure and Table on
this page
When the corresponding pilot lamp (1)
flashes green:
Remove the empty magazine and load it
3002_084
Note:
The film in the magazine pushed in first is handled first.
Procedure:
– The lamp (1) light green after a film magazine has been inserted.
– When the Film Processor is ready to process the film:
– The magazine is locked
– The lamp lights orange
– The Leader card and the film are drawn in
– If the second magazine is inserted while the film of the first magazine is being
processed, the lamp next to the second magazine lights green.
– As soon as the first film has been pulled out of the magazine and is cut, the lamp
flashes green.
– The empty magazine can be removed and reloaded.
– The second inserted magazine is locked and the film is fed.
– A lamp flashes orange if an error occurs while the film is being drawn in.
8-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Event Pilot lamp

Magazine inserted green
Magazine locked orange
Magazine empty flashing green
Magazine inserted, film processed already off
Error during film feeding flashing orange (both lamps)
CAUTION!
Do not run creased films again through the Film Processor.
This may damage the film, e.g. scratches.
Film processing and scanning

Procedure: 8
– Orders which are still in the Film Processor are identified as such in the list Order
preparation.
– In case of automatic film feeding, the films are transported on to the film drive after
processing and scanned.
The operator can change to Feeder input during the film processing, e.g. to process
Reorders, see Ö 8.8.1.3.
– Films which have left the Film Processor must be put in the Feeder by hand:
Push the film strips between the Film Feeder

skids with the emulsion side turned down:
The machine recognizes the film and draws
it in.
Film processing and printing

– After scanning, the orders are shifted from the list Order preparation to the list Order
handling continued.
– Depending on the settings under Order selection, the handling of the orders is then
continued either automatically or manually.
If Manual is set, the operator has the following options:
Start order
Depending on the configuration
(without/with preview), the selected order is
handled automatically, or the images are
shown in the preview, see Ö 8.15.
Preview
The images of the selected order are shown
in the preview, see Ö 8.15.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-27

8.8.3 Film Processing without Printing (d-lab.1 with Film Processor)

Procedure:
– Orders which are still in the Film Processor are identified as such in the list Order
preparation.
– The films are deposited on top of the Film Processor dryer after processing.

Print modes
Standard
Deactivate Printing after processing
see Ö 8.4
Put the film magazine(s) in the Film
009_nur entw
8-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.8.4 Printing without Film Processing

Print modes
Standard
Mount the desired negative mask
Without processing:
Touch Change? and enter the new number
Push the film strips between the Film Feeder
skids with the emulsion side turned down:
The machine recognizes the film and draws
it in automatically.
009_links
8
– After scanning, the orders are shifted from the list Order preparation to the list Order
handling continued.
– Depending on the settings under Order selection, the handling of the orders is then
continued either automatically or manually.
If Manual is set, the operator has the following options:
Start order
Depending on the configuration
(without/with preview), the selected order is
handled automatically, or the images are
shown in the preview, see Ö 8.15.
Preview
The images of the selected order are shown
in the preview, see Ö 8.15.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-29

8.8.5 Reprints from saved Orders

All orders (except file print and network) are saved in the order memory after they have
been printed and deposited in the Sorter. They can be selected in the screen Saved
orders and printed again.
Note:
Orders carrying the same order number can be identified by the date / time.
Possible actions:
– Print the complete order again
– Print the complete order with a different configuration
– Print single frames of the order again by selecting them in the Preview
– Delete the order

Print modes
Standard
Saved orders
Mark the desired orders in the list Saved
orders and transfer them to the list
Selected orders with the arrow key.
Mark orders not needed any more in the list
Selected orders and remove them from the
memory with Delete.
Touch OK to transfer the selected orders to
the Standard screen.
108
8-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.8.6 Network Orders
8.8.6.1 Fetching Network Orders

The d-lab fetches network orders including all images acc. to the settings in the Order
selection, see Ö 8.7.1. It is specified in the Settings how many orders and images the d-
lab can fetch at the same time, see Ö chapter 4.
Note:
If the fetching of network orders for the matching paper (printing possible without a
magazine change) has been activated in the Order selection, the following must be
observed:
The paper is used that is inserted at the moment of the activation. If the magazine is
changed afterwards, the d-lab may have fetched orders already which cannot be printed
without changing the magazine again.
8.8.6.2 Tracing Network Orders

There is no separate screen for network orders. They are shown in the Standard print 8
mode.
Like film orders, network orders are ranged for computing and printing acc. to the settings
in the Order selection.
Preview and dTFS are limited to those orders which do not exceed a certain number of
images (see Ö Settings, chapter 4). If the limit is very large, the operator can see
extensive orders in the preview, but has to accept long waiting times for this.

Print modes
Standard
Network order:
Print automatically:
Touch Start order
Handling:
Touch Preview, see Ö 8.15
009_rechts
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-31

8.8.6.3 Deleting Network Orders

d-lab.1:
The final deletion of network orders depends on the installed Software version:
– From Main Software 08.00D, see Ö d-lab.1 Main-Software as of 08.00D:
The orders can be deleted in the standard mode on the d-lab.1.
When Delete order is touched, an inquiry window appears with the following buttons:
– Delete:
The order is deleted temporarily. It is still fetched by the d-lab.
– Delete definitely:
The order is deleted on the d-workflow.
– Cancel:
The order is not deleted.
– For all previous versions, see Ö d-lab.1 Main-Software up to 08.00D:
Final deletion of orders is not possible on the d-lab.
If an order is deleted on the d-lab, it is returned to the d-workflow and is fetched again
by the d-lab. For this reason, the order must be deleted on the image box workstation.
d-lab.1 Main-Software as of 08.00D

Print modes
Standard
Mark the desired order in the standard
screen and touch Delete order. An inquiry
window appears.
Touch Delete, Delete definitely or Cancel.
8-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 Main-Software up to 08.00D

On the d-lab.1:
Print modes
Standard
Suppress the acceptance of network orders
on d-lab:
Order selection
Mark Accept none
Mark orders to be deleted in the standard
screen on the d-lab and touch Delete order.
An inquiry window appears.
Touch Delete
On the image box workstation:

When an order is deleted on the image box
workstation, a difference is made between two
cases:
8
1. Image box workstation with d-bridge
(no d-workflow license):
Switch the image box workstation
OFF/ON:
When it starts, the inquiry comes up
whether all old orders should be
deleted).
Answer the inquiry by Yes.
2. Image box workstation with d-workflow:

Single orders are deleted on the d-
workflow user interface. No orders are
deleted when the image box
workstation is switched OFF/ON.
On the d-lab.1:
If desired, allow network orders to be
accepted again on the d-lab:
Order selection
Mark Accept all or
Only for available paper
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-33

8.9 Reorders (not netlab.1)

Reorder is only possible with the following films:
– Films / film strips with extended DX code
– Color negatives 135 and films IX240
Prerequisite:
In Reorder mode, the films / film strips can only be fed through the Feeder. The Film
Feeder is opened when changing from the Standard mode to Reorder. Restrictions see
Ö 8.8.1.3.
Note:
Indexprint is not possible for Reorder.
Procedure:
– Before filling in the Reorder list, mount the matching negative mask and select Film
type because the Reorder list is deleted when the film type is changed.
Only products (print sizes, Autosave and Combiprint configurations) are offered for the
current negative mask and the current film type.
– The operator creates a list for every order, containing the numbers of the reordered
negatives, the ordered quantity, corrections (if required) and the desired products. The
entries can be performed either on the keyboard displayed on the screen, or via the
optional Reorder keyboard. To simplify the entry, lines can be duplicated and modified.
– Possible entries for Negative nos.:
X, XX, 00, 0, 1 to 99
XA, XXA, 00A, 0A, 1A to 99A
– Enter the quantity:
The field Qty shows ---. This is interpreted internally as 1. An entry is only necessary if
more than one product (print, CD or Combiprint) have been ordered.
– Enter corrections:
Touch the correction button first and then enter the value, e.g.: Y - 4 or SAT 3.
If no corrections are entered, the field remains empty. Wrong entries can only be
corrected by a reentry. Enter 0 to delete a correction.
The corrections contained in the product configurations are taken into account. The
data in the Reorder list has an additive effect. Only those corrections can be entered in
the Reorder list that are offered on the keyboard. Other correction options are only
available in the Preview, see 8.15.
– Select products:
– Activate Print size and select the desired configuration in the column
Configuration of the Reorder list in the Pulldown menu.
– Activate Autosave config. and select the desired configuration.
– Activate Combiprint config. and select the desired configuration.
– If necessary, all entries can be deleted with Delete list.
8-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

– Back print:
– Here, a common back print text can be entered for all prints of the order.
– Unchanged is used to accept the back print of the respective product configuration
that is used.
– Preview:
The preview of the current order begins after all images of the order list have been
found and scanned.
– Finishing the order list and entering other lists:
A finished order list is terminated with OK. While the order is being scanned and
printed, the operator can prepare already the list for the next order. But the OK button
remains inactive as long as the previous order has been scanned. Due to delays during
printing, any number of orders may be created which are not shown in the Reorder
screen.
– Displayed entries (position in the screen):
– Reorder list (bottom)
– Current Reorder (top left):
Order just being scanned. Not only the remaining negatives, but also the negative 8
numbers not yet scanned are displayed. They can be removed from the order with
Delete remaining.
– Current order (top right):
Order just being printed. Print shows the handling progress, e.g. 4/18. The 4th of
36 frames is being produced. Printing can be stopped with Stop.
– Order end:
End of order is set automatically after all DX numbers of the Reorder list have been
scanned.
– Change from Reorder to Standard:

The current order must be finished first (all Reorder strips finished). Then the order
appears in one of the lists of the Standard screen acc. to its status.
Note:
The orders are processed in chronological order as long as the operator remains in the
Reorder print mode. When he changes to the Standard mode, the order selection of
this mode applies.
– Automatic print mode:

When this function is active, only orders for the inserted paper are printed. Unprintable
orders are identified by No paper when the mode is changed to Standard.
When the function is inactive, a message requesting to insert the required paper may
come up.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-35

8.9.1 Entering Reorder Lists

Print mode
Reorder
CAUTION!
Before filling in the Reorder list, mount
the matching negative mask and select
Film type because the Reorder list is
deleted when the film type is changed.
Mount the right negative mask

For B/W film select Film type B/W
Deactivate Preview
Edit the order list:
011 Enter Negative nos. and if necessary
Qty and corrections
Activate Print formats, Autosave
config. or Combiprint config.
Touch the field under Configuration
and select a configuration
If the negatives are to be printed with
different configurations:
Duplicate line
activate Print formats, Autosave
config. or Combiprint config. and
select the desired configuration in the
Reorder list
If necessary, change the Back print
If necessary, activate Preview, see Ö 8.15.
see Ö 8.4
Finish the entry of the list with OK
Feed the film / film strips of the order one
after the other:
Preview deactivated: The negatives are
scanned and printed.
Preview activated: The negatives are
scanned and shown in the Preview, see
Ö 8.15.
Reject negative numbers that are not found
with Delete remaining, if any
Enter the list for the next order
8-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.10 Manual Positioning (not netlab.1)

This print mode is used in the following cases:
– Films without extended DX code
– Films without a legible DX code
– Films with irregularly positioned negatives (automatic space detection does not work)
– Single negatives
Note:
Indexprint is not possible.
Procedure:
– Film / film strip (from 3 negatives):
– Insert the film / film strip in the Film Feeder
– Position the negative:
Move longer film strips forward or backward by one negative length using 8
Negative until the desired negative is shown.
– Single negative / film strip (max. 2 negatives)
– Pull out the negative mask, insert the negative / film strip and push the negative
mask back in
– Position the negative:
Position the negative accurately in small steps using Step:
The removed part is cut off in the preview, the newly added one is marked, but is
shown without data (gray).
– Refresh:
The preview is refreshed.
– Repeat the operation (positioning + Refresh) until the desired result is obtained.
Note:
It is possible to scan several negatives one after the other. The images are edited and
printed afterwards by the operator. As only one image is shown in the preview at a
time, the arrow keys appear for scrolling.
– The enlarged view can be turned (by 90° cw) to display upright sizes correctly.
– Configuration:
If several configurations are used in an order, the data of the first configuration holds
for Autosave and Back print for the whole order.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-37

– Corrections:
– The enlarged view is refreshed at once.
– Corrections are kept until another configuration is selected.
– Delete config.:
All added versions of the image and other configurations are deleted (e.g. Print and
Autosave or Package).
– Print:
The image is exposed at once. The exposure does not wait until the order is finished.
Advantage: It is possible to produce at once various prints from the current negative,
e.g. different sizes or corrections.
– Touch Eject and remove the film / film strip or the single negative:
– The film / film strip is moved out by the Film Feeder.
– The single negative / film strip is moved into a position in which the negative
mask can be removed without damaging the film strip / the negative
– Order end:
It must be set manually in this print mode. This way, several film strips and single
negatives can be combined in an order.

Print modes
Manual positioning
Select configuration
Change configuration if necessary, see 8.5
Film / film strip:
Insert it in the Film Feeder:
It is drawn in, scanned and positioned
on the film beginning.
Touch Negative until the desired
negative is shown
Single negative / film strip:
Pull out the negative mask, put in the
negative or film strips, push in the
negative mask
013_1
Touch Step and Refresh until the
negative is accurately positioned
8-38 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Enter corrections:
For the description of the corrections see Ö
chapter 4, section Overview: Identical and
different parameters for color negative and
digital and the following sections.
Call up Image editing: see Ö 8.15
Touch Print:
The negative is printed with all entered
modifications.
In case of a film strip, position the next
negative, scan and print it
Touch Eject and remove the film / film strip
or single negative from the Film Feeder resp.
the negative mask
Touch Order end when the complete order
is finished
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-39

8.11 Slide Print (not netlab.1)

This print mode is used for framed slides.
Note:
Indexprint is possible.
Procedure:
– Put the slide in the top part of the mask and push the latter in.
Note:
It is possible to scan several slides one after the other. The images are then edited and
printed by the operator.
The preview always shows only one image. The image is copied if it is corrected or if
several configurations are selected. In this case, arrow keys appear for scrolling.
– Configuration:
– The enlarged view can be
– turned (through 90° cw) to show upright sizes correctly,
– mirrored if the slide is put in inverted.
– Corrections:
– The enlarged view is refreshed immediately in case of corrections.
– The Hold function is used to hold corrections (except crop enlargements) for all
following prints of the order up to the next modification. This requires a
considerable time input because all images shown in the preview have to be
recalculated and refreshed.
– Delete corrections
This function is used to reset all corrections entered in this screen.
Note:
There is no Production Balance for slides. The Production Balance set for Negative
or Digital has no effect on slide prints.
Customized corrections must therefore be created as correction configuration and
assigned to the product configurations.
8-40 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

– Print and/or skip slides:

The slide is exposed at once in the Print and Print + Skip mode. The exposure does
not wait until the order is finished.
Advantage: It is possible to produce at once various prints from the current slide, e.g.
different sizes or corrections.
– Print
The slide is printed at once. It remains displayed so that it can be edited otherwise,
or printed with a different configuration.
– Print + Skip
The slide is printed. It can then be taken out of the slide mask.
– Touch Skip if the indicated slide should not be printed.
– Order end:
It must be set manually in this print mode. This way, several slides can be combined in
an order.
8.11.1 Inserting the Slide Mask 8

Insert the slide mask
Note:
The automatic Pico (pixel correction) is
performed (takes about 5 seconds). The slide
mask must not be removed during this time.
3002_087
Call up in the main menu:
Print mode
Slide print
The top part of the mask is moved out.
Put in the slide correctly (emulsion side of
the slide pointing down to the paper,
emulsion on emulsion) and push in the top
part of the mask:
The slide is scanned and displayed. Then the
top part of the mask is moved out again.
Assign another configuration or Change

configuration, see 8.5
3002_086
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-41

Turn the slide if necessary and/or mirror it:

Touch the respective symbol
Enter corrections:
Touch one of the following buttons to print
and/or skip the image:
Print or
Print + Skip or
Skip
Insert all slides belonging to the order, edit
and print them one after the other
077_1 Touch Order end when the complete order
is finished
8-42 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.12 Slide Film, Option (not netlab.1)

This print mode is used in the following cases:
– Slide films
– Single slides (film strip)
Note:
Indexprint is not possible.
Procedure:
– Slide film / film strip (from 3 slides):
– Insert the film / film strip in the Film Feeder
– Position the slide:
Move longer film strips forward or backward by one slide length using Slide until
the desired slide is shown.
– Single dia / film strip (max. 2 slides) 8
– Pull out the negative mask (135), insert the dia / film strip and push the negative
mask back in
– Position the slide:
Position the slide accurately in small steps using Step:
The removed part is cut off in the preview, the newly added one is marked, but is
shown without data (gray).
– Refresh:
– Repeat the operation (positioning + Refresh) until the desired result is obtained.
Note:
It is possible to scan several slides one after the other. The images are edited and
printed afterwards by the operator. As only one image is shown in the preview at a
time, the arrow keys appear for scrolling.
– The enlarged view can be turned (by 90° cw) to display upright sizes correctly.
– Configuration:
– Corrections:
– The enlarged view is refreshed at once.
– Corrections are kept until another configuration is selected.
– Delete config.:
All added versions of the image and other configurations are deleted (e.g. Print and
Autosave or Package).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-43

– Print:
The image is exposed at once. The exposure does not wait until the order is finished.
Advantage: It is possible to produce at once various prints from the current slide, e.g.
different sizes or corrections.
– Touch Eject and remove the slide film / film strip or the single slide:
– The film / film strip is moved out by the Film Feeder.
– The single slide / film strip is moved into a position in which the negative mask
can be removed without damaging the film strip / the slide.
– Order end:
It must be set manually in this print mode. This way, several film strips and single
slides can be combined in an order.

Print modes
Slide film
Select configuration
Change configuration if necessary, see 8.5
Film / film strip:
Insert it in the Film Feeder:
It is drawn in, scanned and positioned
on the film beginning.
Touch Slide until the desired slide is
shown
Single slide / film strip:
Pull out the negative mask, put in the
slide or film strip, push in the negative
mask
012
Touch Step and Refresh until the slide
is accurately positioned
Enter corrections:
Touch Print:
The slide is printed with all entered
modifications.
In case of a film strip, position the next slide,
scan and print it
Touch Eject and remove the film / film strip
or single slide from the Film Feeder resp. the
negative mask
Touch Order end when the complete order
is finished
8-44 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.13 File Print (Option)

This print mode is used to print digital images on the d-lab.1.
Prerequisites:
The option "Fileprint_on_Board" has been enabled (version dependent).
Card drives for camera media are available.
Note:
Indexprint is possible.
Loading image files:

– Put a CD or a camera card in the d-lab.1.
– Select the storage location:
Symbol Meaning Note

8
CD
Remote computer Touch Symbol:

The connection to the computer entered under
Settings > Network is established.
Memory cards Keep on touching Symbol until the ID letter for the
correct drive is shown.
ID letters for the memory cards: Touch Symbol:

CD Compact Flash The files on the inserted card are entered.
SM Smart Media
MS Memory Stick
SD SD card
PCM PCMCIA
XD xD
Image displays:
The arrow keys on the right side are used to scroll the images.
– Offered images (bottom left): 12 images each with file names
– Selected images (bottom right): 6 images each with file names
Image selection:
– Select all can be used to enter all images of the medium/drive. It can be cancelled
by Cancel selection.
– As an alternative, single images can be selected.
The images are shifted to the right image display with the arrow keys (between both
displays). Touch the arrow key below the right display to remove all images from this
display.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-45

Order configuration:
This button is active when the screen is called up.
– The desired order configuration can be selected under Config. name.
– Show configuration opens a screen with details about the selected configuration.
When Change configuration is touched, a screen is opened in which the configuration
can be changed temporarily.
Product configurations:
As an alternative to the order configuration, a single product configuration can be
selected:
– Activate Combiprint configuration, Print configuration or Autosave configuration.
– Select the desired configuration under Config. name.
– After a product configuration is selected, the buttons Show configuration and Modify
configuration cannot be used.
Note:
The orders are processed in chronological order as long as the operator remains in the
File print mode. When he changes to the Standard mode, the Order selection of this
mode applies.
8-46 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


Print modes
File print
Load image files:
Put the storage medium in the appropriate
drive of the d-lab.1 and select the storage
selection
Change the order number if required:
Touch Modify? And enter the new number
Activate the configuration:
Order configuration:
Touch Config. name
Select the configuration
If necessary Show configuration or
Modify configuration
Combiprint configuration
042 Print configuration
Autosave configuration:
Touch Config. name 8
Select the configuration
Select the images:

Touch Select all or touch single images
Shift the selection to the right display
with the arrow key
Activate or deactivate dTFS
Activate or deactivate the Preview
Start printing:
The further process depends on whether or
not the preview has been activated:
Preview deactivated:
The order is processed automatically
Preview activated:
The images are shown in the preview,
see Ö 8.15.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-47

8.14 CD Burning on the d-lab.1 / netlab.1

Procedure:
There is no separate print mode for the burning of CDs on the d-lab.1. Orders for burning
are created by allocation of an order configuration containing the Autosave product. It can
also be set in the Autosave configuration whether the AgfaPhoto Viewer program is to be
burned on the CD as well.
The burning begins after all Autosave images of an order have been created. User
prompting is by means of messages in a dialog window (Pop-up):
– Request to insert the CD and enter the order number
– Burning (done without requiring any operator actions)
The drawer opens when the burning is finished. The CD can be removed.
Note:
It is possible to record several orders of a customer on one CD. If the inserted CD is not
empty, a message appears telling that there is not enough storage space. This message
will be corrected in the next Software version. Then the correct request will be
displayed, asking whether or not recording should be done on the CD which is not
empty.
CD:
A directory is created on the CD for each order. The name of the directory is drawn from
the order number and a clear ID (derived from the date / time). The image files are saved
in sub-directories: A sub-directory is created for each resolution / image quality.
If activated in the Autosave configuration, the AgfaPhoto Viewer is copied to the Root
directory of the CD.
The CD is no finalized. This means that the CD can be inserted again to burn several
orders on the same CD. Prerequisite for this is that the storage capacity is sufficient for all
image files of the order or the orders.
8-48 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.15 Preview
A preview is shown on the d-lab.1 in the following cases:
1. A configuration has been selected with preview for an order in the Standard mode
(film) or on the image box workstation (network order).
2. A configuration has been selected without preview in the Standard mode (film) or on
the image box workstation (network order). The operator has marked the order and
touched Preview before the order was calculated for printing.
3. Preview activated for the order in the Reorder mode.
4. Preview activated for the order in the File print mode.
5. The print modes Manual positioning and Slide print always work with preview.
There are two types of preview screens:

1. For Manual positioning and Slide print, the preview only displays an enlarged
image. The images of the order are placed one behind the other like in a stack. The
arrow keys can be used to scroll the images of the order.
2. In the other print modes, the preview shows 12 images at the same time. Scrolling to 8
other images of the order is also possible with the arrow keys.
If the orders are very large, it may take some minutes until all images are displayed.
Both preview types offer the same functions (differences are mentioned separately, if any):
– Regulators for color/density correction, see Ö 8.15.3
– Regulators for image enhancement, see Ö 8.15.4
– Image editing button with the functions for crop enlargements and colored borders,
see Ö 8.15.5
For the description of the other buttons:

Manual positioning, see Ö 8.10
File print, see Ö 8.11
Preview with 12 images, see Ö 8.15.1
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-49

8.15.1 Preview with 12 Images

Select images:
Selected images are identified by a blue border in the preview. The handling will be
continued for the selected images.
Editing images of an order:

– Regulator for color/density correction (see Ö 8.15.3 and for image enhancement (see
Ö 8.15.4)
– Image editing:
The following screens show the current image enlarged in addition to the original. All
previously selected images are placed one behind the other like in a stack. The arrow
keys can be used to scroll the images.
In addition to the corrections offered in the preview, the operator can define crops and
colored borders and modify the current configuration.
The edited images either overwrite the original, or they are saved in addition, shown in
the preview and printed later.
See Ö 8.15.5.
– Reset all:
All modifications are rejected.
– Delete:
Deleted images are identified in the preview by a red raster and are not printed. They
can be restored with Reset: Delete.
– Print immediately:
The functions is used to print selected images immediately (Instant Prints). For this
reason, the order is moved to the first place in the print waiting queue. However,
orders whose production (printing) has been started already are finished first.
In order not to separate Instant Prints from the other prints of the order, no other order
is printed after the Instant Prints. The whole order is printed after the preview has been
left with OK.
If no other negative is to be printed besides the Instant Prints, the operator must
delete all images before leaving the preview with OK.
8-50 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.15.2 Color/Density Corrections and Image Enhancement in the Preview

The regulators for color/density correction and for the image enhancement are always of
the same structure. They are offered in several screen.
The corrections apply to all selected images for prints or for Autosave. They are added to
already existing values of the correction configuration.
The currently entered value is indicated between the arrows. When changing to another
regulator, this correction is used and the preview is refreshed.
Values between -99 and +99 can be entered. As a regulator can only be set to max. -9 or
+9, the display between the arrows is reset to 0; the total value is shown on the left side
of the regulator (preview with one image) or at the top right in the screen (preview with
12 images). The correction value can be changed again in further steps of max. -9 or +9.
Note re. the back print:

Values higher than -9/+9 cannot be printed in the back print.
Examples:
8
The following shortcuts are used in the screen:
Y Yellow
M Magenta Regulators for
C Cyan color/density corrections
D Density
SHP Sharpness – edges
SAT Saturation.
GRN Sharpness – grains Regulators for image
GRD Gradation enhancement
ACT Contrast (surface)
DCT Contrast (details)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-51

8.15.3 Color/Density Corrections
Blue Yellow
(BLAU) (GELB)
Green Magenta
(GRÜN) (PURPUR)
Red Cyan
(ROT) (BLAUGRÜN)
Brighter Darker
(HELLER) (DUNKLER)
Examples:
1. Print too cyan:
In this case a correction towards Red must be entered.
2. Print too blue:
In this case a correction towards Yellow must be entered.
Select the desired images in the preview

with 12 images:
Touch Select all or
Touch the images one by one
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Density
Enter color/density corrections by means of
the arrows:
see Ö 8.15.4
010_1
8-52 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.15.4 Image Enhancement

For the effect of the parameters see Ö Production Balance in chapter 4.
Sharpness – Edges
SAT saturation
Sharpness – Grains.
Gradation
(left and right):
see the next screen
010_02
ACT contrast (Surfaces)
DCT contrast (Details)
Brightness: Shadow
Brightness: Mid.tones
(left and right):
see the next screen
010_03
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-53

Red eyes
(left and right):
corrections
If necessary, touch Image editing
see 8.15.5
010_04
8-54 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.15.5 Image Editing
8.15.5.1 Image editing, functions

Color correction
The next screen is opened with regulators for color/density corrections and for image
editing.
Crop
The next screen is opened in which the size, the position and the rotation of the crop can
be defined.
Border
The next screen is opened in which a colored border can be defined (border width and
color).
Edit layout texts
The next screen opens and here the texts defined in the IP Layout Software can be
changed.
Front print
The next screen opens and here the texts can be entered and formatted.
Change configuration 8
The next screen is opened in which the configuration for all selected images can be
modified.
Add
The edited images are saved in addition to the originals. Both versions are shown in the
Preview screen and are printed later on.
Replace
The edited images overwrite the original images.
Call up in the Preview:

Image editing
Call up the next screen to edit the current
image, or to modify the configuration for all
selected images:
Color correction
see Ö 8.15.5.2
Define crop
see Ö 8.15.5.3
Define border
see Ö 8.15.5.4
Edit layout texts
see Ö Combiprint configurations in
Chapter 4.
Front print
see Ö Front print configurations in
018
Chapter 4.
see Ö 8.5
Touch Add or Replace
Select the next image with or and
edit it
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-55

8.15.5.2 Image editing, color/density corrections and image enhancement

In addition to the original, the image is shown enlarged.

Image editing
Corrections
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Density
(left and right):
Call up other regulators with
081_1
Enter the corrections:
Sharpness – edges
SAT saturation
Sharpness – grains.
Gradation
(left and right):
081_2
8-56 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Enter the corrections:

ACT contrast (Surfaces)
DCT (contrast (Details)
Brightness: Shadow
Brightness: Mid.tones
(left and right):
Red eyes
(left and right):
corrections 8
Confirm the corrections with OK:
Back to Image editing.
8.15.5.3 Image editing, defining a crop

The crop is displayed in the form of a frame of dotted lines.

Edit image
Crop
Enter the crop position:
Touch the desired spot in the enlarged view:
The frame is shifted.
Define the crop accurately:
Use the arrow keys for the following
settings:
Define Crop position
Enter Crop size
Rotate crop (90°)
Touch Define crop:
If necessary, Reset crop and start again.
082
Confirm the crop definition with OK:
Back to the Image editing screen
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-57

8.15.5.4 Image editing, colored border

Border width: 4 - 60 mm

Image editing
Border
Width
Select a value or enter a new value
Touch Border color:
Select a color in the next screen or define a
new color, see Ö 8.15.5.5 and 8.15.5.6.
074
8.15.5.5 Selecting a color

Up to eight user-defined colors are shown in the bottom line (two in the following
example). The color defined last by the user appears on the extreme left in the line, the
color on the right edge may be shifted off the line.

Image editing
Border
Border color
Select a border color:
Touch Color and select a color in the next
screen, or define a new color: see
Select a color or define a new color:
Touch the desired color and confirm
with OK:
The Enter border screen is displayed.
Touch New to define a color yourself,
see Ö 8.15.5.6.
080
8-58 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.15.5.6 Defining a new color

Image editing
Border
Border color
New
Red, Green, Blue
Enter the color portion
Confirm the new color with OK:
The Enter border screen is displayed.
087
8
8.16 Finishing an Order

After the printing, the operator takes the prints of an order out of the Sorter and puts
them in the order envelope together with the pertaining originals (negatives, slides).
8.17 Daily Maintenance Jobs before Shutdown

The following maintenance jobs should be done before shutdown to avoid problems upon
the next startup.
For the maintenance jobs see Ö Maintenance, chapter 10.
Check the water tank and top it up, if

necessary
Check the effluent tanks and empty them, if
necessary
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-59

8.18 Production Statistics
8.18.1 Total Statistics and Detail Statistics

May be called up in any screen with :
The screen Status information opens.
Touch Total statistics:
see Ö second figure an this page.
Touch Detail statistics:
see Ö figure on the next page.
052
The total statistics only shows totals, e.g.
number of prints, index prints.
008
8-60 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

The detail statistics can filter the statistic data:

Filter data:
Select Film mask:
Data is immediately updated.
Time filter:
Activate Total period or Change time
period, see Ö next screen.
008_2
Change time period:
8
Start: enter date / time
End: enter date / time
Save:
The detail statistics screen is shown
again. Entries outside the entered time
period are now removed.
114
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-61

8.18.2 Clickrate (Option)

The purpose of the Clickrate software component is to get statistics of all products made
on the d-lab and use them for their own evaluation.
8.18.2.1 Recorded data

The following statistics data is recorded during the operation of the d-lab.1:
– Order number, date, and time of the respective order
– Film length, film type and type (normal, reorder, film development, ...) of the respective
order
– Number of scans and number of prints (with paper width, length and surface) of the
respective order
– Number of index prints and names of the index print configurations
– Number of autosaves (saved files) and names of the autosave configurations
8.18.2.2 Type of saving

The above mentioned data is saved in a database created by the d-lab and running on an
MS Data Engine (MSDE, SQL Server). Since this database may only use limited space on
the hard disk, the data must be compressed in regular intervals (e.g. after every pickup).
Which means that e.g. only the total of the prints of a certain paper configuration and the
total of all scans is kept.
8.18.2.3 Export of data

Every time the machine shuts down the data of the MSDE database is exported into an
Access file (ClickRate.mdb). In this file the statistics data is kept in a relational database
structure. Access to statistic data is provided by means of an MS Access installation or
e.g. via ODBC using the Jet Engine and self-programmed applications. So reports can be
written or data can be converted into any other desired form.
To prevent manipulations of the ClickRate.mdb file a checksum is generated upon
creating of the file. Only AgfaPhoto knows the algorithm used for this purpose. An
additional tool can be used (ClickrateChecker.exe) to check the correspondence of file and
checksum.
8-62 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

8.18.2.4 Data pickup

The file clickrate.mdb is stored in the d-lab under D:\Data\Statistic and can be
collected via network, and/or via remote connection.
When this file is collected from the device, this action must be confirmed by a receipt file
(Receipt.dat). During the next machine startup all data older than the date kept in the
receipt file is summarized in an overview in the d-lab database and the detailed data is
deleted. This data is then no longer available for further exports.
The receipt file (Receipt.dat) includes date and time in plain text. An additional string of
characters provided by the collecting party may be present which includes again date and
time in encrypted form.
The created ClickRate.mdb records date and additional character string for all found
receipt files of a certain time period. This allows checking if the date found in plain text
corresponds to the encrypted string of characters.
8.18.3 Installing and/or Uninstalling the Clickrate Software

The function is already included in the Main Software. As in other components subject to
license the installation is made by entering a license key. 8
Note:
The function remains enabled even in case of a software update. After new installation
of the Main Software the program must be enabled again by entering a license key.
As soon as the clickrate has been activated once (clickrate_enable), the uninstall
procedure must follow the same pattern: So a license key must be entered
(clickrate_disable) to switch off clickrate.
8.18.3.1 Deactivating the print modes

To prevent manipulations the license key is saved in various places. Access to the print
modes is denied if the entries during machine startup are not consistent.
In other words the machine cannot be used for production!
8.18.3.2 Additional tools provided by AgfaPhoto

ClickrateReport.mdb
This Access application allows selection and opening of collected ClickRate.mdb files.
Various sample evaluations are offered.
However, this tool is only considered a sample application for possible own evaluation
tools.
ClickrateChecker.exe
This Windows application allows checking of the checksum included in the file
Clickrate.mdb.
And in addition this application provides for the creation of a receipt file (Receipt.dat).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 8-63

8-64 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
CAUTION!
If a problem cannot be solved with the methods suggested here, call a Service
Engineer.
See also Ö Safety Instructions in chapter 1
9.1 Avoiding Handling Problems
9.1.1 Switching off the Machine
CAUTION!
Never switch off the machine with the main breaker!
This may cause problems with the Main Computer; it may be necessary to install
the operating system again. The Main Computer should always be switched off
with a regular shutdown. 9
Paper jams may occur if not all prints have left the Paper Processor.
See also Ö Switching off the Machine in chapter 2
9.1.2 Reset
Note:
Do not pull out the negative mask during a reset.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-1

Troubleshooting d-lab.1 family: Operation
9.2 Error Messages

Error messages can appear in 2 ways:
1. In the Status line:
Info or warning that need not be confirmed.
The work can be continued in some cases. But in spite of this, the required operations
should be performed without delay, e.g. fill up chemicals, empty the effluent tanks.
2. In an Error popup:
The work process is stopped. The error must be removed. In case of some machine
errors, the popup disappears automatically after the error has been removed. If not, it
must be closed with OK.
Perform the required action
err_1
Error in the status line
Solve the problem

If necessary, close the error popup:
Press OK
054
Error popup
If necessary call up the Help text for error
messages with : see Ö Navigation in the
Help function in chapter 2.
9-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

9.3 Problems during Film Transport in the Film Processor

9.3.1 Manual Film Transport after a Power Failure
In case of a power failure a crank handle must be used to transport the film out of the
Film Processor. This action is supported by an acoustic signal: make ¼ rotation per signal.
If the film is still in the processing film box, the film end will be cut automatically (cut off
the film cartridge).
The film comes out at the leader cutter, together with the short leader.
Plug in the crank handle (1)

Turn the crank handle to transport the film
out of the machine: ¼ rotation per signal.
3003_024
9
9.3.2 Emergency-cut Button of the Film Processors
If the film has not been cut yet, the
emergency-cut button (1) must be pressed.
3003_023
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-3

9.4 Problems during Scanning
9.4.1 Stopping the Film Drive

Procedure in case of problems during scanning:
The Scanner stops. An error message is displayed.
Perform a Reset:
1. Press the STOP button on the housing:
The button is used to stop the film drive during scanning.
The Scanner stops; all motors of the film drive are cut dead at once.
Remove the film jam.
2. Touch the screen button to trigger a Software Reset:
The Reset Popup appears on the screen with the buttons Yes and No.
Note:
When the Reset Popup is confirmed, all open orders are interrupted:
1. Orders in the order preparation
2. Orders being printed
When confirming the Reset, be sure to wait until the paper transport in the Printer
is empty. Trigger the Reset with Yes only after all prints have been transported into
the Paper Processor, otherwise there is the risk of a paper jam.
3. Wait until all open orders have been finished.

4. Confirm the Reset Popup
Note:
The screen remains gray during the Reset.
Do not pull out the negative mask!
Reset running:
– The major assembly groups are initialized
– Work can be continued if the message Reset successful is displayed afterwards
(the information relating to the orders previously handled is deleted, e.g. Reorder
lists). If not, other actions have to be taken: see Ö 9.6.2 Procedure in case of
unsolved Errors .
9-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Push the STOP button (3) on the housing:

The Reset Popup is displayed.
Remove a film jam:
Remove the film Takeup and the mirror
box
Remove the film
Put back the film Takeup and the mirror
box
Wait until all open orders have been finished
3003_007 Touch the screen button to trigger a

1 ON button
Software Reset:
The Reset Popup is displayed
2 Timer lamp
3 STOP button (Film stop) Confirm the reset with Yes
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-5

9.5 Machine does not react

If the machine fails to react to actions or inputs by the operator a reset must be
executed.
1. Trigger a Software Reset via the button on the touch-screen,
The main program is reinitialized.
2. Trigger a system Reset via the ON button on the machine.
9.5.1 Triggering a Software Reset (Stop Button on Screen)

When the button is touched:
− Film and Paper are removed:
− All open and running orders are interrupted (order preparation and printing).
− The Reset Popup with the buttons Yes and No is displayed.
Note:
Be sure to wait with the confirmation until the paper transport in the Printer is empty.
Trigger a reset with Yes only when all prints are in the Paper Processor. Otherwise
there is a risk of paper jam.
The screen remains gray during the Reset.

Do not pull out the negative mask!
− The major assembly groups are initialized

− Work can be continued if the message Reset successful is displayed afterwards (the
information relating to the orders previously handled is deleted, e.g. Reorder lists). If
not, other actions have to be taken: see Ö 9.6.2 Procedure in case of unsolved Errors
Press to start a Reset.

When the paper drive in the Printer is empty:
Confirm the reset with Yes.
9-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

9.5.2 Triggering a System Reset (ON Button)

A system reset is required, if
− the whole machine has to be initialized, e.g. if the Software Reset triggered with
does not show an effect.
− the selected actions are not carried out (lock-up).
− an undefined operating status has occurred.
The data base is saved automatically prior to the Reset. After the Reset the machine starts
up again and loads the last consistent backup.
The customer does not lose data: the machine is in the same status as it was before the
ON key was pressed.
Note:
Do not pull out the negative mask during the Reset!
Trigger a system Reset with ON.
9.6 Troubleshooting
9.6.1 Procedure in Case of known Error Causes

Remove the error or continue as under Ö
9.6.2 Procedure in case of unsolved Errors
Close an error popup that may come up with
OK.
If necessary trigger a Software Reset:
see Ö 9.5.1 Triggering (Stop Button on
Screen)
If then the message Reset successful is
displayed, the work can be continued.
Otherwise further actions are necessary: see
Ö 9.6.2 Procedure in case of unsolved Errors
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-7

9.6.2 Procedure in case of unsolved Errors

Call up the error list:
All error messages shown in the status line are saved. They can be called up with the
permanent button.
The error list shows the error messages along with the date and time of occurrence.
Note:
Error messages of the Printer quite often refer to paper which must be removed:
see Ö 9.9 Removing Paper Jam
All active errors must be solved and deleted in the error list.
In case of an unsuccessful Reset, the respective message covers the error popup with
the relevant error messages. To display them again provoke a new error message.
Call up the error list:

button on the screen and Error list
Deactivate Show all errors so that only
active errors are displayed.
Remove all active errors and delete them
from the list with Cancel selection.
If the machine fails to execute an automatic
Reset:
Leave the error list with Back
and press to start a Reset.
In case of an unsuccessful Reset:
Lift the sorter briefly to make relevant
error messages visible and continue to
solve the problems.
062 If the screen remains gray for more than
3 minutes during the Reset:
Trigger a system Reset with the ON
button.
9-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

9.6.3 Procedure for Paper Processor Errors

Some errors cause the Printer to stop. If paper is still in the transport area of the Printer, it
must be removed before the work can be continued.
If an error occurs during a reset, a message appears indicating unsolved errors. These
active errors must be cleared from the error list.
Deactivate the option Show all errors to display only active errors.
Then perform a Reset.
Deactivate Show all errors

Delete active errors from the error list
Execute a Reset
9.6.4 Procedure for Printer Transport Errors

Messages like for example:
Shutter not reached (MR, ML)
SG_LS01 not reached
MR / ML = Paper magazine right / left 9
SG = Sheet Gear
LS = Light sensor
Error removal:
Remove the paper magazine
Check the correct position of the paper
in the magazine
Push the magazine back in
Then close the error popup with OK
9.6.5 Procedure for other Error Situations

The machine stops without a message or menus cannot be closed.
Press the button on the screen.

Wait until there is no paper any more in the
Printer
Confirm the Reset with Yes
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-9

9.7 Help Function for Error Messages

Help texts for the error messages can be called up as follows:
– The button opens the Help screen for an error popup
– The button and the Error Help Index call up the alphabetic list of the error
messages: Select the error message and call up the Help text.
9.8 Removing a Film Jam
9.8.1 Film Jam During Operation

Note:
If the film tears, do not forget to remove all scraps: Film rests that are not removed may cause production faults.
Procedure in case of error messages regarding
film jam:
Display the location of the jam, if required:
Press and touch the desired assembly
group in the graphic
Remove the film in the indicated position
If the jammed film cannot be found, check
the possible locations in the given order:
− Film set box
− Tank section of the Film Processor
− Dryer of the Film Processor
− Film stocker
− Negative mask
− Film Takeup
052
Remove the film:
Open the tank section and remove the film
Open the tank section (lift the dryer)
Pull out the racks and remove the film
Pull the film out of the dryer
Remove the film from the stocker:
Remove the film box (1):
1 screw at the top
Remove the cover (black triangle) and
take out the film from behind
3003_055 Transport the film out of the negative mask
9-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

9.8.2 Special Case: Film Jam reported during Machine Startup

A film jam occurred during a Reset (shutdown of the machine) and is indicated during the
next start. The film jam positions cannot be displayed on the screen since the Start
screen is not shown.
Search for the jammed film and remove it.

If it is not possible to find the film:
Call up the Info function with , touch
the assembly groups in the graphic one
after the other to find the locations.
Remove the film
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-11

9.9 Removing a Paper Jam
CAUTION!
Danger caused by moving toothed belts in the indicated area, e.g. in the lane
distributor.
CAUTION!
Mind sharp corners and edges when working in the Printer area: Risk of cutting
injuries!
9.9.1 Paper Jam during Operation

Note:
If the paper tears, do not forget to remove all scraps: Paper rests that are not removed
may cause production faults.
Procedure in case of error messages regarding

paper jam:
Call up the location of the jam, if required:
press and touch the desired assembly
group in the graphic
Remove the paper in the indicated position
Check the possible locations in the given
order only if the jammed paper cannot be
found:
− Paper magazines
− Exposure table
− Cutter
− Lane distributor
Remove the paper position
9.9.2 Special Case: Paper Jam indicated during Machine Startup

Paper jam occurred during the reset (shutdown of the machine) and is indicated during
the next start. The jam positions cannot be displayed on the screen since the Start screen
is not shown.
Search for the jammed paper and remove it.

If it is not possible to find the paper:
Call up the Info function with , touch
the assembly groups in the graphic one
after the other to find the locations.
Remove the paper.
9-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

9.9.3 Paper Jam in the Paper Transport
9.9.3.1 General Notes

Note:
Assemblies which have to be pulled out of the Printer to remove the jam are not
energized.
Proceed as follows in case of a paper jam in the paper transport:

− Paper sheets not affected by the paper jam are automatically transported to the Paper
Processor.
− All sheets preceding the jam will not be transported any further.
− The operator must then remove all papers which remain in the paper transport as a
result of the paper jam. If necessary the position and number of papers can be checked
on the screen: and touch the desired assembly group in the graphic.
− The Printer will automatically be ready for printing again once the operator has
removed the jammed sheets and cleared the error message or triggered a Reset.
9.9.3.2 Removing a Paper Jam at the Paper Magazines 9

Rewind the paper into the paper magazine:
Unlock the paper magazine and pull it
out approx. 1 cm
Take out the tool (in the RH front door)
and rewind the paper into the magazine
with the paper core drive
Observe the direction of rotation:
left-hand magazine: clockwise
right-hand magazine: counter-clockwise
Then insert the paper correctly in the
darkroom.
Cut damaged front edges straight with a pair
of scissors
3003_036
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-13

9.9.3.3 Removing a Paper Jam on the Exposure Table

Open the Printer door
Remove the paper from the exposure table
9.9.3.4 Removing a Paper Jam in the Cutter

Pull out the exposure table if the paper is
not accessible:
Remove the film takeup box (1)
Pull out the sheet metal part (2)
3003_076
Unscrew the bottom cover (incl. the
electronic) and fold it down
Open the 2 locking levers (1) of the
exposure table
Pull out the exposure table to the front
Remove the paper from the left or the right
cutter unit
3003_056
9-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

If the paper is torn, look for small pieces and

remove them
Remove the cover (1):
3x Phillips screws
Remove the connection piece (2):
Remove the 2 safety pins
CAUTION!
The screw visible from above (not silver
colored) must not be removed otherwise
the adjustment of the unit is lost!
Remove the 2 Allen screws (silver

colored)
Unplug the cable and remove them
3003_057 from the cable tie
Remove the cutter unit
Remove the paper
Insert the cutter unit again until it locks
in
Connect the cable and fix it with cable
ties 9
Fasten the cutter with the 2 Allen
screws
Connect the sheet metal plate
(3x Phillips screws) and insert the
2 safety pins
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-15

9.9.4 Removing a Paper Jam in the Lane Distributor LD

Open the red locking lever (1) and pull out
the LD to the front
Locate the sheets inside and try to transport
them out of the LD:
Turn the 3 hand wheels
3003_025
If this doesn’t work
Open the bottom of the LD (1)
Remove the guide plates:
Pull the 2 push buttons to open them
Remove the paper sheets
Insert the sheet metal plate (1) and guide
plates again
Push in the lane distributor and fasten it
Close the Printer door
3003_026
9-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

9.10 Removing a Paper Jam in the Paper Processor
9.10.1 Paper Jam in the Wet Section
CAUTION!
Risk of injury if the wet section cover is
unlocked unintentionally or without
paying attention.
Opening the cover:

The cover locks in only in vertical position
and may shut when unlocked
unintentionally.
3009_011
CAUTION!
Ö Observe the Safety Instructions for the
Handling of Chemicals in the chapters 1 9
and 3.
Pull out the racks to remove the jammed

paper:
Open the cover until it locks in (only in
vertical position)
Open the rack locking lever
Remove crossovers and racks
Search for the paper and remove it
Close the cover:
Support the cover with one hand before
pressing the unlocking lever (press PUSH
HERE) and close it.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-17

9.10.2 Removing a Paper Jam in the Dryer

Remove the dryer cover:
Turn the two locks through 90º with a
suitable coin
Fold out the dryer rack:
Open the 2 locking levers (1):
Push them to the right
Locate the whole paper and fold up the
corresponding paper guides (2)
Remove the paper
Make sure that the paper guides (2) sit
correctly and let the quick-action locks snap
in
Close the dryer again and tighten the screws
of the cover
3003_013
9.10.3 Removing a Paper Jam in the Paper Outlet

Fold up the cover
Remove the metal plate
Remove the paper
Mount the plate again and close the cover
3003_037
9-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

9.11 Errors during Production

Fault Cause Remedy
Image errors in light patches on the Residual silver in the film Switch off the scratch correction
print (image falsification, so-called
Artifacts)
Slide production: Black borders on Varying cropping sizes of the slide Reduce the crop in the Preview
prints. frames
Film and slide production: One part — Perform a manual dark Pico
of the scanned images appears
different in the preview and on the
print.
PBL: PBL is no longer in tolerance. — Select the option none under Select
config. and trigger the test with PBL.
It will then start again with the
standard values.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 9-19

9-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Maintenance
10 Maintenance
10.1 Purpose
Maintenance keeps up the performance of the machine. It must be carried out thoroughly
and in regular intervals.
The customer is responsible for the daily and monthly maintenance. The respective jobs
are explained in detail in this chapter.
Other maintenance jobs must be carried out by the Service Engineer. They are described
in detail in the folder Service manual / Repair.
10.2 Safety Instructions

CAUTION!
The maintenance jobs to be provided by the customer must only be carried out by
trained staff.
Maintenance jobs not described in this chapter must only be performed by an

AgfaPhoto Service Engineer or another person authorized by AgfaPhoto.
The Safety instructions on all machine labels and in chapter 1 of this folder must
be observed.
10
Make sure to observe the safety instructions given for specific maintenance jobs.
CAUTION!
Risk of injuries!
Do not clean or clean only with great care while the drive is switched on.
Risk of cutting!
Mind sharp corners and edges when working in the Printer area.
Note:
Assembly groups pulled out of the Printer are not energized.
10.3 d-lab.1 Versions

The maintenance work on the Film Processor only concerns the machines d-lab.1 with
Film Processor.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-1

Maintenance d-lab.1 family: Operation
10.4 Maintenance Jobs and Maintenance Intervals

10.4.1 Maintenance to be performed by the Customer: d-lab.1
Maintenance intervals
Maintenance jobs to be performed by the customer: d-lab.1
Daily Weekly Monthly
x Check the Leader cards (short leaders) for damage and clean them
x Clean the magnetic head of the APS film mask
x Clean the drive rollers in the film mask area
x Clean the film brushes (2 pcs.)
x Clean the film brush for IX240 films
x Check the quality of the chemistry: Check the film process
x Check the quality of the chemistry: Check the paper process
x Before Shutdown: Spray the rack rollers in the Film Processor
x Before Shutdown: Spray the rack rollers in the Paper Processor
x Before starting to work: Compensate for evaporation in the Film Processor
x Before starting to work: Compensate for evaporation in the Paper Processor
x Clean the chemical filters in the Film Processor
x Clean the chemical filters in the Paper Processor
x Clean the squeegee unit in the Film Processor
x Film mask: Remove the dust
x Check the lens and remove the dust, if necessary
x Clean the film takeup
x Clean the film chute
x Lane distributor: Remove paper dust / deposits
x Clean the paper guides, the tank crossovers and the squeegee unit in the Paper
Processor
x Clean the calibration plate of the densitometer and the guide plates in the paper
outlet unit
x Clean the dryer rack
x Clean the transport belts and the print deposit in the Sorter
x Clean / replace the air filters
– Film Processor dryer
– Printer (fan box)
– Paper Processor
x Replace the chemical filters in the Film Processor
x Replace the chemical filters in the Paper Processor
x Clean chemical racks in the Film Processor
x Clean chemical racks in the Paper Processor
x Clean the exposure table
x Clean the paper outlet unit:
– Clean the guide plate
– Clean the transport belts
10-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Maintenance
intervals Maintenance jobs to be performed by the customer: d-lab.1
when required
x Change the back printer ink ribbon
x Empty the effluent tanks
10.4.2 Customer Maintenance: Image box workstation
WARNING!
High Voltage
Some of the units carry high voltage.
The system must be disconnected from the mains for cleaning and maintenance
jobs.
Maintenance
intervals Maintenance jobs to be performed by the customer: image box workstation
when required
x Clean the machine on the outside
10
10.4.3 Maintenance to be performed by the Engineer

Actions beyond these maintenance jobs are performed once a year by the service
engineer. See the following table and Maintenance in the folder Repair.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-3

10.5 Checklist Maintenance Jobs: Engineer
10.5.1 General Machine

Maintenance jobs
Clean the complete machine inside
Replace the filters mats of the air filters
10.5.2 Paper Magazine Compartment left and right

Components Maintenance jobs Lubricants and
cleaning agents
Paper magazine Coupling: Check and replace if necessary
compartment Check the magazine latches
10.5.3 Film Processor (FP)

cleaning agents
Film loaders and Blow out the film loader
film magazines Check the gears and on the film magazine the counter-gears and
the locking lever and replace them. if necessary
Main drive Lubricate the main drive chain Klübersynth
Lubricate the motor gear to the 50/60 Hz gear Klüberplex
Gears / bearings Clean and lubricate all gears and bearings Klübersynth
Wet section Clean the squeegee unit
Check wearing parts and replace them if necessary
Clean the racks and check them for smooth movement
Check the wearing parts and replace them if necessary
Clean the processing tanks
Rinse the hoses
Replace the valves (when required)
Check the circulation pumps
Replenisher pumps Clean the filters (water inlet)
Check the pumps and replace the valves or bellows, if required
Replenisher tanks Clean the tanks
Check the floater switches for smooth movement
Effluent tanks Clean the tanks
Docking system Clean the drip tray
Clean the nozzle (incl. the bellows and the cutter blade, replace if
necessary
10-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Components (FP) Maintenance jobs Lubricants and

cleaning agents
Dryer Blow out / clean the dryer
Clean the dryer inlet rubber rollers, replace if necessary
Lubricate the endless chain and the drive chain Molykote 33 Medium
Slightly oil the bearing of the toothed belt sprockets (when Constant OY 220
required)
Leader cutter Blow out the Leader cutter
Clean the rubber rollers
Lubricate the bearings and the coupling Topaz NB 52
10.5.4 Scanner (SC)

cleaning agents
Film mask carrier Check the rollers and replace them if necessary
Cartridge Feeder Blow out the mechanical parts and the light sensors
Film mask Lubricate the pawl / the holes in the bearing plate (when required) Isoflex Topaz NB 52
10.5.5 Paper Transport (PA)

10
cleaning agents
Print engine Remove the paper dust
Clean the transport belts and check their tension
Lubricate the bearing points of the rocker, replace if necessary Isoflex Topaz NB 52
Clean the light sensors
Cutter unit Clean the cutter unit with a vacuum cleaner
Clean the rollers, the guide plate and the cutter blade
Lane distributor Remove the paper dust
Clean the guide plates Agfa Cleaner
Clean the rubber rollers (use Isopropanol if they are very dirty) possibly with
Isopropanol
Clean the plastic rollers Lixtop plastic
cleaner
Check the roller pressure springs and the plastic bearings, replace if
necessary
Lubricate the bearing points Constant OY 220
Check the tension of the toothed belt drives, adjust if necessary
Clean the coupling and the counter-pressure plate
Clean the turntable and check the tension of the toothed belt
Clean the print head of the back printer
Replace the ink ribbon cartridge
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-5

10.5.6 Paper Processor (PP)

cleaning agents
PP, total Check and lubricate all chains, gears, bearings Klübersynth
Wet section Check the crossover units and replace the silicon hose if necessary
Check the squeegee unit and replace wearing parts, if necessary
Clean the racks and check their smooth movement
Check wearing parts and replace them if necessary
Lubricate the rack drive and check the torque limiter Klüberplex
Processing tanks Clean the processing tanks
Rinse the hoses
Replace the valves (when required)
Check the circulation pumps
Water tank Clean the water tank
Replenisher pumps Clean the filters (water inlet)
Check the pumps and replace the valves or bellows if necessary
Solenoid valve Check the solenoid valves of the replenisher and water pumps, replace
if necessary
Replenisher tanks Clean the tanks
Effluent tanks Clean the tanks
Docking system Clean the drip tray
Clean the nozzle (incl. the bellows and the cutter blade), replace if
necessary
Dryer rack Clean the gears, rollers, bearings and paper guide elements
Check the rollers, replace if necessary
Densitometer Clean the calibration plate
Check the mechanism of the solenoids for smooth movement
Check the position of the measuring head with respect to the
calibration plate (parallelism)
Sorter Clean the transport belt and the print deposit
Check the tension of the toothed belt, adjust if necessary
Main drive Check the main drive (motor, drive shaft, toothed belt sprockets)
Check the tension of the toothed belt, adjust if necessary
Check the gear for the frequency adjustment, replace if necessary
Clean the large plastic roller
Check the bearing blocks and replace them if necessary
Check the chain tension, retension it if necessary
Lubricate the endless drive chain Klübersynth
Lubricate the gears (located on the outside) Klüberplex
10-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.6 Daily Maintenance
10.6.1 Cleaning the Leader Cards (d-lab.1 with Film Processor)

Purpose:
Avoid film transport problems (jams) and contamination of the chemicals. The tapes do
not stick on dirty Leader cards.
Order numbers:
Short Leader for film 135 CL+P3-87253
Short Leader for film 120 CL+P3-97030
Short Leader for IX240 (APS) CM+7850657063
Check the Leader cards:

Clean dirty cards with a wet cloth
Replace damaged cards
10.6.2 Cleaning the APS Film Mask

Purpose:
Correct reading of magnetic data
Note:
Clean the magnetic head every day so that possible deposits cannot dry and make the
cleaning more difficult. 10
For cleaning only use cleaning strips soaked in Isopropanol:

– 3 cleaning strips
(Order no. CM+8.8506.1330.0)
– Complete set:
3 cleaning strips
+ 500 ml Isopropanol bottle (empty)
(Order no. CM+8.8506.1320.0)
– First filling of the bottle with Isopropanol 98% by the service in the country
– Refilling with Isopropanol 98% by the customer himself (no service).
CAUTION!
Fill the bottle only with Isopropanol. Other cleaning agents will damage the film
transport rollers (rubber) and in addition they dissolve the bonding of the cleaning
strips.
Dissolved glue will dirty the magnetic head irreversibly.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-7

Note:
Isopropanol evaporates very quickly. The cleaning strip must be put in the APS film
mask as long as it is still humid (within 20 seconds).
Mount the APS film mask

1
2 Call up the print mode Manual positioning
3
4
STOP Apply 4 drops of Isopropanol (98%) on the
cleaning strip and close the bottle
Put the cleaning strip with the dry end in the
APS film mask within 20 seconds
Touch Eject:
The cleaning strip is moved out
max. 20 sec
3003_067 Repeat all jobs again 2 x
10-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.6.3 Cleaning the Drive Rollers in the Film Mask

Purpose:
Avoid film transport malfunctions
Note:
Use cleaning strips
Order no. CM+8.8506.1340.0
Remove the deposits on the drive rollers on

the left and right side of the film mask:
Dip the cleaning strip in water and wipe
off the water
Call up the print mode Manual
positioning
dlab2520
Put the cleaning strip with the dry end in
the film mask
Touch Eject:
The cleaning strip is moved out
Repeat the operation until both rollers are
free of deposits
or
Remove the mirror box and the film mask

10
CAUTION!
If the contamination is very hard,
solvent-free cleaning agents can be used.
Clean the rollers with a humid cloth:

Turn the drive roller set (1) by hand
Pressure rollers (pivotable)
Note:
3003_062
The drive rollers are replaced upon the annual
Maintenance. Call the service is they are worn
earlier.
Put back the mirror box and the film mask
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-9

10.6.4 Cleaning the Film Brushes

Purpose:
Avoid damage on the film caused by deposits on the brush.
Remove deposits on the film brush

Pull out the film brushes towards the
front
Clean the film brush (remove dust) or
replace it in case of visible wear
Mount the film brush again
3003_058
10.6.5 Cleaning the Film Brush for Films IX240

Purpose:
Avoid damage on the film caused by deposits on the brush.
Remove deposits on the film brush

Remove the mirror box:
The film brush can be reached from the
right hand side of the Cartridge Feeder
Clean the film brush (remove dust) or
replace it in case of visible wear;
Order number CM+8.8506.CF27.0
Mount the film brush
Mount the mirror box
3003_059
10-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.6.6 Checking the Quality of Chemicals
10.6.6.1 Film Processor: Checking the Process

In order to maintain or restore optimum processing quality, the chemicals of the Film
Processor should be checked every day by means of the test strips.
Prerequisites:
Nominal processing temperatures of the solutions reached
No order in progress
Use AgfaPhoto control strips:
Agfa Labcheck CL control strips, order no. (ABC-Code) BWE2W or
Agfa AP 70 control strips, order no. (ABC-Code) BUX5S
Put the insert for film 135 (1) in the adapter

120 (2)
Note:
Do the following jobs in the darkroom or the
dark bag.
Roll up the control strip in accordance with

its curl (emulsion side in) and put it in the
adapter 120: 10
Mind the notch position (3)
The control strip should stand f the
adapter approx. 1 cm
Close the adapter
Leave the darkroom
Splice the Leader card to the control strip

3003_064
Put the Leader card and the adapter 120 in
the film magazine 120
Place the film magazine in the Film
Processor
Send the control strip to AgfaPhoto for
assessment
If the quality is not ok: change the chemistry
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-11

10.6.6.2 Paper Processor: Checking the Process

In order to maintain or restore optimum processing quality, the chemicals of the Paper
Processor should be checked every day by means of the test strips.
Prerequisites:
Nominal processing temperatures of the solutions reached
No order in process
Use process Agfa AP94 control strips:
Order no. (ABC-Code) BZQ9E
Put the control strips in the control strip

boxes (1-3) in a darkroom:
Mind the notch position:
This is to make sure that the emulsion
side (photographic layer) is up
First, push the control strip completely in
and then pull it out again approx. 20 mm.
Note:
If the control strip is inserted the wrong way
(emulsion turned down), it will show typical
dirt marks after the processing.
Call up:
Test
Control strip
Then a window (Pop-up) opens asking to
insert the box.
3003_106 Open Printer door
Put the control strip box in the Printer
slightly slanted
Push the closure (4) down at the front
Let it snap in in the provided holder (5)
behind the exposure table
Push the control strip box to the back (6)
Close the Printer door and press OK:
The control strip is transported into the
Paper Processor.
A prompt pops up asking to remove the
control strip box:
Remove the box
Close the window with OK
Send in the control strips for evaluation
If the quality is not ok: change the chemicals
10-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.6.7 Before Shutdown
10.6.7.1 Rinsing the Rack Rollers in the Film Processor

Purpose:
Remove chemical deposits in order to guarantee an optimum processing quality
Open the wet section:

Fold the dryer (1) away to the left
Remove the rack cover (2)
Rinse the rack rollers above level (3) with
water: use a spray bottle
Put back the rack cover
Fold down the dryer
3003_038
10.6.7.2 Rinsing the Rack Rollers in the Paper Processor

Purpose: 10
Remove chemical deposits in order to guarantee an optimum processing quality.
Fold up the Sorter (2)

1
Turn away the monitor (4) so that it is not
2 damaged when the wet section cover is
opened (1)
Open the wet sections (1) cover
4
Remove the tank crossovers (3)
Rinse the rack rollers above level (3) with
water: use a spray bottle
Put back the tank crossovers (3)
3 Close the wet section cover (1):

Support the cover with one hand, unlock it
3003_065
(PUSH HERE), and then close it.
Fold down the Sorter (2) again
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-13

10.7 Weekly Maintenance
10.7.1 Checking the Solution Levels before starting to work

Purpose:
Compensate for evaporation (also required with the automatic evaporation compensation).
Check the levels in the Film and Paper Processor tanks once a week before starting to
work.
CAUTION!
Risk of fire!
Defective level switches must be replaced. They must not be repaired.
If necessary call a Service Engineer:

– Replace defective level switches (technician).
– Search for leaks (technician)
10.7.1.1 Evaporation Compensation in the Film Processor
CAUTION!
Please observe the Safety instructions for the handling of chemicals in chapter 1
Fold away the dryer

Remove the cover from the wet section
Check the levels in the Film Processor tanks
and top up with water if necessary
In case of a major level drop:
Adjust the water replenishment to the
required filling level: see Film Processor:
Setting the replenishment rates in chapter 4.
Put back the wet section cover
Fold down the dryer again
3003_068
10-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.7.1.2 Paper Processor – important Advice
CAUTION!
Please observe the Safety instructions for the handling of chemicals in chapter 3.
Risk of injury if the wet section cover is unlocked unintentionally or without
paying attention.
Opening the cover:

The cover locks in only in vertical position
and may shut when unlocked
unintentionally.
Close the cover:
(PUSH HERE), then close it.
3009_011
10.7.1.3 Evaporation Compensation in the Paper Processor

10
Fold up the Sorter
Open the wet section cover
Check the levels in the Paper Processor tank
and top up with water if necessary
In case of a major permanent level drop:
Adjust the water replenishment to the
required filling level: see Paper Processor:
Setting the replenishment rates in chapter 4.
Close the cover:
Fold down the Sorter again
3003_069
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-15

10.7.2 Cleaning the Chemical filters

Purpose:
Ensure uniform circulation of the processing solutions by regular cleaning of the filters
10.7.2.1 Film Processor
CAUTION!
Fold up the dryer

Remove the wet section cover
Remove the chemical filters and clean them
in warm water with a brush
Put back the chemical filters:
Mind the color and the numbering
3009_013
10.7.2.2 Paper Processor
CAUTION!

paying attention; see 10.7.1.2 Paper Processor – important Advice
Fold up the sorter

Remove the chemical filters and clean them
in warm water with a brush
Mind the color and the numbering
Fold down the sorter again
3009_015
10-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.7.3 Cleaning the Squeegee Unit in the Film Processor

Purpose:
Ensure optimum processing quality
Fold up the dryer

Dismount the squeegee unit, soak it, wash it
and put it back
Fold down the dryer
3003_016
10.7.4 Film Mask: Removing the Dust

Purpose:
Reduce the risk of scratches on films 10
Remove the film mask

Open the film mask: remove dust and film
abrasion with a lintfree cloth
3003_070
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-17

10.7.5 Checking the Lens and removing the Dust when required
Purpose:
Ensure optimum scanning results
Tool:
Soft brush
Remove the mirror box (1) towards the front

Pull out the film mask (2)
Clean the lens cover glass (3)
Remove the dust
Put back the film mask and the mirror box
3003_063
10-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.7.6 Cleaning the Film Take-up

Purpose:
Remove dust and film abrasion which may deposit on pulled-in films and may affect the
print results.
Remove the film take-up and open it:

Pull the metal bracket (1) off to the front and
separate the two parts (2)
Remove dust and film abrasion with a
lintfree cloth
Close the film take-up and put it back
1
2
3003_071
10.7.7 Cleaning the Film Chute

Purpose:
Reduce the risk of scratches on films
10
Remove the film box (1):
The film chute is accessible.
Remove the dust from the film chute with a
lintfree cloth
Put back the film box (1)
Insert the bottom guide first and then the
top one and push the box to the back.
3003_027
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-19

10.7.8 Removing Paper Dust and Deposits in the Lane Distributor

An interlock switch in the door to the lane distributor ensures that the power supply to
this assembly is cut off as soon as the door is opened.
This switch must not be bypassed!
CAUTION!
Risk of injuries by toothed belts that may run in the marked area.
Do not reach into the machine, or be extremely careful when the drive is switched
on.
Purpose:
Avoid transport problems
Tools / cleaning agents:

Vacuum cleaner, brush, compressed air
Agfa Cleaner, Isopropanol
Open the locking lever (1; red)

Pull out the lane distributor on the
telescopic rails
Blow off the paper dust in such a way that it
does not get inside
Take out the guides after opening the quick-
action locks (2) and clean them with a damp
cloth or Agfa Cleaner
Insert the guide plates again:
Make sure that they sit correctly in the
holders and that the quick-action locks are
locked in
Clean the transport rollers
with a wet lintfree cloth
Use Isopropanol if they are very dirty
3003_039 Clean the inside with a vacuum cleaner
Push the lane distributor back in and fasten
it with the locking lever (1)
10-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.7.9 Cleaning the Paper Guide, the Tank Crossovers, and the Squeegee Unit in the Paper
Processor
Purpose:
Ensure optimum processing quality
For better removal of crystalline deposits the above-mentioned units must be soaked in
water. Then wash the units and insert them again.
Note:
Do not stack the units to avoid damage to the rollers and the paper guide surfaces.
Fold up the sorter

Open the tank section
Fasten the splash guard at the front to
protect the tank area from chemical splashes
10
3003_066
10.7.9.1 Paper guide

Remove the black cover (1) of the paper
guide
Remove the paper guide (2) and wash it
Put the parts back
3003_061
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-21

10.7.9.2 Removing the Tank Crossovers
CAUTION!
The CD tank must not be contaminated
with BX!
For this reason, the CD must be covered with

the splash guard
Remove the crossovers, let them drip dry,
put them in the accessory tray, take them to
the lab basin and wash them
Insert the crossovers again
Observe the attached color codes and the
numbering
The units must lock in
3003_053
10.7.9.3 Cleaning the Squeegee Units

Remove the squeegee unit, wash it and put
it back:
Insert the unit again
Close the wet section cover (1):
Fold down the Sorter
3003_054
10-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.7.10 Cleaning the Densitometer Calibration Plate and the Guide Plates in the Paper Outlet Unit
Purpose:
Ensure optimum calibration of the Densitometer
Note:
The densitometer is mounted in the paper outlet.
CAUTION!
Risk of injuries by moving transport rollers.
Open the cover of the paper outlet only when the machine is switched off or after
the transport rollers have stopped.
Open the above the Paper Processor dryer

Fold down the paper guide (3)
Unscrew the knurled screws (1) on the right
and left side on the guide plate of the
densitometer unit
Fold up the densitometer unit (2) and clean
the white calibration plate (4) with a humid
cloth (wetted with alcohol)
10
3003_040
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-23

Unscrew the screws (4) and fold up the guide

plate (5)
Clean the guide plates (5) and (6) with a
humid lintfree cloth or Agfa Cleaner
Fasten the guide plate (5) again
Fasten the densitometer again with the
knurled screws (see figure on the previous
page )
Fold up the paper guide (3)
Close the cover
3003_047
CAUTION!
A damaged calibration plate must be replaced by a technician.
10-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.7.11 Cleaning the Dryer Rack

Purpose:
Reduce the risk of scratches on the prints
Cleaning agents:
Lintfree cloth and warm water
Remove the dryer cover. Use a coin to turn

the lock through 90º.
Fold out the dryer rack:*
Open the 2 locking levers (1):
push them to the right
Lift out the dryer rack and put it down
Turn the set of rollers (2) by hand and clean
it with a humid cloth
Check all foam plastic rollers for damage
and have them replaced by a technician if
necessary
Check the smooth movement of the rack
10
3003_045
Unscrew the screws (3)
Lift the cover (1) a little and swivel it down
Turn the roller (2) by hand and clean it with
a humid cloth
3002_058
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-25

Clean the guide grid which can be folded

down (see figure) with a humid cloth and
mount it again
3003_046
Put back the dryer rack, fold it back into
working position and let it snap in
Mount the covers:
Put the screw slots in vertical or in
horizontal position and push the panel close
10.7.11.1 Cleaning the Sorter

Cleaning agent:
A cloth wetted in warm water
Clean the transport belts (1)

Clean the print deposit (2)
3003_041
10-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.8 Monthly Maintenance
10.8.1 Cleaning / Replacing the Air Filters
Note:
Let washed filters / filter mats dry well before putting them back.
Do not wring, bend or press them hard.
Do not let them dry in the sunshine.
10.8.1.1 Film Processor Dryer

Remove the cover (1)
Fold the holder (2) to the front
Remove the filter and clean it or replace
Put the filter back in its holder
Mount the cover (1)
3003_042
10
10.8.1.2 Printer (fan box)

Remove the filter (1) and wash it or replace
Put the filter back
1
3003_043
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-27


Remove the air filter:
Hold it by the handle and lift it out towards
the bottom
Take the filter out of the holder and clean it
or replace: (1) and (2)
Put the air filter in the holder and mount the
holder again
3003_029
10.8.2 Replacing Chemical Filters

Take the chemical filters from the accessory
pack
Plug the white filters on the black holders
3009_024 Short filters on short holders
(only on Film Processor)
Long filters on long holders
(on Film and Paper Processor)
10-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.8.2.1 Replacing the Chemical Filters in the Film Processor
CAUTION!
Order nos.:
Chemical filters for long filter cartridges CL+P4-86517
Chemical filters for short filter cartridges CL+P4-86518
Fold up the dryer

Remove the chemical filters and put them in
a lab tray
Strip worn filter cartridges off the shaft and
plug on new filter cartridges
Mind the color marking
Put back the wet section covers
3009_013
10.8.2.2 Replacing the Chemical Filters in the Paper Processor

10
CAUTION!

Order no.:
Fold up the sorter

Turn away the monitor (4) so that it is not
damaged when the wet section cover is
opened (1)
Remove the chemical filters and put them in
a lab tray
Strip worn filter cartridges off the shaft and
plug on new filter cartridges
Mind the color marking
3009_015 Fold down the sorter again
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-29

10.8.3 Cleaning the Processing Racks

Purpose:
Ensure optimum processing quality.
CAUTION!
10.8.3.1 Cleaning the Processing Racks in the Film Processor

Splashes of the chemicals may stain the
covers, so do use the splash guard (1) or
remove splashes immediately with water.
The CD solution must not be contaminated
by BL, For this reason, put the splash
guard (2) on the CD rack.
3003_050
Remove the squeegee unit (film feed into
the dryer): it is mounted on the SB2 rack.
Remove the racks:
Open the locking rails, let the racks drip dry,
put them in the accessory tray and take
them to the lab basin
Clean the racks
Clean the rollers with a brush and warm
water
Remove the deposit from the plastic parts
Put back the racks and the squeegee unit
and close the locking rails
3003_016
10-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.8.3.2 Cleaning the Processing Racks in the Paper Processor
CAUTION!

Splashes of the chemicals may stain the

covers, so do use the splash guard (1) or
remove splashes immediately with water.
Remove the paper guide, the tank crossovers
and the squeegee unit, see
10.7.9 Cleaning the Paper Guide, the Tank
Crossovers, and the Squeegee Unit in the
Paper Processor
The CD tank must not be contaminated with
BX. For this reason the CD must be covered
with the splash guard (2).
3003_044
Open the yellow locks of the racks

Lift the racks slowly and let them drip dry, 10
put them in the accessory tray and take
them to the lab basin
Clean the racks BX to SB4:
Rinse the racks in warm water
(max. 40 °C)
Clean the rollers and gears in warm water
with a soft brush
Remove deposits from the plastic parts, if
any
Unclips the guide elements and clean the
rollers behind with warm water
Mount the guide elements
3003_051 Insert the cleaned racks in the tanks: Mind
the order
Remove the splash guard (2) (see figure
above)
Clean the CD rack and put it back
Close the yellow locks of the racks
Clean the paper guide, the tank crossovers
and the squeegee unit and put them back
Close the wet section cover
Fold down the sorter again
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-31

10.8.4 Cleaning the Exposure Table

Purpose:
Ensure the exposure quality
Tools:
Vacuum cleaner, brush

Remove paper dust:
Clean the transport belt (1) with a lintfree
cloth
Clean the exposure table with a brush or
a vacuum cleaner
3003_072
10-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.9 Maintenance when required
10.9.1 Back Printer, Changing the Ink Ribbon

When the printing on the back of the prints gets too beak, the ink ribbon must be
replaced.

Open the red locking lever (1) and pull out
the lane distributor to the front
Unscrew the knurled screw of the back
printer
Open the Paper Processor door (otherwise
the ink ribbon cartridge cannot be removed)
Remove the ink ribbon cartridge (2)
Put in a new ink ribbon cartridge so that the
white lugs (3) engage between the ink
ribbon and the foil
Push in the lane distributor and fix it with
the locking lever
Close the Printer and Paper Processor doors
10
3003_048
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-33

10.9.2 Emptying the Effluent Tanks

As soon as one of the effluent tanks is full, a message appears on the screen advising that
this tank must be emptied.
10.9.2.1 Film Processor
Note:
Do not open the drain cocks in vertical position. They are used to empty the processing
tanks CD, BL, FX and SB, e.g. when single or all tank solutions are replaced.
Open the door (1) of the Film Processor

Empty the effluent tank:
CAUTION!
Do not open both cocks (2) at the same
time because the container may flow
over.
Place a container (3) under one of the

drain cocks. Open the cock and empty the
tank. Close the cock.
Do the same with the adjacent second
cock.
Check the tray (4):
If it is full although the customer emptied
3003_028
the tanks always in time, a technician must
be called. The hose systems may be
defective.
10-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto


Open the door (1) of the Paper Processor
Empty the effluent tank:
CAUTION!
Do not open both cocks (2) at the same
time because the container may flow
over.
Do not open the cocks above. They are

used to empty the processing tanks CD,
BX, and SB, e.g. when a completely new
tank solution is filled in one or in all
3003_049 tanks.
Place a container (3) under one of the

drain cocks. Open the cock and empty the
tank. Close the cock.
Do the same with the adjacent second
cock.
Check the tray (4):
If it is full although the customer emptied
the tanks always in time, a technician must
be called. The hose systems may be
defective.
10
10.9.3 Cleaning the image box workstation on the outside

Cleaning agent:
– Soft lintfree cloth or
– Cloth wetted in a mild solution of water and a mild cleaning agent
CAUTION!
Never use the following cleaning agents:
Cleaning sprays, diluting agents, benzene, cosmetics or other liquid substances as
well as cloths wetted in cleaning agents.
Clean the machine surface
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 10-35

10.10 Consumables for Customer Maintenance

Air filter Order no.
Film Processor CL+P4-87873
Printer (fan box) CM+78070ACC51
Paper Processor CL+P4-87794
Paper Processor CL+P4-E3812
Film Processor: Chemical filters + control strips Order no.

Chemical filters for short filter cartridges CL+P4-86518
Film Processor: Agfa Labcheck CL control strips BWEZW
or or
Agfa Process AP 70 control strips BUX5S
Paper Processor: Chemical filters + control strips Order no.

Chemical filters CD, BX, SB CL+P4-86517
Agfa Process AP 94 control strips BZQ9E
Others Order no.

Back printer ink ribbon CL+P4-6239
Leader cards for film 135 CL+P3-87253
Leader cards for film IX140 (APS) CM+7850657063
10.11 Cleaning Material

Order no. Designation Use
CM+9.9999.9231.0 Lixtop plastic cleaner Cleaning panel parts
CM+9.9999.9274.0 Compressed air spray Dust removal
CG+078047-0003 Optic Pads Cleaning optical parts
CP+G-003T Agfa Cleaner Prevents static charges
CM+8.8506.1330.0 Cleaning strips (3 pcs.) Cleaning the APS film mask
CM+8.8506.1320.0 Cleaning strips (3 pcs.) + Isopropanol bottle (empty) Cleaning the APS film mask
10-36 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Technical Data
11 Technical Data
All rights of design, alterations of designations or indications of the scope of delivery
reserved. Current data see Ö Technical Data Sheets.
11.1 Versions
Digital Input on
(Order Number)
APS Film mask

Film Processor
No. of Paper
and Feeder
Magazines
Chemicals
image box
APS Zoom
ABC Code
Easy Box
Version Type
Monitor
(IX240)
d-lab.1
d-lab.1
8070/040 5MGRP yes 1 TS-LCD no yes yes yes no
starter
d-lab.1
8070/050 5KW92 yes 2 TS-LCD no yes yes yes yes
allrounder 1
d-lab.1
8070/100 5KXA6 yes 2 TS-LCD yes no yes yes yes
allrounder 2
d-lab.1
8070/109 — yes 2 TS-LCD yes no yes yes yes
plus
d-lab.1s optional
8070/230 5MAFB no 1 no yes no no no
starter oc CRT/LCD
d-lab.1s optional
8070/240 5MAGD no 1 no yes yes yes no 11
starter CRT/LCD
d-lab.1s optional
8070/300 5LEKS no 1 no yes yes yes no
basic 1 CRT/LCD
d-lab.1s optional
8070/200 5LEJQ no 2 no yes yes yes no
basic 2 CRT/LCD
d-lab.1s optional
8070/310 — no 2 no yes yes yes yes
plus CRT/LCD
netlab.1 optional
8070/130 5L95J no 1 no yes no no no
starter oc CRT/LCD
netlab.1 optional
8070/150 5LQK4 no 2 no yes yes no no
allrounder CRT/LCD
netlab.1 optional
8070/160 — no 2 no yes yes no no
plus CRT/LCD
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-1

Technical Data d-lab.1 family: Operation
11.1.1 Weight: Machine packed / unpacked

packed unpacked
Version Type Total Total Printer + Film Magazine Computer 8 inch
weight weight Paper Processor cabinet cabinet Sorter
Processor (approx.) (approx.)
d-lab.1 starter 8070/040 930 kg 830 kg 600 kg 230 kg — — —
d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050 930 kg 830 kg 600 kg 230 kg — — —
d-lab.1 allrounder 2 8070/100 930 kg 830 kg 600 kg 230 kg — — —
d-lab.1 plus 8070/109 994 kg 894 kg 600 kg 230 kg — — 64 kg
d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230 730 kg 630 kg 600 kg — — 30 kg —
d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 730 kg 630 kg 600 kg — — 30 kg —
d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 700 kg 600 kg 600 kg — — 30 kg —
d-lab.1s basic 2 8070/200 750 kg 650 kg 600 kg — 50 kg — —
d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 844 kg 744 kg 600 kg — 80 kg * 64 kg
netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130 710 kg 610 kg 580 kg — — 30 kg —
netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150 760 kg 660 kg 580 kg — 80 kg * —
netlab.1 plus 8070/160 824 kg 724 kg 580 kg — 80 kg * 64 kg
* Cabinet for LH paper magazine and two computer systems
11.1.2 Dimensions
11.1.2.1 Machine packed / unpacked

Packed: machine + accessory box Unpacked: machine
Version Type Width Depth Height Width Depth Height
d-lab.1 starter 8070/040 2,400 mm 1,100 mm 1,900 mm 2,270 mm 814 mm 1,630 mm
d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050 2,400 mm 1,100 mm 1,900 mm 2,270 mm 840 mm 1,630 mm
d-lab.1 allrounder 2 8070/100 2,400 mm 1,100 mm 1,900 mm 2,270 mm 840 mm 1,630 mm
d-lab.1 plus 8070/109 2,850 mm 1,100 mm 1,900 mm 2,710 mm 814 mm 1,630 mm
d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230 2,200 mm 1,100 mm 1,700 mm 1,890 mm 814 mm 1,435 mm
d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 2,200 mm 1,100 mm 1,700 mm 1,890 mm 814 mm 1,435 mm
d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 1,800 mm 1,100 mm 1,900 mm 1,560 mm 840 mm 1,630 mm
d-lab.1s basic 2 8070/200 2,200 mm 1,100 mm 1,900 mm 1,890 mm 840 mm 1,630 mm
d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 2,500 mm 1,100 mm 1,700 mm 2,330 mm 814 mm 1,412 mm
netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130 2,200 mm 1,100 mm 1,700 mm 1,890 mm 814 mm 1,435 mm
netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150 2,500 mm 1,100 mm 1,700 mm 2,330 mm 814 mm 1,412 mm
netlab.1 plus 8070/160 2,500 mm 1,100 mm 1,700 mm 2,330 mm 814 mm 1,412 mm
* Height 2 m with 6 Inch Sorter (Belt Tray) folded up or Paper Processor cover lifted up
11-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.1.2.2 d-lab.1 Components

Dimensions
Components Width Depth Height
Printer und Paper Processor 1,470 mm 840 mm 1,630 mm
Film Processor 800 mm 840 mm 1,440 mm
Magazine cabinet 420 mm 840 mm 1,080 mm
Computer cabinet 250 mm 840 mm 1,080 mm
Cabinet for
LH magazine and 420 mm 840 mm 1,080 mm
two computer systems
Add-on table 200 mm 840 mm —
8 inch sorter 441 mm 621 mm 1,320 mm
11.1.2.3 Dimensions image box

Dimensions
Type Width Depth Height
image box 9977/500 432 mm 370 mm 460 mm
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-3

11.1.3 Space requirement for Operation and Service: d-lab.1 / image box
d-lab.1 image box
Version Type Total Floor space Free spaces * Operating Floor space
space
d-lab.1 starter 8070/040 4.09 m2 1.85 m2 2.24 m2 — —
d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050 4.15 m2 1.91 m2 2.24 m2 — —
d-lab.1 allrounder 2 8070/100 4.15 m2 1.91 m2 2.24 m2 0.32 m2 0.16 m2
d-lab.1 plus 8070/109 4.45 m2 2.21 m2 2.24 m2 0.32 m2 0.16 m2
d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230 3.78 m2 1.54 m2 2.24 m2 — —
d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 3.78 m2 1.54 m2 2.24 m2 — —
d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 3.55 m2 1.31 m2 2.24 m2 — —
d-lab.1s basic 2 8070/200 3.55 m2 1.31 m2 2.24 m2 — —
d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 3.83 m2 1.59 m2 2.24 m2 — —
netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130 3.78 m2 1.54 m2 2.24 m2 — —
netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150 4.13 m2 1.89 m2 2.24 m2 — —
netlab.1 plus 8070/160 4.13 m2 1.89 m2 2.24 m2 — —
* Free spaces in detail, see Ö following table
d-lab.1 family: Required free spaces in detail

Version Type side left side right front left front right rear
d-lab.1 starter 8070/040
d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050 no free space
600 mm 600 mm 590 mm 600 mm required
d-lab.1 plus 8070/109
d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230
d-lab.1s starter 8070/240
d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 600 mm 600 mm 500 mm 600 mm Due to Drive Bay:
approx. 100 mm
d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 If a CRT monitor
is used:
netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130 approx. 200 mm
netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150 600 mm 600 mm 500 mm 600 mm
netlab.1 plus 8070/160
11-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.1.4 Illustrations / Machine Dimensions

d-lab.1 starter
3008_012
Width x depth x height 2,270 x 814 x 1,630 mm
d-lab.1 allrounder 1
d-lab.1 allrounder 2
11
3008_005
d-lab.1 plus
3008_013
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-5

d-lab.1s starter oc
d-lab.1s starter
3008_014
d-lab.1s basic 1
3008_006
d-lab.1s basic 2
3008_007
11-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1s plus
3008_010
netlab.1 starter oc
11
3008_008

netlab.1 allrounder
netlab.1 plus
3008_009
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-7

11.1.5 Version dependent data

General d-lab.1 with Film Processor:
Digital Minilab for the development and printing of negative films, for the printing of
slides and images from digital sources, and for saving digital data on digital storage
media.
d-lab1 allrounder 2 and d-lab.1plus: digital orders are prepared on the image box
workstation; CDs are burned there as well.
d-lab.1s:
Digital Minilab for the printing of negative films, slides and images from digital sources,
and for saving digital data on digital storage media.
d-lab.1 with Film Processor / d-lab.1s:
High-resolution Main Scanner
Simultaneous input of films and digital orders
netlab.1:
Digital Minilab for printing and saving digital data on digital storage media.
d-lab.1 / d-lab.1s: Film size Negative size

Film and negative sizes 135 negative Full-Frame, Half-Frame, Panorama
IX240 negative Classic, HighVision, Panorama
135 slides mounted slides
135 slides unmounted slides
Production capacity Version Type Prints / hour (size 10x15)

d-lab.1 starter 8070/040 550 p/h
d-lab.1 allrounder 1 8070/050 730 – 800 p/h
d-lab.1 allrounder 2 8070/100 730 – 800 p/h
d-lab.1 plus 8070/109 1.100 p/h
d-lab.1s starter oc 8070/230 550 p/h
d-lab.1s starter 8070/240 550 p/h
d-lab.1s basic 1 8070/300 730 – 800 p/h
d-lab.1s basic 2 8070/200 730 – 800 p/h
d-lab.1s plus 8070/310 1.100 p/h
netlab.1 starter oc 8070/130 550 p/h
netlab.1 allrounder 8070/150 730 – 800 p/h
netlab.1 plus 8070/160 1.100 p/h
Processing times d-lab.1s 3 min 25 sec incl. Dryer
11-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.2 Complete System

Ambient conditions – Ambient conditions for storage / transport:
Temperature -25 °C to +60 °C
Relative humidity 15% to 90%
– Ambient conditions for operation:
Room temperature +15 °C to +30 °C
– Maximum ambient lighting:
Printer / Paper Processor 10,000 Lux
Paper magazines 20,000 Lux
Electrical requirements – Connecting values:
3W+N+PE 220/380V, 230/400V, 240/415V 50/60 Hz 3 x 15 A
3W+PE 200V, 210V, 220V, 230V, 240V 50/60 Hz 3 x 19 A
2W+PE 200V, 210V, 220V, 230V, 240V 50/60 Hz 1 x 19 A
1W+N+PE
– Fusing:
Use circuit breakers with slow trigger characteristics
General – Printer with digital print system
– Film Processor and Paper Processor with AgfaPhoto-specific chemicals
Heat emission, 2,752 kcal/h
complete machine
Interfaces – Ethernet for data exchange and to connect to an external Workstation or a lab
network
– Modem
– Label printer for pricing
Noise level 65 dB(A) standby
68 dB(A) printing 11
Main control Computer system consisting of a main computer (main control) and an image processor
(computing image data)
Monitor – 15 inch display
– Resolution 1.024 x 768
Operating conditions see Ö Ambient conditions
Optional accessories see respective section of each version Ö 11.11
Print sizes – Minimum: 82 mm x 120 mm (3,25" x 4,75") 82 mm (3,25") paper
– Maximum: 210 mm x 305 mm (8,25" x 12") 210 mm (8,25") paper
Space requirement See space requirement of the versions Ö 11.1.3
User interface TS-LCD (Touch-screen Monitor, flat) or CRT-Monitor
Weight See weight of the versions Ö 11.1.1
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-9

11.3 Film Processor

Bath circulation Automatic by magnetic pumps, each bath with a filter
Bleach bath ventilation Via air pump in BL
Chemicals easy film box F1 Reach: 400 films
d-lab.1 easy film box F2 Reach: 200 films
Dryer Hot air dryer with automatic economy-circuit in standby
Effluent tanks 2 tanks with filling level monitoring
1. CD and BL (developer and bleach)
2. FX and SB (fixer and stabilizer)
Evaporation compensation automatic by means of water regeneration
Film sizes 135, IX240, 120/220, 110
Processing speed 65 cm / min (26 inch / min)
Processing temperatures CD BL (FX) SB1–SB3 Dryer
37,8° 38° ± 3° 38° ± 3° 50°
Processing times 9 minutes 20 Seconds (incl. dryer)
Replenisher tanks 4 tanks each with level monitoring
Replenishment Automatic filling and mixing of replenisher solutions by a docking system
Throughput dependent calculation and automatic supply of the required
replenishment rates
Compensation for evaporation by automatic water replenishment
Replenishment rates (ml/m2) CD BL FX SB
Chemistry Water Chemistry Water Chemistry Water Chemistry Water
normal 567 0 126 0 828 0 504 559
increased Factor 1,3 0 Factor 1,3 0 Factor 1,3 0 Factor 1,3 726
maximum Factor 1,7 0 Factor 1,7 0 Factor 1,7 0 Factor 1,7 950
Tank capacities (liters) CD BL FX1/2 SB1/2/3
Processing tanks 11,5 3,8 2 x 3,1 3 x 2,1
Replenisher tanks 9,0 1,0 6,6 4,1
Effluent tanks 7,5 5,9
Tank preparation d-lab.1 Film Tank Kit
(liters)
Temperature control Automatic temperature control by electronic temperature control.
CD, BL, and SB are directly heated, FX is heated indirectly via BL
Transport system Single-track / drive on one side
The film leader card (short leader) is transported by transport gears.
Type Color Film Processor for daylight operation
11-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.4 Scanner (d-lab.1 with Film Processor / d-lab.1s)

File format BMP or JPG (24 bit RGB)
Film sizes Color negative 135, IX240, 110
B/W negative 135
Slide positive 135
Lens Bifocal (for all sizes)
Light system LED lamphouse
Resolution / enlargements 1. up to 152 x 210 380 dpi
2. up to 210 x 305 260 dpi
Resolution for size 135 approx. 4 mill. Pixel (2.460 x 1.640 pixels)
Scanner system Prescan for all film brands, types, sizes
Mainscan by means of high-resolution CCD-Chip 1.640 x 2,460 pixels
11.5 Digital Input on the Machine or via Network

CD production Film on CD
on the d-lab File on CD
Standard: on all machines of the d-lab.1 family,
except d-lab.1 allrounder 2 and d-lab.1 plus (image box)
Data input Digital camera: see Ö Card reader
on the d-lab Other digital media: CD
Card reader Integrated 6-port card: Standard on all machines of the d-lab.1 family,
except d-lab.1 allrounder 2 and d-lab.1 plus (image box) 11
The card reader has slots for the following cards:
PCMCIA-Slot
Secure Digital – Multi Media Card
Memory Stick
Compact Flash + Microdrive
Smart Media
xD
Monitor TS-LCD monitor (touch screen) or
CRT monitor
Network Requires a Server with the Software d-workflow.
Ethernet 100 Base T
AgfaPhoto Pixtasy 5.0 System
PC and Macintosh Computer (handling by means of the d-lab Transfer Software)
Processor Pentium 4
2,4 or 2,8 GHz depending on the version
1,5 or 3,0 GB RAM depending on the version
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-11

11.6 Digital Input via image box (d-lab.1 allrounder 2 / d-lab.1 plus)
Card reader Integrated 6-port card reader with slots for the following cards:
PCMCIA-Slot
Secure Digital – Multi Media Card
Memory Stick
Compact Flash + Microdrive
Smart Media
xD
CD production Film data on CD
Digital images on CD
On d-lab.1 allrounder 2 and d-lab.1 plus standard via the image box workstation,
optional on d-lab.1.
Data input Digital camera: see Ö Card reader
Other digital media: CD
Data output Data transfer from the image box to d-lab.1
Dimensions image box:
432 x 370 x 460 mm (width x depth x height)
17 x 15 x 18 inch (width x depth x height)
Network Requires a Server with the Software d-workflow
Ethernet 100 Base T
Monitor Touch-Screen Monitor
Processor Pentium, ≥ 1,6 GHz, ≥ 512 MB RAM
Software image box workstation Software including AgfaPhoto image enhancement
technology
11.7 Exposure Unit

Exposure system MDDM Print Technology (Micro-Dot-Display Multiplexing)
LCD resolution 1,200 x 1,600 Pixel
Light source LED
Print resolution max. 380 ppi for print size 15 x 20 cm (6 x 8 inch)
max. 260 ppi for print size 21 x 30 cm (8¼ x 12 inch)
11-12 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.8 Printing
Back print One line, 80 characters at max.
Effects White borders
Colored borders
B/W and Sepia effects
Crops and crop enlargements
Indexprints Up to 21 x 30 cm (up to 8¼ x 12 inch) on photographic paper
various sizes in one order are possible
Options Passport
Combiprints (various sizes of one and the same picture on one print)
Print sizes All sizes up to 21 x 30 cm (8¼ x 12 inch)
Special products Greeting cards
Business cards
Passport
Calendar pictures
CD cases / CD Inlays
TFS and dTFS Automatic corrections of films and digital images:
color, density and contrast management, sharpness, compensation of over-ex and
under-ex, scratch correction for color films
11.9 Paper Transport

Paper magazines 2 daylight magazines can be used at the same time
Max. paper length: 180 m
Paper widths: 82 - 210 mm (3¼ - 8¼ inch)
11
Paper transport Single sheet transport on one track, paper cut prior to the exposure
Lane distributor for 2-track transport into the Paper Processor
Paper widths cm 89 95 102 114 120 127 152 165 178 203 210
Inch 3¼ 3¾ 4 4½ 4¾ 5 6 6½ 7 8 8¼
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-13

11.10 Paper Processor

Bath circulation Automatic by magnetic pumps, each bath with a filter
Chemicals easy paper box 110:
Reach 110 m2 (1 m2 = approx. 2,8 films)
Densitometer Integrated densitometer for automatic production calibration
Dryer Hot air dryer with automatic economy-circuit in standby
Effluent tank 3 tanks: one per solution
Evaporation compensation Automatic by means of water regeneration
Processing temperatures CD * BX SB1–SB3 Dryer
38° ± 0.3 38° ± 2.0 37°± 3.0 50°
All starter oc, starter and plus:
higher CD temperature 40° / 27 sec process
Processing times 3 minutes 25 seconds (incl. dryer)
Replenisher tanks 3 tanks each with level monitoring
Replenishment rates (ml/m2) CD BX SB
Chemistry Water Chemistry Water Chemistry Water
normal 41 10 68 0 41 159
increased Factor 1,4 14 Factor 1,4 0 Factor 1,4 223
maximum Factor 1,6 16 Factor 1,6 0 Factor 1,6 254
Replenishment (docking) Automatic filling and mixing of replenisher solutions by a docking system
Throughput dependent calculation and automatic supply of the required
replenishment rates
Compensation for evaporation by automatic water replenishment
Sorter Sorter for the stacking of orders:
1. Sorter: 1 tray (single tray)
2. 6 inch Sorter (belt tray):
Print sizes up to paper width 152 mm can be placed in the sorter, larger
formats are deposited on the large print tray.
3. 8 inch Sorter: 10 trays
Tank preparation d-lab.1 Paper Tank Kit
Tank capacities (liters): CD BX SB
Processing tank 9,5 9,5 3 x 5,5
Replenisher tank 4,5 7,5 4,5
Effluent tank 3,5 4,5 5,0
11-14 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Temperature control Automatic temperature control by electronic temperature control.

CD, BX and SB are directly heated
Transport system – Roller drive, two tracks
– Single sheet:
minimum length 120 mm
maximum width 210 mm
– Lane distribution :
2 tracks up to a size of 102 x 152 mm
1 track up to a size of 210 x 305 mm
– Transport speed: 1.414 mm/min (50/60 Hz)
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-15

11.11 Optional Accessories
11.11.1 d-lab.1 starter

d-lab.1 starter Quantity Type Order no.
Standard Accessory Package (2) 1 see Ö 11.11.13 Accessory Packages:
Standard and Optional Accessories
Printer / Paper Processor
Paper magazine up to a paper width of (additional) 1 8060/361 5H9LN
Reorder keyboard d-lab 1 8070/700 5KXZN
USB Modem for Remote Service Access 1 8060/311 5H1U7
Basic APS: Film mask IX240 (APS) with Magnet code reader 1 8071/141
APS Upgrade: Magnet code reader Cartridge Feeder 1 8071/142 5MCA8
Slide carrier 1 8071/330 5KXDD
External water supply d-lab.1 1 8070/351 5KLUN
Software-Lizenz
Import: Indexprint 1 8060/401 5HUCG
Import: Combiprint / Passport 1 8060/402 5HZ9X
Clickrate enabled 1 8070/602 5LGVP
Clickrate not enabled 1 8070/603 5LGWR
a-REDC (automatic red eye correction) 1 8060/606 5LRJ6
Slide film unmounted 1 8070/604 5LRG2
Slide scratch correction 1 8070/605 5LRH4
11-16 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.11.2 d-lab.1 allrounder 1

d-lab.1 allrounder 1 Quantity Type Order no.
Optional Accessory Package (2) 1 see Ö 11.11.13 Accessory Packages:
Paper magazine up to a paper width of (additional) 1 8060/361 5H9LN
External water supply d-lab.1 1 8070/351 5KLUN
Software-Lizenz
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-17

11.11.3 d-lab.1 allrounder 2

d-lab.1 allrounder 2 Quantity Type Order no.
Optional Accessory Package (2) see Ö 11.11.13 Accessory Packages:
Paper magazine up to 210 mm paper width (additional) 1 8060/361 5H9LN
Reorder keyboard d-lab.1 1 8070/700 5KXZN
6-port card reader (Retrofit-Option) 1 8070/601 5LELU
External water supply 1 8070/351 5KLUN
Software license
File print enabled on the d-lab.1 (Retrofit-Option) 1 8070/601 5LELU
Film on CD enabled on the d-lab.1 1 8070/600 5LEMW
image box
Additional image box 1 9977/700 5GK1R
– Function to burn on CDs enabled 1 9977/610 5KOLP
– Function Passport/Combiprint enabled 1 9977/680 5LDXG
Print from Print: Flatbed scanner and license code 1 9977/650 5K1SL
Label printer 1 9977/600 5KG2T
Turntable 1 9977/630 5KQ8A
Post 1 9977/640 5K1RJ
d-media 1 9977/404 5H6Z4
Transfer of order data: Transfer via CD and license code 1 9977/620 5KOMR
External 120 film printing solution
120 Scanner Nikon LS 8000 or LS 9000
PC and Monitor with: For information contact the
Nikon Scan Software (scanning) AgfaPhoto dealer.
AgfaPhoto d-studio (image adjustment)
AgfaPhoto d-workflow (image transfer)
Connection PC to d-lab.1 (hub)
11-18 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.11.4 d-lab.1 plus

d-lab.1 plus Quantity Type Order no.
Reorder keyboard d-lab.1 1 8070/700 5KXZN
6-port card reader (Retrofit-Option) 1 8070/601 5LELU
Software license
image box 11
Additional image box 1 9977/700 5GK1R
– Function to burn on CDs enabled 1 9977/610 5KOLP
– Function Passport/Combiprint enabled 1 9977/680 5LDXG
Print from Print: Flatbed scanner and license code 1 9977/650 5K1SL
Label printer 1 9977/600 5KG2T
Turntable 1 9977/630 5KQ8A
Post 1 9977/640 5K1RJ
d-media 1 9977/404 5H6Z4
Transfer of order data: Transfer via CD and license code 1 9977/620 5KOMR
External 120 film printing solution
120 Scanner Nikon LS 8000 or LS 9000
PC and Monitor with: For information contact the
Nikon Scan Software (scanning) AgfaPhoto dealer.
AgfaPhoto d-studio (image adjustment)
AgfaPhoto d-workflow (image transfer)
Connection PC to d-lab.1 (hub)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-19

11.11.5 d-lab.1s starter oc

d-lab.1s starter oc Quantity Type Order no.
Monitor
CRT Monitor + USB Mouse 1 8060/342 5MBXG
TS-LCD Monitor (touch screen, flat screen) 1 8070/341 5MGKA
Software license
11-20 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.11.6 d-lab.1s starter

d-lab.1s starter Quantity Type Order no.
Monitor
Software license
Slide scratch correction 1 8070/605 5LRH4 11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-21

11.11.7 d-lab.1s basic 1

d-lab.1s basic 1 Quantity Type Order no.
Magazine cabinet for LH paper magazine 1 8070/401 5LGSJ
Software license
11-22 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.11.8 d-lab.1s basic 2

d-lab.1s basic 2 Quantity Type Order no.
Software license
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-23

11.11.9 d-lab.1s plus

d-lab.1s plus Quantity Type Order no.
Film mask IX240 (APS) 1 8071/140 5KXCB
Monitor
Software license
11-24 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.11.10 netlab.1 starter oc

netlab.1 starter oc Quantity Type Order no.
Monitor
Software license
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-25

11.11.11 netlab.1 allrounder

netlab.1 allrounder Quantity Type Order no.
Paper magazine up to 210 mm paper width 1 8060/361 5H9LN
Monitor
Software license
11-26 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.11.12 netlab.1 plus

netlab.1 plus Quantity Type Order no.
Paper magazine up to 210 mm paper width 1 8060/361 5H9LN
Monitor
Software license
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-27

11.11.13 Accessory Packages: Standard and Optional Accessories

Machines
with Film Processor without Film Processor
(starter / basic / plus)
Order No. Description Standard Optional Standard Optional
(1) (2) (3) (4)
P4-2204 Film Picker 135 0 1 0 0
— MC Data Disc assy 1 0 1 0
P3-4876(5/1) Grommet 1 0 1 0
P3-97028 Leader cards (135) 5 0 0 0
P3-97030 Leader cards (120) 0 1 0 0
P4-2300 Splicing Tape 0 1 0 0
8506/130 135 Film Cartridge 1 0 0 0
8506/132 120 Film Cartridge 0 1 0 0
P4A-95654 Handle Assy 1 0 0 0
P5A-94193 Filter Assy (FP) 4 0 0 0
P5A-94194 Filter Assy (FP) 3 0 0 0
P2-86546 Filter Shaft (PP) 6 0 6 0
P4-86517 Filter (Water) (FP,PP) 6 0 6 0
P5A-88580 Splicing Unit 0 1 0 0
— Manual Tape spender 0 1 0 0
P3-88858 Splash Guard C 0 1 0 0
P3-88859 Splash Guard D 0 1 0 0
P5A-F2706 Control Strip Magazine 1 0 1 0
P3-88838 Splash Guard A 0 1 0 1
P3A-95529 Splash Guard B Assy 0 1 0 1
P2-88638 Effluent Tank 1 0 1 0
P4-5953 Jug (5l) 0 1 0 1
P4-5280 Wash Bottle (500 ml) 0 1 0 1
P4-6076 Vat 0 1 0 1
P4-5119(5/1) Measuring Cup (200 ml) 0 1 0 1
P4-5954(1/1) Drain Hose 2m 0 1 0 1
P4-6258 Tool Kit 0 1 0 1
P3-1583(58/1) Cord Lock SCL-18B 1 0 1 0
P4-6239 Ribbon Cassette 1 0 1 0
P3A-F3352 O-Tray Assy 1 0 1 0
P2-F1943 Tray 1 0 1 0
11-28 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

B. Agfa Part Machines

with Film Processor without Film Processor
(starter / basic / plus)
Order No. Description Standard Optional Standard Optional
(1) (2) (3) (4)
L8.8506.1340.1 Cleaning 135 0 1 0 1
L7.8506.5706.3 Leader cards (IX240) 0 5 0 0
L8.8506.1320.1 Cleaning strip 135 0 1 0 0
L7.8506.5704.0 Filmpicker MFP.APS.170.024 from 0 1 0 0
Technotape (incl. driver)
P4A-95760 IX240 adapter for 120 film cartridge 0 1 0 0
L1.8070.040D.0 DD+18070040D0 1 0 1 0
L1.8070.101D.0 DD+18070101D0 German 1 0 1 0
L1.8070.112D.0 DD+18070112D0 Englisch 1 0 1 0
L1.8070.123D.0 DD+18070123D0 French 1 0 1 0
L1.8070.134D.0 DD+18070134D0 Italian 1 0 1 0
L1.8070.145D.0 DD+18070145D0 Spanish 1 0 1 0
L1.8070.156D.0 DD+18070156D0 Netherlands 1 0 1 0
L1.8070.167D.0 DD+18070167D0 Japanese 1 0 1 0
L7.8506.CFJ1.1 Adjustment help 1 0 1 0
L8.8071.SF41.0 Calibration tool 1 0 1 0
L8.8070.8000.2 Software d-lab.1 1 0 1 0
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-29

11.12 Consumables
11.12.1 AGFAPHOTO Type 12 Paper
AGFAPHOTO Type 12 Paper

print "AGFAPHOTO"
W x L (cm x m) W x L (inch x ft) Rolls per Order no.
packing unit
310 Glossy
8,9 x 91,5 3,5 x 300 8 5KRTK
8,9 x 183 3,5 x 600 4 5KRUM
10,2 x 91,5 4,0 x 300 8 5KRWQ
10,2 x 183 4,0 x 600 4 5KRXS
12,7 x 91,5 5,0 x 300 4 5KRZW
12,7 x 183 5,0 x 600 2 5KR1Y
15,2 x 91,5 6,0 x 300 4 5KR33
15,2 x 183 6,0 x 600 2 5KR45
17,8 x 91,5 7,0 x 300 4 5KR6A
20,3 x 91,5 8,0 x 300 4 5KR7C
319 Lustre
8,9 x 91,5 3,5 x 300 8 5KSDR
8,9 x 183 3,5 x 600 4 5KSET
10,2 x 91,5 4,0 x 300 8 5KSGX
10,2 x 183 4,0 x 600 4 5KSHZ
12,7 x 91,5 5,0 x 300 4 5KSK4
12,7 x 183 5,0 x 600 2 5KSL6
15,2 x 91,5 6,0 x 300 4 5KSOD
15,2 x 183 6,0 x 600 2 5KSPF
17,8 x 91,5 7,0 x 300 4 5KSRK
20,3 x 91,5 8,0 x 300 4 5KSSM
11-30 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.12.2 AGFAPHOTO Type AP Paper
AGFAPHOTO Type AP AGFAPHOTO Type AP OR

Print "AGFAPHOTO" No print
Rolls per Order no. Rolls per Order no.
W x L (cm x m) W x L (inch x ft) packing unit packing unit
310 Glossy
8,9 x 91,5 3,5 x 300 8 5L1H7 — —
8,9 x 183 3,5 x 600 4 5L1JA 4 5LS8U
10,2 x 91,5 4,0 x 300 8 5L1MG — —
10,2 x 183 4,0 x 600 4 5L1NJ 4 5L29W
12,7 x 91,5 5,0 x 300 4 5L1UX — —
12,7 x 183 5,0 x 600 2 5L1VZ 2 5L3D7
15,2 x 91,5 6,0 x 300 4 5L1Z8 — —
15,2 x 183 6,0 x 600 2 5L12D 2 5L3EA
17,8 x 91,5 7,0 x 300 4 5L16M — —
20,3 x 91,5 8,0 x 300 2 5L18Q 4 5L3HG
319 Lustre
8,9 x 91,5 3,5 x 300 8 5L4DC — —
8,9 x 183 3,5 x 600 4 5L4FG — —
10,2 x 91,5 4,0 x 300 8 5L4JN — —
10,2 x 183 4,0 x 600 4 5L4KP 4 5L5SB
12,7 x 91,5 5,0 x 300 4 5L4NV — — 11
12,7 x 183 5,0 x 600 2 5L4OX 2 5L5TD
15,2 x 91,5 6,0 x 300 4 5L4S6 — —
15,2 x 183 6,0 x 600 2 5L4T8 2 5L5UF
17,8 x 91,5 7,0 x 300 4 5L4WF — —
20,3 x 91,5 8,0 x 300 2 5L4XH — —
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-31

11.12.3 AGFAPHOTO Sensatis Plus Paper

AGFAPHOTO Sensatis Plus
Print "AGFAPHOTO SENSATIS"
Rolls per Order no.
B x L (cm x m) B x L (Zoll x Fuß) packing unit
310 Glossy
8,9 x 158 3,5 x 518 4 5L6KX
10,2 x 158 4,0 x 518 4 5L6M2
11,4 x 158 4,5 x 518 2 5L6P8
12,7 x 158 5,0 x 518 2 5L6RD
15,2 x 158 6,0 x 518 2 5L6VM
17,8 x 79 7,0 x 259 4 5L6YS
20,3 x 79 8,0 x 259 2 5L61W
319 Lustre
8,9 x 158 3,5 x 518 4 5L7WS
10,2 x 158 4,0 x 518 4 5L7XU
12,7 x 158 5,0 x 518 2 5L711
15,2 x 158 6,0 x 518 2 5L747
17,8 x 79 7,0 x 259 4 5L77E
20,3 x 79 8,0 x 259 2 5L78G
11-32 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

11.12.4 Chemicals, Chemical filters, Control strips

Chemicals for the Film Processor (Easy film Box) Order no.
d-lab.1 Easy film Box:
F1: 4 x 400 films 5G9Y6
F2: 2 x 200 films 5KW6V
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Film Tank Kit 5K1TN
Chemicals for the Paper Processor (Easy paper Box) Order no.
Easy paper box for 110 m2 5KPGL
d-lab.1/MSC 101 Paper Tank Kit 5G1RS
Chemicals for the Paper Processor (open chemicals) Order no.

CD Replenisher 5MEPC
BX Replenisher 5MERG
SB Replenisher 5FFVD
Chemical filters + control strips Order no.

Film Processor: Chemical filters for long film cartridges CL+P4-86517
Chemical filters for short film cartridges CL+P4-86518
Paper Processor: Chemical filters CL+P4-86517
Film Processor: Agfa Labcheck CL control strips or BWEZW or
Agfa Process AP 70 control strips BUX5S
Paper Processor: Agfa Process AP 94 control strips BZQ9E
11
11.12.5 Other
Other Order no.
Ink ribbon for back printer CL+P4-6239
Leader cards for film IX140 (APS) CM+7850657063
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 11-33

11.13 Operating and Service Instructions

d-lab.1 / image box workstation Order no. Available languages Language code
Operating Instructions DD+1807010xD0 x = 1 to 7 0 = multilingual
Installation DD+1807008xD0 x = 1 to 7 1 = German
Operation DD+1807003xD0 x = 1 to 7 2 = English
CD-ROM DD+8070-LGCD25 multilingual (1 to 7) 3 = French
CD-ROM Error Compendium DD+8070-LGCD38 multilingual 4 = Italian
Service Instructions DD+18070021D0 — 5 = Spanish
Repair DD+18070022D0 English 6 = Dutch
Preinstallation DD+1807007xD0 x = 1 und 2 7 = Japanese
Installation DD+1807008xD0 x = 1 to 7
Circuit diagrams DD+18070062D0 English
Spare parts list DD+18070050D0 multilingual (1 to 3)
Condensed operating instructions DD+18070040D0 Without words
11.14 Operating Conditions

Room temperature +15 °C to +30 °C
Noise level < 70 dB(A)
Ambient brightness:
Paper transport and Paper Processor maximal 10.000 Lux
Paper magazines maximal 20.000 Lux
11.15 RFI Suppression

CAUTION!
The equipment complies with the limits for a Class A device according to
EN 55022. Operation of the equipment in residential areas may cause radio
interference in which case the owner at his own expense will be requested to take
whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
11.16 Storage and Transport

Temperature range:
max. 72 hours –25 °C to
max. 96 hours +55 °C
Relative humidity of air max. 95%
11-34 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Environmental Protection and Disposal
12 Environmental Protection and Disposal
12.1 Handling of Chemicals
12.1.1 Legal Regulations

The machine is subject to the legal regulations for water:
– Chemicals must not be drained into the public sewage system.
– It must be checked whether residual substances can be avoided, reduced or recycled.
– All photographic solutions as well as plastic containers holding harmful residues are
considered to be special waste.
– When storing exhausted processing solutions, it must be ensured that no waters are
polluted, e.g. by unintentional leakage.
Note:
The regulations for handling and correct disposal of chemistry vary from country to
country. Information about the regulations in force can be obtained from:
– the country’s authorities in charge.
– the nearest AgfaPhoto subsidiary.
12.1.2 Disposal
12.1.2.1 Exhausted Processing Solutions

The used processing solutions are usually only slightly water polluting (Water Polluting
Class 1).
For this reason, these solutions can be stored in commercial containers for processing 12
chemicals until their final disposal.
For larger tanks, a conformity certificate is usually required.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 12-1

Environmental Protection and Disposal d-lab.1 family: Operation
12.1.2.2 Liquid Residues

All solutions that cannot be reused or that do not contain recyclable substances are to be
disposed of as special waste.
However, solutions containing silver are liquid residual substances that can be used for
silver recovery. For this reason, they should be collected separately from the other
solutions.
Solutions containing silver should be collected by companies recycling silver. These
companies usually are also authorized to dispose of processing solutions not containing
any silver.
For tank cleaning, cleaning agents based on peroxides are recommended. If these
substances are used as prescribed, the local regulations about the draining of waste water
are satisfied. This means that the cleaning and wash water used for the tank cleaning can
be drained into the public sewage system.
12.1.2.3 Chemical Containers

Provide for their recycling.
12.2 Disposal of the Machine

The machine must be disposed of as industrial waste.
Consumables, chemicals and spare parts must be disposed of in compliance with the
applying country-specific regulations.
12.3 Energy Saving Hints

The machine may be adjusted in such a way that it will not switch on automatically on
free days.
In Sleep mode all assemblies of the machine will be shut down with the exception of the
Main Processor, it remains on e.g. for statistic checks. It is then switched off automatically
at the indicated time. The Sleep mode is activated by entering this switch-off time. See Ö
Settings / Timer in chapter 4.
12-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Operation Interruption
13 Operation Interruption
13.1 Maximum Two Weeks

It is not necessary to drain the chemicals, if before this time the machine had a high
throughput. However, the following measures must be carried out:
If the throughput was quite low the chemicals should be drained at least after 3-4 days.
The machine can then remain empty for up to 2 weeks.
Measures and instructions for the disposal of chemicals: see Handling of Chemicals in
chapter 12.
Shut down the machine and switch off the

main breaker!
Empty the effluent tanks
Cover the machine with a dust protection
cover
If necessary drain and dispose of the
chemicals according to the instructions
13.2 More Than Two Weeks

The chemicals must be drained. We recommend to fill the machine tanks with water and
not to leave them dry. To avoid algae growth Algezit should be added to the water
according to the description.
CAUTION!
Ö Observe the Safety Instructions for the Handling of Chemicals in chapter 1.
chapter 12. 13
Drain and dispose of the chemicals

according to the instructions.
Empty the effluent tanks and clean them.
Fill the machine tanks with water and add
Algezit.
Then runs the machine for a few minutes:
otherwise the transport rollers get stuck.
Switch off the machine with the main
breaker!
cover.
Mark the machine as “out of order”.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 13-1

Operation Interruption d-lab.1 family: Operation
13.3 Resuming the Operation
13.3.1 Within Two Weeks

Remove the dust cover.
Turn the main breaker on.
Check the chemical tanks for evaporation
and top up with water if necessary.
Wait until the solutions have heated up to
their nominal temperatures; see nominal
temperatures in the section Ö Setting the
Temperatures / Calibrating Sensors in
chapter 4.
Check the quality of the chemicals:
see Ö Process Check in chapter 5.
Set the replenishment rates:
see Ö Paper Processor Settings
(Replenishment Rates, Temperatures, Water
Pumps) in chapter 4.
Carry out the required maintenance jobs:
see Ö Maintenance in chapter 10.
13.3.2 After More than Two Weeks

Remove the dust cover.
Carry out the required maintenance jobs:
see Ö Maintenance in chapter 10.
Put the machine back in operation
Ö as described in the Installation
Instructions.
13-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Operation Interruption
13.4 Decommissioning the Machine

CAUTION!
Ö Observe the Safety Instructions for the Handling of Chemicals in chapter 1.
chapter 12.
Drain and dispose of the chemicals

according to the instructions.
Empty the effluent tanks and clean them.
Empty the main water tank.
Remove the Easy film and Easy paper boxes.
Unplug all connections:
Power
Water if necessary
Network connection if necessary.
cover.
Mark the machine as “out of order”.
13.5 Deinstalling a Machine

The machine must only be deinstalled by an AgfaPhoto Service Engineer or another
authorized person.
13
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 13-3

Operation Interruption d-lab.1 family: Operation
13-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation List of Abbreviations and Glossary
14 List of Abbreviations and Glossary

Explanations of abbreviations and terms used in the Operation Manual.
ACT Area contrast: General contrast

APS Advanced Photo System, film size (IX240 film)
Auto-MBL If the Auto-MBL (Master balance) function is activated, an automatic Ö MBL will be
executed after each machine start.
BL Bleach bath (Film Processor)
B/W Black / White
Buttons Touch-sensitive buttons on the Touch-Screen
BX Bleachfix (Paper Processor)
C Classic, see there
C Cyan
Cartridge Feeder Holder attached to the film feeder for IX240 film cassettes
CD Color Developer: (Film and Paper Processor)
CFL Correction Fluorescent Light: Correction effect for fluorescent light
Classic Print size for the film sizes 135 and IX240; aspect ratio 3:2
Color steps 1,024 shades per color
Shades per pixel = RxGxB = 1024 x 1024 x 1024 = 1,073,824
Combiprint layout The combiprint layouts can be used for multiple printing of an image in different sizes
(Combiprint) or of the same size (passport/ID photo) on one sheet of paper.
CTL Correction Tungsten Light: Correction effect for tungsten light
DCT Detail contrast: Detail contrast
D Density
Density gradations 1,024 steps
min. density 0.1
max. density 2.1
Differences are easier to discern for the human eye at low densities than at high densities.
DEV see CD
Dominant color Every one of the 4 parameters influences the effect of the color correction in such a way,
parameter that negatives / slides / digital files with dominant colors are printed without color casts. 14
dpi dots per inch: Resolution of digital images
dTFS digital Total Film Scanning: Measurement of digital image sources
d-bridge and AgfaPhoto Software for order preparation and management:
d-workflow d-lab.1 plus an image box workstation: d-bridge is installed on the image box workstation.
The Software runs at the background without a user interface.
d-lab.1 plus several units for order preparation, e.g. image box workstations, Pixtasy:
d-workflow is installed on a Server PC. The operator can influence the order processing on
a user interface.
FID Film Identification number (IX240 film)
Film feeder The film feeder transports the film into the negative mask
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 14-1

List of Abbreviations and Glossary d-lab.1 family: Operation
FL Fluorescent Light
FP Film Processor
FX Fixer (Film Processor)
High Vision Special print size for APS films (IX240 film size); aspect ratio 16:9
Indexprint One or two prints (depending on the Layout) on which each frame of an order is shown as a
miniature picture, see Thumbnails.
Indexprint layout Indexprint layouts are used for the printing of indexprints
K Shift correction
LCT Luminosity contrast: Contrast (only for slides)
LD Lane Distributor
LDT Luminosity density: Density (only for slides)
LS Light Sensor
M Magenta
Mainscan Main scan to print negatives and slides
MAK Maximum work space concentrations: The space where the d-lab.1 is operated must be
sufficiently ventilated so that the MAK values are not exceeded.
Master paper The most commonly used paper
MBL Master Balance: The MBL test compensates for minor fluctuations of the chemicals.
MDDM Micro-Dot-Display-Multiplexing:
Micro stepper technology, developed and patented by AgfaPhoto, ensures the high
resolution of the image sharpness.
In this technology the pixels are arranged in an extremely precise pattern and hardly
overlapping, which provides for sharper images with the same resolution than available in
comparable technologies.
Another advantage: The used LED light source is extremely reliable and needs hardly any
maintenance which saves the regular replacement of the print lamp.
ML Magazine left: Paper magazine, left hand side
MR Magazine right: Paper magazine, right hand side
P Panorama, see there
PA Paper Advance: Paper transport
Package Order configuration for automatic printing of several print sizes per negative, slide or image
file
Panorama Print size for the film sizes 135 and IX240; aspect ratio 3:1
Paper configuration Combination of a paper width and a paper surface (must correspond to the switch setting on
the paper magazine)
PAR Print Aspect Ratio = aspect ratio between the width and the length of the print, see also
High Vision, Classic and Panorama
PBL Paper Balance: The PBL test compensates for the differences among the various paper types
and widths, and provides for uniform rendering of the colors on all paper emulsions in use.
PDM The PDM (PfDF Data Manager) – for AgfaPhoto the Software Ö d-workflow and d-bridge –
manages the order files. It saves digital orders (images and PFDF information) until they are
called by a receiving station (d-lab.1).
14-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation List of Abbreviations and Glossary
PE Print Engine: Exposure unit

PfDF Photo Finishing Data Format is a standardized format for order data to be used in networks.
Pico Pixel correction: Balancing the individual pixels of the CCD chip so that the black value
(dark current) and the white value (sensitivity) are identical / reproducible for the
subsequent signal processing.
Pixel Pixel = picture element
PP Paper Proccessor
Print sizes High Vision, Classic and Panorama for film size IX240
Classic and Panorama for film size 135
Quantity Number of prints, Indexprints or CDs
Reorder Reorder
RGB Correction values for Red, Green, Blue
RSD Back print: Print of selected parameters on the back of the prints, e.g. frame number, order
number, date
SAT Saturation
SB Stabilizer solutions (Film and Paper Processor)
SC Scanner
Selector parameter The selector parameters detect negatives which can be assigned to certain categories of
incorrect exposures.
SHP Sharpness
TFS Total Film Scanning: AgfaPhoto total film scanning
True single-channel printing for all film brands, types and formats, also B/W.
Thumbnail Miniature size of the images on the Indexprint or on the screen, e.g. on the image box
workstation when entering digital images from external media (camera cards or CD).
Timer Integrated Timer: Controls the automatic switching-on for work and the so-called Sleep
mode, in which all components of the machine are shut down with the exception of the
Main Computer (e.g. for statistical checks).
TL Tungsten Light: Tungsten light, light of bulbs
Touch Screen Touch-sensitive monitor
VAT Value Added Tax (sales tax)
YMCD Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Density: Color / density corrections
14
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 14-3

List of Abbreviations and Glossary d-lab.1 family: Operation
14-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.1 family: Operation Index
15 Index
A C
Abbreviations ..................................................................................14-1 CD burning......................................................................................... 8-6
Administrator ................................................................2-23, 4-8, 4-9 d-lab.1 / netlab.1.....................................................................8-48
Functions ...................................................................................... 7-6 image box workstation ..........................................................7-70
Tasks............................................................................................... 4-2 With preview .............................................................................7-71
Air Filters, cleaning / replacing ............................................ 10-27 CD production................................................................11-11, 11-12
Ambient brightness ................................................................... 11-34 CE Symbol.......................................................................................... 1-1
Ambient conditions ......................................................................11-9 Checking the solution levels
APS ..........................................................................................see IX240 Film Processor........................................................................ 10-14
Artificial light detection..............................................................4-56 Paper Processor..................................................................... 10-15
Autosave configurations Checklist maintenance jobs
Define...........................................................................................7-44 d-lab.1 ..........................................................................................10-2
Edit ............................................................................................. 4-104 Engineer ......................................................................................10-4
List.................................................................................. 4-103, 7-44 image box workstation ..........................................................10-3
Standard ................................................................................... 4-103 Chemical control strips processing, Paper Processor... 10-12
Chemical filters
B Inserting .........................................................................................3-7
Back print...................................................................................... 11-13 Replacing................................................................................. 10-28
Explanation of abbreviations ...............................................7-40 Chemicals........................................................................................... 3-1
Explanation of the shortcuts................................................4-91 Check the quality.................................................................. 10-11
IX240............................................................................................4-92 Film Processor........................................................................ 11-10
Parameters .................................................................................7-40 Legal regulations .....................................................................12-1
Parameters (film mask-dependent)...................................4-90 Paper Processor..................................................................... 11-14
Back print configurations Safety precautions...................................................................1-14
Define...........................................................................................7-39 Safety regulations...................................................................... 3-2
Edit .................................................................................... 4-90, 4-91 Storage.........................................................................................1-23
List..................................................................................... 4-88, 7-39 Tank mixing.................................................................................. 3-6
Standard ......................................................................................4-88 Circuit diagrams.......................................................................... 11-34
Back printer, changing the ink ribbon................................ 10-33 Cleaning
Backup, delete................................................................................7-62 Air filter in the Film Processor dryer.............................. 10-27
Bath circulation Air filter in the Paper Processor ...................................... 10-28
Film Processor........................................................................ 11-10 Air filter in the Printer (fan box) ...................................... 10-27
Paper Processor..................................................................... 11-14 APS film mask...........................................................................10-7
Border, colored................................................................... 7-87, 8-58 Chemical filters in the Film Processor.......................... 10-16
Brightness ........................................................................................4-50 Chemical filters in the Paper Processor....................... 10-16
Brightness, Lights / Medium tones / Shadows ..... 4-47, 7-84 Densitometer calibration plate ....................................... 10-23
Burning CD, d-lab.1 ......................................................................4-66 Drive rollers in the film mask .............................................10-9
Button ?................................................................................. 2-29, 7-97 Dryer rack ................................................................................ 10-25
Button i ................................................................................. 2-29, 7-97 Exposure table........................................................................ 10-32
Button Stop ...........................................................2-29, 7-97, 7-101 Film brush for films IX240 ................................................ 10-10
Buttons...................................................................... 2-15, 2-28, 2-30 Film brushes top/bottom................................................... 10-10
15
Buzzer when touching................................................................... 4-7 Film chute................................................................................ 10-19
C Film mask ................................................................................ 10-17
Calendar................................................................................4-30, 4-31 Film takeup ............................................................................. 10-19
Calibrating the machine, special cases ...................................5-9 Lane distributor...................................................................... 10-20
Calibrating the machine after first operation Lens............................................................................................ 10-18
or after new software installation............................................. 5-3 Paper guide in the Paper Processor............................... 10-21
Calibration Processing racks in the Film Processor........................ 10-30
Non-master paper...................................................................... 5-9 Processing racks in the Paper Processor ..................... 10-31
Scanner (Pico) ...........................................................................5-10 Rack rollers in the Film Processor.................................. 10-13
upon deviations in production.............................................. 5-9 Rack rollers in the Paper Processor ............................... 10-13
Calibration with MBL ..................................................................... 5-8 Short Leaders.............................................................................10-7
CBT, start ..........................................................................................7-94 Sorter......................................................................................... 10-26
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 15-1

Index d-lab.1 family: Operation
C D
(Cleaning) Data backup.....................................................................................1-23
Squeegee unit in the Film Processor ............................10-17 Data input/output......................................................................11-12
Squeegee unit in the Paper Processor..........................10-21 Date/time.........................................................................................4-68
Tank crossovers in the Paper Processor .......................10-21 Declaration of Conformity............................................................ 1-4
Cleaning agents, tank cleaning ...............................................12-2 Densitometer ................................................................... 2-14, 11-14
Cleaning material.......................................................................10-36 Designation of persons.................................................................. 1-9
Clickrate............................................................................................8-62 Detail contrast ................................................................................4-45
Color...................................................................................................4-83 Digital orders, settings ................................................................4-63
Define...........................................................................................8-59 Dimensions
Select ...........................................................................................8-58 Components...............................................................................11-3
Color / Density corrections .......................................................7-81 image box .................................................................... 11-3, 11-12
Color and DX corrections ...........................................................4-61 Machine packed / unpacked...............................................11-2
Color/density corrections ..........................................................8-52 Disposal
Normal, over- and underexposures, DX code- Chemical containers...............................................................12-2
dependent...................................................................................4-62 Complete machine..................................................................12-2
Normal, over- and underexposures, DX code- Exhausted processing solutions .........................................12-1
independent...............................................................................4-61 Liquid residues ..........................................................................12-2
Color/density logic.......................................................................4-55 d-lab.1 family .................................................................................... 2-1
Combiprint configurations Docking station, Film Processor and Paper Processor ...... 3-8
Define...........................................................................................7-52 Documentation................................................................................. 1-2
Edit ................................................................................................4-99 Dominant parameters ..................................................................4-55
List .................................................................................................4-98 DPOF...................................................................................................7-16
Combiprint layout .........................................................................4-66 Settings........................................................................................7-25
Import...............................................................................4-32, 7-21 Dryer
Condensed operating instructions .......................................11-34 Film Processor........................................................................11-10
Configuration Paper Processor .....................................................................11-14
Change.........................................................................................7-76 dTFS ..................................................................................... 7-29, 11-13
Changing / modifying............................................................8-10 DX code.............................................................................................4-61
Show .............................................................................................7-69 DX configurations..........................................................................4-62
Configuration type ......................................................... 4-109, 7-55 DX corrections................................................................................4-62
Configurations .................................................................................. 4-1
Autosave....................................................................... 4-103, 7-44 E
Back print....................................................................................4-88 Easy film Box..................................................................................... 3-8
Combiprint......................................................................4-98, 7-51 Easy mode ............................................................................7-67, 8-13
Correction .......................................................................4-84, 7-41 Allocating configurations...................................................4-102
Creating, changing, deleting ...................................4-71, 7-33 Allowing/refusing Network Orders ................................4-101
Easy ............................................................................................4-101 Configurations........................................................................4-101
Front print .......................................................................4-93, 7-37 Status displays in the Easy dialog .....................................8-15
image box workstation ..........................................................7-15 Easy paper Box.................................................................................. 3-8
Indexprint........................................................................4-95, 7-49 Effluent tanks
Load................................................................................ 4-113, 7-61 Emptying, Film Processor ..................................................10-34
Order ..........................................................................................4-106 Emptying, Paper Processor................................................10-35
Print sizes ...................................................................................4-73 Film Processor........................................................................11-10
Product................................................................. 4-70, 7-32, 7-54 Paper Processor .....................................................................11-14
Save................................................................................ 4-112, 7-60 Electrical requirements ...............................................................11-9
Conformity declaration.................................................................. 1-8 End of work .................................................. 2-19, 2-25, 2-26, 2-27
Consumables.................................................................... 1-10, 10-36 Overview......................................................................................2-40
Consumables, Ordering Aid ....................................................11-30 Environmental protection and disposal ................................12-1
Copyright ............................................................................................ 1-8 Error list................................................................................... 2-47, 9-8
Correction configurations Error messages ................................................................................. 9-2
Define...........................................................................................7-42 Help...............................................................................................9-10
Edit ................................................................................................4-85 Errors during production .............................................................9-19
List .....................................................................................4-84, 7-41 Evaporation compensation .....................................................10-14
Correction intensity, production balance .............................4-41 Film Processor..........................................................10-14, 11-10
Correction, change........................................................................7-77 Paper Processor .......................................................10-15, 11-14
Country-specific settings.................................................. 2-21, 4-6 Execute test
Crop ......................................................................... 7-82, 8-57, 11-13 Bright Pico..................................................................................5-10
PBL (for master paper).............................................................. 5-3
Pico manual ...............................................................................5-11
15-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

E H
Exposure............................................................................................2-12 Help ..............................................................2-29, 2-49, 7-97, 7-100
Exposure system ......................................................................... 11-12 Error messages..........................................................................9-10
Overview .........................................................................2-41, 7-13
F Hotline...............................................................................................1-10
Feeding film, Film Feeder...........................................................8-27
File format..................................................................................... 11-11 I
File print...................................................................................8-6, 8-45 image box
d-lab.1 ..........................................................................................4-66 Preparing it for usage of the workstation software....... 7-1
Files, searching...............................................................................4-33 Switch on...................................................................................... 7-1
Film image box workstation
Exit.................................................................................................8-23 Brightness / Contrast setting .......................................... 7-104
Feed ..............................................................................................8-23 Clean ......................................................................................... 10-35
Preparing....................................................................................... 6-1 Finish / Shutdown...................................................................7-96
Film and negative sizes ..............................................................11-8 Operation ....................................................................................7-63
Film jam Place of operation / ambient conditions........................1-19
During operation ......................................................................9-10 Settings / Configurations .....................................................7-15
During startup ...........................................................................9-11 Tests..............................................................................................7-92
Removal ......................................................................................9-10 Troubleshooting..................................................................... 7-105
Film mask, changing....................................................................6-13 Image editing.............................................................2-8, 7-80, 8-55
Film Processing.....................................................................2-9, 8-23 Image enhancement............................................ 4-49, 7-83, 8-53
Only................................................................................................. 8-1 Image processing ..........................................................................2-11
With Printing .............................................................................8-25 Image Viewer..................................................................................7-45
Without Printing ......................................................................8-28 Import Combiprint Layout..........................................................4-32
Film processing and printing Import Indexprint Layout............................................................4-32
Film size 135............................................................................... 8-2 Indexprint ...................................................................................... 11-13
Film size IX240 .......................................................................... 8-2 Indexprint configurations ...........................................................7-50
Film processing magazine Edit ................................................................................................4-96
Coding............................................................................................ 6-7 List.................................................................................................4-95
Insert film ..................................................................................... 6-7 Indexprint layout ...........................................................................4-66
Inserting in the Film Processor ..........................................8-26 Edit ................................................................................................4-34
Film Processor, opening / closing.............................................3-3 Import...............................................................................4-32, 7-21
Film Processor settings...............................................................4-21 Standard ..........................................................................4-35, 4-97
Film sizes.........................................................................11-10, 11-11 Info..........................................................................................2-43, 7-97
Processable in the Film Processor ...........................6-1, 8-23 Film Processor...........................................................................2-44
Film splicing (film to the leader card) ..................................... 6-4 Orders...........................................................................................7-98
Film Splicing Station...................................................................... 6-3 Overview .........................................................................2-41, 7-13
Film transport, manual.................................................................. 9-3 Paper Processor........................................................................2-46
Filmbox.................................................................................. 3-1, 11-33 Printer ..........................................................................................2-45
Filmbox, inserting............................................................................ 3-9 Scanner........................................................................................2-44
Finish, image box workstation..................................................7-96 Versions...........................................................................2-46, 7-99
Front print configurations Information area .................................................... 2-28, 2-29, 7-97
Define...........................................................................................7-37 Input formats (image files in image box workstation) ....7-63
Edit ................................................................................................4-94 Input screen ....................................................................................2-33
List.................................................................................................4-93 Instructions........................................................................................ 1-2
15
Functional procedure ..................................................................... 2-9 Instructions, order nos.............................................................. 11-34
Further menus, overview ............................................................7-14 Interfaces..........................................................................................11-9
IPLayout Software .........................................................................4-34
G IX240
Global settings ...............................................................................7-46 Back print ...................................................................................4-92
Glossary.............................................................................................14-1 Coding of the camera.............................................................4-76
Gradation..........................................................................................4-44 Film cassette .............................................................................6-14
Gradient correction......................................................................... 5-6 Film coding ................................................................................4-92
Greeting cards ...........................................................see Combiprint Film status indication.............................................................6-14
H Handling......................................................................................6-14
Handling problems, avoiding ...................................................... 9-1
Heat emission.................................................................................11-9
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 15-3

K N
Keyboard Negative crop..................................................................................4-37
Alphanumeric ............................................................................2-33 Network..........................................................................................11-11
Assignment ................................................................................2-22 Network connections...................................................................4-64
Character set..............................................................................7-18 Network orders ..................................................................... 8-5, 8-31
Image............................................................................................2-33 Delete...........................................................................................7-90
Numeric .......................................................................................2-34 Deleting.......................................................................................8-32
Reorder.........................................................................................2-35 Order selection .........................................................................8-18
Selection ....................................................................................... 4-7 Settings........................................................................................7-26
Keys, Reorder keyboard...............................................................2-36 New orders .......................................................................................7-73
kiosk, change to kiosk Software ..............................................7-93 New Start.......................................................................................7-101
Noise level ........................................................................ 11-9, 11-34
L Numeric keypad .............................................................................2-34
Label print ........................................................................................7-24
Customer specific logo ..........................................................7-25 O
Lane distributor ...........................................................................11-15 Off-days, defining ..........................................................................4-31
Language Offsets................................................................................................4-18
Selection ................................................................2-22, 4-7, 7-18 ON button............................................................................... 2-15, 9-7
Setting..........................................................................................2-21 ON button on the housing ........................................................... 9-5
Layout texts .....................................................................................7-52 Open chemicals .............................................................................3-11
Layouts, import...............................................................................7-21 Opening / closing
LCD resolution .............................................................................11-12 Film Processor............................................................................. 3-3
Leader card......................................................................................... 6-5 Paper Processor .......................................................................... 3-4
Legal situation.................................................................................. 1-8 Operating controls ........................................................................2-15
Lens .................................................................................................11-11 Operating Instructions..............................................................11-34
Liability, exclusion ........................................................................1-10 Operation
Licenses.............................................................................................7-19 Discontinue ................................................................................13-3
Load, configurations and settings ........................................4-113 image box workstation ..........................................................7-63
Luminance........................................................................................4-87 Interruption ................................................................................13-1
Resume ........................................................................................13-2
M Operation manual
Machine Explanations................................................................................. 1-3
Components................................................................................. 2-7 Guideline....................................................................................... 1-4
Decommission ..........................................................................13-3 Representation means ............................................................. 1-5
Deinstall ......................................................................................13-3 Warnings ....................................................................................... 1-8
Main components...................................................................... 2-5 Operator login.................................................................................2-19
Machine settings ................................................................. 4-4, 7-16 Optional Accessories
Overview .........................................................................2-39, 7-12 d-lab.1 allrounder 1..............................................................11-17
Machine tanks, preparing............................................................. 3-5 d-lab.1 allrounder 2..............................................................11-18
Main control ....................................................................................11-9 d-lab.1 plus..............................................................................11-19
Main menus.....................................................................................2-28 d-lab.1 starter .........................................................................11-16
Maintenance d-lab.1s basic 1......................................................................11-22
Daily..............................................................................................10-7 d-lab.1s basic 2......................................................................11-23
image box workstation .......................................................10-35 d-lab.1s plus............................................................................11-24
Intervals.......................................................................................10-2 d-lab.1s starter .......................................................................11-21
Monthly ....................................................................................10-27 d-lab.1s starter oc .................................................................11-20
Weekly ......................................................................................10-14 netlab.1 allrounder...............................................................11-26
When required .......................................................................10-33 netlab.1 plus ...........................................................................11-27
Manual Positioning.......................................................................8-37 netlab.1 starter oc.................................................................11-25
Manufacturer information ............................................................ 1-8 Optional software ..............................................................4-65, 7-19
MBL test.............................................................................................. 5-2 Clickrate ......................................................................................8-62
Prerequisites ................................................................................ 5-2 Options ..............................................................................................11-9
Printing .......................................................................................... 5-3 Order configurations..................................................................4-106
Measuring units ............................................................................... 4-3 Edit .............................................................................................4-109
Memory space (order volume)..................................................7-31 List ..............................................................................................4-108
Menu bar...........................................................................................2-36 Select sub-configurations ..................................................4-110
Menu overview...................................................................2-37, 7-10 Standard ...................................................................................4-107
Monitor..............................................................................................2-16
15-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

O P
Order Handling, overview..................................................7-65, 8-1 (PBL Test)
Order in d-workflow......................................................................7-69 For master paper ........................................................................ 5-3
Order numbers Prerequisites................................................................................ 5-2
Attaching to films...................................................................... 6-4 without MBL (exception)......................................................... 5-9
Automatic / manual)................................................................ 8-9 Photographic paper, storage .....................................................1-23
Concentrate ................................................................................. 3-1 Pico.........................................................................................5-10, 5-11
Replenishers ................................................................................ 3-1 Pixel correction ...................................................................... see Pico
Order selection...............................................................................8-17 Popup windows ............................................................... 2-31, 7-102
Network orders .........................................................................8-18 Portrait logic ....................................4-46, 4-49, 7-42, 7-43, 7-46
Order handling continued.....................................................8-18 Preparing orders, conventional .................................................. 6-1
Overview .....................................................................................8-19 Preview..............................................................................................8-49
Setting .........................................................................................8-20 Print Engine.....................................................................................2-11
Ordering aid Print modes ............................................................................2-19, 8-7
Consumables.......................................................................... 11-30 image box workstation ..........................................................7-66
Instructions ............................................................................. 11-34 Overview .........................................................................2-37, 7-10
Orders, saved...................................................................................7-74 Print resolution ........................................................................... 11-12
Other menus, overview ...............................................................2-42 Print size
Other Settings ................................................................................7-29 135 ................................................................................................4-75
Digital...........................................................................................4-80
P IX240............................................................................................4-76
Paper Reproduction .............................................................................4-82
Define paper configuration ..................................................4-17 Slide..............................................................................................4-78
Define surfaces ............................................................. 4-14, 7-35 Print sizes.......................................................................... 11-9, 11-13
Define widths ................................................................ 4-15, 7-36 List.................................................................................................4-74
Display ........................................................................................... 8-8 Standard ......................................................................................4-73
Paper configurations ....................................................................7-48 Printer settings...............................................................................4-36
Paper jam Printing an MBL test ...................................................................... 5-3
Cutter ...........................................................................................9-14 Printing without film processing.............................................8-29
Dryer .............................................................................................9-18 Process check
During operation ......................................................................9-12 Film Processor........................................................................ 10-11
During startup ...........................................................................9-12 Paper Processor..................................................................... 10-12
Exposure table...........................................................................9-14 Processing times ...........................................................................11-8
Lane distributor.........................................................................9-16 Film Processor........................................................................ 11-10
Paper magazines......................................................................9-13 Paper Processor..................................................................... 11-14
Paper outlet ...............................................................................9-18 Product configurations ................................................................4-70
Paper Processor........................................................................9-17 Define...........................................................................................7-56
Paper transport, general notes ...........................................9-13 List.................................................................................................7-54
Removal ......................................................................................9-12 Product description ........................................................................ 2-8
Wet section................................................................................9-17 Production
Paper magazine Results .........................................................................................8-62
Change.........................................................................................6-12 Statistics......................................................................................4-66
Coding.............................................................................. 4-12, 6-11 Production balance
Insert paper................................................................................6-10 Portrait logic..................................................................4-46, 7-43
Preparation................................................................................... 6-8 Red-eyes..........................................................................4-45, 7-43 15
Paper magazines ........................................................................ 11-13 Production Balance
Paper offsets....................................................................................4-18 Brightness.......................................................................4-47, 7-84
Paper Processor .............................................................................2-12 Call-up .........................................................................................4-39
Important advice................................................................... 10-15 Color negative...........................................................................4-51
Settings .......................................................................................4-25 Color/density corrections.....................................................4-48
Paper Processor, opening / closing ......................................... 3-4 Common parameters for color negative and digital...4-41
Paper transport................................................................ 2-12, 11-13 Correction intensity ................................................................4-41
Paper widths................................................................................. 11-13 Detail contrast ..........................................................................4-45
Paperbox............................................................................... 3-1, 11-33 Different parameters for color negative and digital ...4-47
Paperbox, inserting.......................................................................3-10 Digital...........................................................................................4-48
Passport layout, import...............................................................7-21 General ........................................................................................4-38
PBL Test ...............................................................................................5-2 Gradation ....................................................................................4-44
Copying paper data................................................................... 5-5 Image enhancement ..................................................4-49, 4-51
For all other papers ................................................................... 5-4
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 15-5

P S
(Production Balance) Scanner
Panorama identification ........................................................4-54 Calibration .......................................................................... see Pico
Parameters, overview .............................................................4-40 Profile ...........................................................................................7-29
Saturation ...................................................................................4-43 System ...................................................................................... 11-11
Sharpness - edges....................................................................4-42 Scanning ...........................................................................................2-10
Sharpness – grain ....................................................................4-43 Film drive stop ............................................................................ 9-4
Surface contrast........................................................................4-44 Scratch correction .........................................................................4-37
Production capacity......................................................................11-8 Screen structure.................................................................2-16, 2-28
Production on the d-lab.1............................................................. 8-1 Searching files ................................................................................4-33
Pulldown menu ..............................................................................2-30 Selecting the application ........................................................7-106
Service manual............................................................................11-34
R Settings ................................................................................... 2-19, 4-1
Readiness for operation ..............................................................2-19 Chemistry...................................................................................... 4-4
Red eyes............................................................................................4-49 Country-specific.......................................................................... 4-6
Red-eyes correction.................................. 4-45, 7-42, 7-43, 7-46 Digital orders .............................................................................4-63
Relative humidity .......................................................................11-34 DPOF.............................................................................................7-25
Reorder keyboard...........................................................................2-35 Film Processor...........................................................................4-21
Reorder lists, entering .................................................................8-36 Global ...........................................................................................7-46
Reorders .................................................................................. 8-3, 8-34 image box workstation ..........................................................7-15
Replacing chemical filters Label printer...............................................................................7-24
Film Processor........................................................................10-29 Load................................................................................ 4-113, 7-61
Paper Processor .....................................................................10-29 Machine............................................................................. 4-5, 7-16
Replenisher boxes ........................................................11-30, 11-33 Network orders..........................................................................7-26
Replenisher mixing with Easy Boxes........................................ 3-8 Order ............................................................................................... 4-3
Replenisher tank, Film Processor and Paper Processor .... 3-8 Other.................................................................................4-69, 7-29
Replenisher tanks Overview..........................................................................2-38, 7-11
Film Processor........................................................................11-10 Paper............................................................................................... 4-4
Paper Processor .....................................................................11-14 Paper Offsets..............................................................................4-18
Replenishment ..............................................................11-10, 11-14 Paper Processor ........................................................................4-25
Replenishment rates Printer...........................................................................................4-36
Film Processor...........................................................................4-21 Save...............................................................................................7-60
Paper Processor ........................................................................4-25 Save............................................................................................4-112
Replenishment throughput-dependent Scanner........................................................................................4-37
Film Processor...........................................................................4-21 Sequence ...................................................................................... 7-7
Paper Processor ........................................................................4-25 System date / time.................................................................7-28
Representation means, Safety instructions........................... 1-6 System date/time....................................................................4-68
Reprints .............................................................................................8-30 Timer.............................................................................................4-29
Reproduction...................................................................................4-81 Sharpness – edges........................................................................4-42
Reset .................................................................................................... 9-6 Sharpness – grain..........................................................................4-43
Film Processor............................................................................. 9-3 Shift correction...............................................................................4-57
Note ................................................................................................ 9-1 Shutdown
Software......................................................................................... 9-6 d-lab.1 ..........................................................................................2-25
System ........................................................................................... 9-7 image box ...................................................................................7-96
Resolution for scanning ...........................................................11-11 Overview......................................................................................7-13
RFI suppression ...........................................................................11-34 Silver recovery ................................................................................12-2
Room temperature.....................................................................11-34 Skin hue ............................................................................................7-46
S Sleep mode..........................................................................2-27, 4-29
Safety devices.................................................................................1-12 Slide crop..........................................................................................4-37
Safety instructions ........................................................................1-11 Slide film ..........................................................................................8-43
d-lab.1 family.............................................................................1-12 Slide Print............................................................................... 8-5, 8-40
image box workstation ..........................................................1-21 Slope ................................................ see Color and DX corrections
Safety regulations ........................................................................... 3-2 Software
Saturation.........................................................................................4-43 Enabling optional components...............................4-66, 7-20
Save, configurations and settings ........................................4-112 Install main software..................................................4-66, 7-20
Saved orders ............................................................ 7-73, 7-78, 8-30 Ordering optional components...............................4-65, 7-19
Saved Orders ...................................................................................7-74 Update..........................................................................................7-23
Scanner, settings ...........................................................................4-37 Sorter................................................................................... 2-13, 11-14
15-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

S T
Space requirement, d-lab.1 / image box..............................11-4 (Technical data)
Spare Parts.......................................................................................1-10 Paper transport ...................................................................... 11-13
Spare parts list............................................................................. 11-34 Printing..................................................................................... 11-13
Special...............................................................................................7-85 Scanner..................................................................................... 11-11
Special products ......................................................................... 11-13 Storage...................................................................................... 11-34
Splices ...............................................................................................4-60 Transport .................................................................................. 11-34
Splices in paper rolls....................................................................2-14 Versions.......................................................................................11-1
Standard.................................................................... 7-72, 7-73, 8-21 Temperature control
Autosave configurations..................................................... 4-103 Film Processor........................................................................ 11-10
Back print configuration .......................................................4-88 Paper Processor..................................................................... 11-15
Indexprint layout......................................................................4-35 Temperature sensors, calibration
Indexprint layouts....................................................................4-97 Film Processor...........................................................................4-23
Loading image files from storage media ........................7-72 Paper Processor........................................................................4-27
Modifiy a Scanned Image .....................................................7-89 Temperatures
Order configurations............................................................ 4-107 Film Processor...........................................................................4-23
Paper surface, paper width, paper configuration .........4-11 Paper Processor........................................................................4-27
Print sizes ...................................................................................4-73 Test, PBL (all other papers) ...........................................................5-4
Scan image ................................................................................7-88 Test Prints .......................................................................................... 5-2
Standard Print, Preview...............................................................7-79 Tests ...................................................................................................2-19
Standards and rules........................................................................ 1-1 image box workstation ..........................................................7-92
Start screen .....................................................................................2-19 Overview .........................................................................2-40, 7-13
Start training ...................................................................................7-94 Text, colored....................................................................................7-86
Statistics, production ...................................................................4-66 TFS........................................................................................ 4-53, 11-13
Status information ............................................................ 2-29, 7-97 Density.........................................................................................4-58
Status line........................................................................................2-28 Learning mode..........................................................................4-53
STOP button ....................................................................................2-15 Selector .......................................................................................4-60
STOP button on the housing....................................................... 9-5 Selector logic ............................................................................4-59
Stop button on the screen ........................................................... 9-5 Timer
Storage Calling..........................................................................................2-26
Chemicals...................................................................................1-23 Changing.....................................................................................2-26
Photographic paper.................................................................1-23 Lamp....................................................................................2-15, 9-5
Surface contrast.............................................................................4-44 Setting .........................................................................................4-29
Switch functions......................................................................... 7-104 Touch-sensitive fields ................................................... see Buttons
Switch-off times (Sleep mode).................................................4-29 Transport system
Switch-on Film Processor........................................................................ 11-10
Automatic (Timer) ....................................................................2-18 Paper Processor..................................................................... 11-15
image box ..................................................................................... 7-1 Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 9-7
Manual.........................................................................................2-17 image box workstation ....................................................... 7-105
Times (Timer).............................................................................4-29 Other error situations ............................................................... 9-9
System start ....................................................................................2-18 Paper Processor error ............................................................... 9-9
Printer transport errors ............................................................ 9-9
T Unsolved errors........................................................................... 9-8
Tank capacities Twin check label...................................................................4-60, 6-5
Film Processor........................................................................ 11-10
15
Paper Processor..................................................................... 11-14 U
Tank preparation Use
Film Processor........................................................................ 11-10 Appropriate................................................................................... 1-7
Paper Processor..................................................................... 11-14 Inappropriate ............................................................................... 1-7
Technical data ................................................................................11-1 Purpose.......................................................................................... 1-7
Complete system.....................................................................11-9 User
Digital input on the machine or via network............. 11-11 Change.........................................................................................2-24
Digital input via image box............................................... 11-12 Create..................................................................................2-23, 4-8
Exposure unit.......................................................................... 11-12 Define standard user...............................................................4-29
Film Processor........................................................................ 11-10 Define user rights ...................................................................... 4-9
Operating conditions........................................................... 11-34 Edit user-specific settings ...................................................... 4-9
Paper Processor..................................................................... 11-14 List................................................................................................... 4-8
Rights (overview) .....................................................................4-10
Specify rights.............................................................................2-23
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 15-7

U W
User interface..................................................................................11-9 Water tank ......................................................................................... 3-8
User interface, define......................................................... 4-6, 7-18 Filling.............................................................................................. 3-9
User manager............................................................... 4-8, 4-9, 7-17 Weight ...............................................................................................11-9
Machine packed / unpacked...............................................11-2
V Windows ............................................................................... see Popup
Versions, d-lab.1 family................................................................. 2-1
Versions, Illustrations / Machine Dimensions ...................11-5 X
XML export.......................................................................................7-60
W XML import......................................................................................7-61
Waiting orders ....................................................................7-73, 7-75 X-Offset .............................................................................................4-18
Warnings and information labels on the d-lab.1...............1-16
Warranty ...........................................................................................1-10 Y
Water Polluting Class 1 ..............................................................12-1 Y-Offset..............................................................................................4-18
Water pumps, calibration
Film Processor...........................................................................4-24
Paper Processor ........................................................................4-28
15-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

Operating Instructions: D-Lab.1 Family

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions: D-Lab.1 Family

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

Version Edition Modifications

Published in compliance with EN 55022 (valid in EU):

© 2005 AgfaPhoto GmbH. All rights reserved.

AgfaPhoto is used under license of Agfa-Gevaert AG.

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-i

0-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

2.10.5 Input Screen.................................................................................................................................................2-33

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-iii

4 Settings and Configurations ............................................................................................... 4-1

0-iv 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

4.6.4 Identical Parameters for Color Negatives and Digital .................................................................4-41

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-v

4.15 Front Print Configurations....................................................................................................................................... 4-93

0-vi 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

6.1.5 Film Splicing Station ...................................................................................................................................6-3

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-vii

7.8 Other Settings ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-29

0-viii 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

7.13.3 Easy Mode.....................................................................................................................................................7-67

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-ix

8 Production on the d-lab.1 .................................................................................................. 8-1

0-x 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-xi

0-xii 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

10.7 Weekly Maintenance............................................................................................................................................. 10-14

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 0-xiii

11.2 Complete System....................................................................................................................................................... 11-9

0-xiv 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.1.1 Standards and Rules

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-1

1.2 Explanations regarding the Operation and Service Manual

1.2.1 Available Documentation

Operation manual Owner Operator Engineer Available languages

Service manual Owner Operator Engineer Available languages Explanation

Spare Parts List x x M (= DEF)

1-2 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.2.2 Use of the Operation Manual

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-3

1.2.3 Guideline for the User

1-4 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.2.4 Means of Representation

1.2.4.1 Descriptive and instructive texts

– Illustration or  This symbol identifies an action to be carried

1.2.4.2 Text Styles and Symbols

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-5

1.2.4.3 Safety Instructions

1-6 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.3 Use of the Machines

1.3.2 Appropriate Use

1.3.3 Inappropriate Use

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-7

1.4 Legal Situation

1.4.1 Manufacturer Information

1-8 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.5 Warranty and Liability

1.5.1 Designation of Persons

1.5.2 Owner’s Obligation

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 1-9

1.5.4 Exclusion of Liability

1.6 Consumables and Spare Parts

1-10 2005-05-01 / PN 03003_04 AgfaPhoto

1.8 Safety Instructions

– Illustration or This symbol identifies an action to be carried

Be sure to read the operation manual